Alfa Laval Sa 851

E
..en
G)
=-
In
c
....ca
o
.-
ca
a.
i G)
! en
,! System Manual
ElI1Iglish
- - - ._.. --
IMO SHIP IDENTIFICATION NO
DEP'T SHIP NO.
I IMO 9362437
SHIP TYPE
D0330
S321 1,700 TEU CLASS CONTAINER CARRIER
TEL. SHIP DESIGN OFFICE SHIP NAME
2968 MACHINERY OUTFITTING DESIGN DEP'T CMA CGM PLATON
TITLE
I. K. PARK
APPROVED BY
CHECKED BY
S. T. CHEONG PURIFIERS (414)
H. S. KEE
DRAWN BY
SCALE DWGNO. REV. NO ,
•
,
NONE 6U-2843-165 I
DATE CONSOLIDATED NO. /':
Hyundai Samho Heavy Industries Co., Ltd. 2007.06.27 M-75 Ot;L¥
SA 851 Separation System
System Manual - English
~ Safety 1
~
SA851 System Description

Separation
2
System
Operating Instructions
3
Parameter List
4
Alarms and Fault Finding

5
Only foreseeable conditions have been taken Into

consideration. No warnings are given for
Installation System
situations arising from unintended usage of the Reference 6
system components and tools.
Service Manual
AlIa Laval Marine & Diesel
7
Equipment
Spare Parts Catalogue

Printed Gct 2004 8
Book No. 1817362·02
Product No. 569593-02
•
Alfa Laval reserves the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
Any comments regarding possible errors and omissions or

suggestions for improvement of this publication would be
gratefully appreciated.
Copies of this publication can be ordered from your local

Alfa Laval company.
Published by: Alfa Laval Tumba AB

Marine & Diesel Equipment
SE - 14780 Tumba
•
Sweden
© Copyright Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2004.

Dear reader,
It is our ambition to produce manuals which are as useful and instructive as possible. If you have any
comments, positive or negative, please write them down on this form and send the form to us by fax or mail,
or leave it with your local Alfa Laval representative.
Alfa Laval Tumba Ab, Marine & Diesel Equipment, Technical PublicationsJEMO, SE-147 80 Tumba,
Sweden.
Fax:+46 8 53060522
Your Name: Company:

Address: City:
Country:
E-mail:
System Manual information:
System .
• Product No .
Book No ..
Yes No
Is it easy to find what you are looking for by using the table of contents? LJ L1
Are the chapter and section headings clear and adequate? LJ L1
Is the information presented in the correct order for your purposes? LJ L1
Does the information in the manual cover your needs? L1 LJ
Is it easy to understand the instructions in the manual? L1 LJ
Is the terminology easy to understand? L1 LJ
Are the illustrations easy to understand? L1 L1
Other comments:
• Date:
Solutions beyond technology 1810652-02 V2

,
SA Separation System
Safety
• Printed
Book No•
Ma, 2002
1810737~2 V 1
•
AlfaLaval
•
•
AIfa Laval reserves the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.


AIfa Laval company.
Published by: AIfa Laval Tumba AB
SE -147 80 Tumba
Sweden
•
SA SEPARATION SYSTEM SAFETY 1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1 Safety Instructions
• Important - read this!
The centrifugal separator includes parts

that rotate at very high speeds, generating
huge forces. It is therefore essential for the ":::.J
safe operation of this separator system that
you read and understand this manual,
including the warning signs and safety
precautions presented in this manual.
Failure to do so may cause a fatal accident.
1.1 Key Factors for Safe

Operation
••
.&. DANGER
The separation system is designed and supplied
for a specific function (type of liquid, rotational
"I I" .~
-
• speed, temperature, density, etc.). The system
must be used for this function only, and strictly
within Alfa Laval's specifications.
Incorrect operation or maintenance may result
in a heavy unbalance, reduction of material
-
-- -
strength, etc. that could lead to serious

breakdown with fatal injury or damage to
property.
For safe operation, strictly follow the
instructions for installation, operation and
maintenance in this manual.
• 1810737-02 1
1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SA SEPARATION SYSTEM SAFETY
The following is compulsory for safe

operation:
1
2
Never start up a separator before the bowl is
completely assembled. and all fastenings
securely tightened.
Never discharge a vibrating separator. Always
•
stop with the emergency stop button.
3 Never begin to disassemble a separator
before it has come to a complete standstill.
4 Always set the discharge intervals according
to instructions in the instruction book.
5 Never ignore alarms. Always eliminate the
cause before resuming operation.
6 Never use the separator for other liquids than
those specified by Alfa Laval.
7 Never operate a separator with a different
power supply frequency than stated on the
machine plate.
S Clean the operating system regularly to avoid
•
sludge discharge malfunction.
9 Ensure that personnel are fully trained and
competent in installation. operation.
maintenance. and emergency procedures.
10 Use only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts and
the special tools supplied.
2 1810737-02
•
1.2 Warning Sign

Definitions
• Below are definitions ofthe warning signs used.

Danger - serious injury or death
This type of safety sign or instruction
Example:
indicates an imminently hazardous

situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
Entrapment hazard
Make sure that rotating parts have come to a
complete standstill before starting any
dismantling work.
Warning - serious injury or death Example:
\MARN'N~l
This type of safety sign or instruction indicates
a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
--c::
Disintegration hazard
•
If unusually strong vibration occurs, press the
Emergency Stop button and leave the room.
Do not enter the room after an emergency stop
while the separator is still rotating.
Caution - minor or moderate injury Example:
This type of safety sign or instruction indicates

a situation which, if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
'CAUTION' used without the safety alert Bum hazard

symbol indicates a potentially hazardous Various machine surfaces can be hot and cause
situation which, if not avoided, could result in burns.
equipment damage.
• 1810737-02 3
1.3 Summary of Safety

Hazards
Below follows a selection of the warnings which
have been used in the text of this instruction
manual to ensure safe installation. start-up,
operation, stop. and maintenance. Further
•
warnings are to be found in the appropriate
places throughout the manual.
Start-up
Be especially observant during start-up. If there

is any abnormal vibration, immediately stop the
separator and investigate the cause. Clean the
bowl if it contains sediment.
Breakdown hazard
Assemble the separator completely before start. All
couplings, covers, and guards must be in place and
properly tightened. Failure to do so may lead to
breakdown.
•
Continued on next page
4 1810737-02
•
ffj..... 1Il\IIlG
•
lW~
. .
Electrical hazard
Follow local regulations for electrical installation
and earthing (grounding).
If the system is operated from a position from
which the separator is not visible, a vibration
sensor must be fitted.
Breakdown hazard
Check that the power frequency is in agreement
with the machine plate. If incorrect, resulting
overspeed may cause breakdown.
Breakdown hazard 50 Hz?

60 Hz?
Use the separation system for the purpose, and
within the limits, specified by Alfa Laval. Failure to
do so could cause a violent breakdown.
Breakdown hazard
Always observe the separator during start-up after
assembly. If strong vibration occurs, stop by using
•
the Emergency Stop button and evacuate the room.
If power cable polarity has been reversed, the

separator will rotate in reverse, and vital rotating
parts can loosen.
• 1810737-02 5
Operation
If the system is operated from a position from which
•
the separator is not visible, an unbalance sensor
must be fitted.
Breakdown hazard
If strong vibration occurs, press the emergency
stop button and evacuate the room.
Never discharge a vibrating separator. Vibration
may then become violent and result in breakdown.
•
Noise hazard
Use ear protection if noise levels are high.
Breakdown hazard
Never reset an alarm without first finding and
remedying the cause.
Burn hazard
Avoid contact with hot surfaces. Process pipes,
various machine surfaces, and processed liquid can
be hot and cause burns.
6
Slip hazard
Check all connections for leakage.
Oil leakage may make the floor slippery.
1810737-02
•
Stop
• Breakdown hazard
Stop the separator by means of the control unit, and
not by turning off the motor.
Never attempt to clean the bowl by manual discharge

in connection with stop.
Emergency stop
Emergency Stop button and leave the room
•
Do not start the separator after an emergency stop
without first remedying the cause of the emergency.
Make sure that the bowl is clean before restart.
• 1810737-02 7
Maintenance
Entrapment hazard
•
complete standstill before starting any dismantling
work. The rotation indicator lamp, where applicable,
must be off.
Disintegration hazards
Max.O,2mm
Always contact your Alfa Laval representative if you
suspect that the depth of the corrosion damage
exceeds 0.5 mm (0.2 mm for bowl body and bowl
hood) or if cracks have been found. Do not continue
to use the separator until it has been inspected and
given clearance for operation by Alfa Laval.
Pits and spots forming a line may indicate cracks
beneath the surface.
•
All forms of cracks are a potential danger and are
totally unacceptable.
Replace any part where corrosion can be
suspected of affecting its strength or function.
All forms of cracks are potentially dangerous as
they reduce the strength and functional ability of
components.
Always replace a part if cracks are present.
Erosion damage weakens parts by reducing the
thickness of the material.
Pay special attention to the pillars between the
sludge ports in the bowl wall.
Replace parts if erosion is suspected of affecting
strength or function.
.'
8 1810737-02
• o I
~
Entrapment hazard
To avoid accidental start, switch off and lock power
supply before starting any dismantling work.
Make sure that the separator has come to a
work.
Separator parts that are either missing, worn
beyond their safe limits, or incorrectly assembled,
may cause severe damage or fatal injury.
I~\X
Do not weld nor heat parts that are subject to high-
speed rotation .
Assemble the separator completely before restart.
All couplings, covers, and guards must be in place
and properly tightened. Failure to do so may lead to
breakdown.
'.
1810737-02 9
System Description
• Printed
Book No.
Apr2oo2
18107311-02 V 1
A fa Lava I
•
•
Aim Laval reserves the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.

Copies of this pUblication can be ordered from your local

Aim Laval company.
Published by: Aim Laval Tumba AB
SE - 14780 Tumba
Sweden
•
Contents
• 1 System Overview...... .... ....
1.1 Oil Flow..
1
1
1.2 System Layout 2
1.3 System Components 4
2 The Process . 5
2.1 Principle .. 5
2.2 Process Cycle Start.... .6
2.3 Discharge.................... . 8
2.4 Increased Water Content 9
•
1810738-02
SA SEPARATION SYSTEM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1 System Overview
• The SA Separation System is designed for
cleaning of fuel and lube oils for diesel engines,
and fuel oil for gas turbine engines, in marine
Cleaned oil leaves the separator through the oil
outlet while separated water and sludge
accumulate at the periphery of the rotating
and power applications. separator bowl.
Heated oil is fed through the separator to clean The control unit supervises the entire
the oil from solid particles and water. operation of the separation system, performing
monitoring, control, and alarm functions.
The basic separation unit comprises:
The process adapts automatically to certain
• A separator.
changes in conditions, such as increased water
• Ancillary equipment including control unit. content in the unprocessed oil, high or low oil
feed temperature, etc.
• Optional equipment such as, butterfly valve,
vibration sensor, etc.
1.1 Oil Flow Settling tank Change·over Backpressure

regulating
valve
valve
The unprocessed oil is fed through a heater by a
• feed pump, operating at a constant flow.

A change-over valve directs the oil to the
separator. The cleaned oil is pumped from the
separator to either the daily service tank (fuel
oil), or back to the engine (lube oil).
,. - -- -
During separator start and stop procedures,

during alarm conditions, or if the oil
temperature is outside the preset range, the oil
is directed by the change-over valve to a return
line back to the engine sump or settling tank. Pump Heater Separator Daily
service tank
•
1810738-02 1
1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW SA SEPARATION SYSTEM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.2 System Layout
•
Heater Temperature Pressure transmitter, Pneumatically controlled Separator
transmitter (Dl, oil (PT1) change-over valve (Vl)
Heats unprocessed Cleans the oil b~
oil to separation D2) removing water
Measures the pressure Directs the unprocessed oil to
temperature. Measures the oil in the oil inlet. and the separator, or back to the and solid
temperature and signals the control unit. settling tank (recirculation - particles.
signals the control fuel oil only).
unit.
Feed pump
Feeds
unprocessed oil to the
separator.
Unprocessed oil
inlet
Oil return
Conditioning water
Opening water
Water inlet
Closing water
Solenoid valve block, water Sludge outlet
Distributes separator opening!

- - - Additional equipment closing water, and conditioning
not part of the SA System water.
•
2 1810738-02
SA SEPARATION SYSTEM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
•
Control unit Pressure transmitter, oil Water transducer (MT50) Regulating valve (RV4)
(PT4) To manually regulate the
Supervises the separation Measures change in water
system. Measures the pressure in content in the cleaned oil. backpressure in the
the oil outlet. and signals the and signals the control clean oil outlet.
control unit. unit
Pneumatically controlled
shut-off valve (V4)
.k"" EPC-50 Closes the clean oil outlet.
••
• •• •
• • ,,
• • ,,,
•
~.
~
Clean oil outlet

to service tank
- , PT )----c>1<).-.......
Water drain
Pressure transmitter,
water (PT5)
Drain valve (V5)
Measures the pressure in
the water drain outlet, and Opens to drain separated water
signals the control unit. from the separator.
•
1810738-02 3
1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW SA SEPARATION SYSTEM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.3 System Components
~------------------,. Control unit

EPC50
./'
~~1
diHiJ Combined regulating
valve (RV4) and shut-off
Ift'iJl valve (V4)
0
~
Clean oil W
.. ,
outlet ~ Operating ;. ! ; .
Temperature water Operating air
transmitter
(H1,H2) Water transducer
(MT50)
Pressure Oil inlet
transmitter, oil
inlet (PTl)
Pressure transmitter,
oil outlet (PH)
Oil recirculalion
Change-over
valve (V1)
Oil in Pressure
transmitter,
water (PT5)
•
Drain valve
(V5)
~ I} Sludge
outlet
~- /
'--
4 1810738-02
.---J
-
SA SEPARATION SYSTEM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 2 THE PROCESS
2 The Process
• 2.1 Principle
During the separation process, sludge and
water accumulate at the periphery of the
separator bowl. Oil
Sludge and
water
Sludge and water are discharged at preset time

intervals. During discharge, the oil inlet is
closed. -!..'-~
• Excessive water can also be drained from the

separator bowl between discharges.
The cleaned oil leaving the separator is tested

for traces of water. Any increase in water is
detected by the water transducer. Disc stack
Water
transducer
Water
The signal from the water transducer is

continuously transmitted to the control unit, in ( EPC·50
1
,,
which a reference value is stored. The control
unit compares the transducer signal with the
.. 'P,
" ,
reference value. A significant deviation from

the reference value will cause draining of water. ~,......-.J
C}
I r'~
•
"
~
_ - : ..A ' .... _ ~
-,"<J-_...-".
'~r
E r Y .. --:-
l
<6
<6
1810738-02 5
2 THE PROCESS SA SEPARATION SYSTEM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.2 Process Cycle Start
First the oil pump, separator, and heater are

started.
The temperature transmitter (TT) and the .'
[
.."
EPC·SO
,
~,
I •
~!
"..',--->...
,, -::>
speed transmitter (ST) signal the EPC-50
control unit continuously. When the correct , I ,
separator speed and the correct temperature ~<~~ -',;--.. . "'"1 ;T J
are reached, a sludge discharge is carried out to
ensure the bowl is empty. The control unit then
-
.......-...'
.- .• "'--<;;. i ,-.'~." ~- -@
starts the process cycle.
1 The change-over valve directs the oil to the

recirculation line. Conditioning water is I EPC-SO
, )
added to the separator bowl until the ,, ~,
,,
.
pressure sensor in the oil outlet senses
~7'l PT <-
pressure and signals the control unit.

~.~'--<>
..- -.
'~
.."
--f.>-<'-" ' :
~-.
,
'
_•
-"'-.
'
l
2 The control unit registers the time taken for
water addition. This water flow reference
value is later used to calculate the correct
amount of conditioning water and
displacement water to be added.
•
3 The separator discharges.
[ EPC·SO
•
.•
--N-::r/... :l
"
I :-:-
~.>;.:...
.-.0[.....:-.0-->
gQ -t><>l
r-~-=-,
'}- _ _'
G•
G
•
6 1810738-02
•
4 Using the flow rate calculated in paragraph 2
[ EPC-SO )
above, the control unit signals the solenoid
valve to open so that the correct amount of
conditioning water is added to the separator
bowl.
5 The change-over valve opens so that oil is

directed to the separator bowl. When
pressure in the oil outlet is sensed, the
pressure sensor (PT) signals the control unit. }----c><l....
The control unit calculates and stores the

time taken to add oil to the bowl.
l
The cleaning process is now running.

Un processed oil is fed to the separator, and clean
• oil is pumped from the separator.
•
1810738-02 7
2 THE PROCESS SA SEPARATION SYSTEM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.3 Discharge
The separator discharges after a preset time has
elapsed. The following sequence takes place:
1 The change-over valve changes to oil

recirculation.
[
.
EPC·50
,, ,
•
--N---:=r~>l
r '-'--7,
~---o(><J.~
--e>.<J-'"._--J
p
~o(><Jl
2 Using the flow rate calculated in paragraph 2

under 2.2 Process Cycle Start. page 6, the
control unit signals the solenoid valve to
open so that displacement water is added to
push the oil towards the disc stack.
3 After the calculated time for displacement

water addition has elapsed, the separator
discharges. •
4 Conditioning water is then added, and a new
separation cycle begins.
•
8 1810738-02
2.4 Increased Water
• Content
If the water transducer senses increased water
content in the oil, the following takes place:
1 The water drain valve (V5) opens for a

number of seconds.
[ EPC-50 1
~l "'F:~
- - - ,-l."J('J"J
2 The water drain valve closes again, and the

:.~=~B/ 1
transducer signal is evaluated.
---~ V5 G:>
G:>
3 If there is still an increase in water content.

the drain valve opens again. If the water
content is still high after the drain valve has
opened five times, a discharge is initiated.
• 4 If the water content has decreased, the

separation cycle returns to normal.
•
1810738-02 9
•
3
•
• PrInted
Book No.
Apr2005
1810739-02 V 2
Solutions beyond tBchnology Alfa Laval

•
•
AKa laval reserves the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.


AIfa laval company.
Published by: Alfa laval Tumba AB

Marine & Diesel EqUipment
SE -147 80 Tumba
Sweden
•
C Copyright Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2005.
Contents
• 1 Operating
1.1
1.2
1~
Before Star1up......
Operators Panel
~ar1up...........
2
2
5
6
1.4 Manual Star1up........ . 7
1.5 During operation 11
1.6 Stop..................................... . 14
1.7 Emergency Stop 15
1.8 After Emergency Stop 16
1.9 Cleaning In Place 18
1.10 Automatic Operation 19
1.11 Remote Operation 21
1.12 Emergency Operation 22
1.12.1 Manual Operation of the Separation
System 22
•
1810739-02
1 OPERATING SA SEPARATION SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
1 Operating
1.1
1
Before Startup
Check that the separator is correctly
•
assembled and connected to power supply of
correct voltage and frequency. The EPC 50
Control Unit must be ON.
Breakdown hazard
Assemble the separator completely before start. All
breakdown.
Electrical hazard
Follow local regulations for electrical installation and
earthing (grounding). •
Breakdown hazard
Check that the power frequency is in agreement with
the machine plate. If incorrect, resulting overspeed 50 Hz?
may cause breakdown. 60 Hz?
Use the separation system for the purpose, and

within the limits, specified by Alfa Laval. Failure to do
so could cause a violent breakdown.
•
2 1810739-02
SA SEPARATION SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1 OPERATING
2 Check the oil sump level. If necessary, top up
• until oil starts to run from the oil-filling hole.
[NO'fE)
Too much or too little oil can damage the separator
bearings.
Rotation Direction
To check the rotation of the bowl, do a quick

start/stop. The motor fan must rotate in a clockwise
•
direction.
If power cable polarity has been reversed, the

parts can loosen.
[NO'fE]
To make this check, the Mode Selector Switch should
be in the CIP position.
•
1810739-02 3
Air Valve Block
Use the pressure gauge situated in the air valve

block to check that the air supply is correct
(500 - 700 kPa or 5 - 7 Bar).
For further information concerning air, see chapter
1 Technical Data in the Installation System
•
Reference booklet.
Operating Water Pressure
Check that the operating water pressure is

sufficient (200 - 600 kPa or 2 - 6 Bar).
For further information concerning water, see
chapter 1 Technical Data in the Installation System
Reference booklet.
4
•
1810739-02
1.2 Operators Panel
• General principle for changing control

parameters
The 'Enter' button is used to:
- enter into a parameter list
- enter into a parameter
- accepVstore a new parameter value.
The '+' or the '-' buttons are used to change the
value flashing in the display window.
Process parameters
Set the process parameters to suit the
installation as follows:
1 Push 'Enter'. Parameter no. 1 in the process
parameter list is shown.
You have now come to the process parameter
list. Go through the list and set parameters. --
[iiHiiJ
o
•
2 When the parameters have been set, 'End I/O'
(flashing) shows. Push '+'. 'Standst.' now
shows in the display.
For information on how to set discharge
intervals, see chapter 3 Process Parameters in
the Parameter list booklet.
Make sure that the operators panel is 'active' (LED

green) before operating.
•
1810739-02 5
1.3 Startup
The control panel mode switch has three
positions: 'MANUAL', 'AUTO', and 'CIP'.
The 'MANUAL' mode is for use on all Separation

Systems. 11 MAN
•
!/llJi\
Ila~o I )
tu(
The 'AUTO' mode is for use on systems supplied
for fully automatic control and/or fully automatic
remote control. The following general rules apply
for use of the 'AUTO' mode:
• The EPC 50 must have control of the oil feed
pump.
• The EPC 50 must have control of the heater.
•
•
The EPC 50 must have control of vibration
monitoring.
The cover interlock must be fitted. •
The 'CIP' mode is for use with Cleaning in Place
equipment. See "Cleaning In Place" on page 18.
•
6 1810739-02
1.4 Manual Startup
• The first startup must always be carried out

manually.
Before startup make sure that all the main
supply valves for air, oil, and water are open.
Open heating media supply valve if applicable.
Switch on the power supplies. Make sure the
mode selection switch is in the 'MANUAL'
position.
1 Start the oil feed pump from the pump starter.
:[] 0
o
2 If necessary. vent air from the heater through

the relief valve (if applicable).
• Switch on the heater from the operator panel

(if applicable).
(MO'tEJ ~
The operators panel must be' active' to allow
operation.
iHi_
3 Press the 'SEPARATION' button to activate the

EPC-50.
~
[iiH.
• 1810739-02 7
Before the separator can be started, a number of
•
questions scroll across the display which have to
be answered:
'Has the bowl been dismantled? + =YES, - = NO'

4 If the bowl has been dismantled press the' +'
+
button.
If no work has been carried out on the bowl, press

•-
the '-' button. The start sequence begins and the
•
text 'Start' appears in the display.
[NO'fE]
If this is the first start, answer 'YES'.
'Assembled according to manual? + =YES, - =

NO' +
5 If the bowl has been dismantled and
assembled according to the instructions in the
Service Manual, press the '+' button.
'Bowl cleaned? + = YES, - = NO'

•
6 If the bowl has been cleaned press the '+'
+
button.
An automatic calibration of the system is
carried out. See display. •
7 Push the separator start button.
IdlIdlI o
I I
illiJJ 11
I
L
0
Q~J
•
8 1810739-02
8 Listen and observe.
• Vibration may occur during start up, when

passing critical speeds.This is normal and
should pass without danger.
If vibration increases, or continues at full
speed, press the emergency stop button and
stand clear until the vibration stops. The
separator, feed pump, and heater are stopped
when the emergency stop button is pushed.
The emergency stop will only reset when the
speed sensor indicates zero speed.
Once the zero speed signal has been
received, the alarm reset button can be
pushed. The message' Switch power on/off.'
will be displayed. This refers to the EPC 50
power indside the control cabinet.
The cause of vibration must be determined
and corrected before starting again!
See the Alarms and Fault Finding booklet.
Always observe the separator during start-up after
assembly. If strong vibration occurs, stop by using
the Emergency Stop button and evacuate the room.
[ tlO1'£]
If the system is equipped with a vibration sensor, and
has control of heater and feed pump, the Auto Start
can be used.
• 1810739-02 9
9 The separator speed, and 'Start.' are shown

alternately in the display until the separator is
at full speed.
•
10 Check the oil feed temperature by pressing
the' +' button until 'TT1' is shown on the
display.
11 Wait until the oil feed temperature is correct:

Heavy fuel mode 98 QC
Lube oil mode 95 QC (trunk engines), or 90 QC
(cross-head engines)
Diesel oil mode 40 QC
12 When the separator has reached the correct

speed, and the oil is at the correct
temperature, press the process start/stop
button on the operator panel to start the
•
separation process.
[iiJii
13 Adjust the backpressure to the normal running
value. Normal running backpressure is
determined at commissioning. See the
Installation System Reference booklet.
•
10 1810739-02
1.5 During operation
• Operator panel information
Observe the operator panel information:

• Heater operation LED lit (green)
• Separator system operation LED lit (green)
• Activated valve LED lit (green)
During normal operation, the ALCAP trigger

signal is shown on the left ofthe display, and the
time to next sludge discharge is shown on the
right.
Any alarm is indicated on the display. For
further information see the Alarms and Fault
Finding booklet.
[tlO'T£J
•
Regularly check connections. Tighten if necessary.
• 1810739-02 11
The values displayed in the examples below are not

recommendations.
More operational information may be read as

•
required, by pressing the '+' button repeatedly.
To return to normal display, i.e. the trigger

value, and time to next sludge discharge,
continue pressing the '+' button.
- Oil feed temperature. For the correct

separation temperature see the Installation
System Reference booklet.
TT1 98°C
1'--.--__O_il_p_re_s_s_u_re_,_o_il_in_le_t 1 ~
1_-_ _O_il_p_r_e_s_s_ur_e_,_o_il_O_u_tl_e_t 1 i
IL_-__p_r_e_s_su_r_e_,_w_a_te_r_o_u_t_'e_t 11
I~-__ w_a_te_r_tr_a_n_s_d_u_c_e_r_va_l_u_8 1i
1_-_sp_eed 11
- Accumulated operating time in hours

Run time 5 hours
12 1810739-02
• Noise hazard
Use ear protection if noise levels are high.
Breakdown hazard
Bum hazard
Avoid contact with hot surfaces. Process pipes,
various machine surfaces, and processed liquid can
be hot and cause burns.
• Slip hazard
Check all connections for leakage.
Oil leakage may make the floor slippery.
•
1810739-02 13
1.6 Stop
To stop the system:
1 Stop the system by pushing the

'SEPARATION' button on the operators panel.
•
The yellow LED for separator stop sequence
starts to flash.
A sludge discharge is initiated.
The stop sequence LED changes to steady
yellow, and the green LED for separation
system operation goes out, when the sludge
discharge is completed.
'Stop' is displayed.
If the heater is controlled by the EPe 50, it is
switched off automatically.
When the oil feed temperature has started to
drop, the oil feed pump is switched off
automatically.
•
When the separator comes to a complete
standstill, 'Stands!.' is displayed.
Breakdown hazard
Stop the separator by means of the control unit, and
not by turning off the motor.
Never allemptto clean the bowl by manual discharge

in connection with stop.
14 1810739-02
•
Ifthe system is switched off for reasons other
•
than high vibration, it is not necessary to wait
for the separator to slow down before restarting
the process.
Breakdown hazard
The system must not be restarted with the separator
rotating if high vibration alarm has been given.
1.7 Emergency Stop
If an emergency situation occurs, press the

emergency stop button and evacuate the room.
Do not return until the separator has come to a
complete standstill.
I dijdij
IIi'GI
f Illl]
0 ~I'
.1
a i .1
i
I 0
L
8J I
'
f
I
IJ
• Disintegration hazard
Emergency Stop bullon and leave the room
[IIO'fE )
In order to be able to restart, the system must be at
standstill, and then the EPe power switched off - on.
•
1810739-02 15
1.8 After Emergency Stop
Separator standstill
Dismantling work must not be started before all

rotating parts have come to a complete
•
standstill.
Entrapment hazard
work. The rotation indicator lamp, where applicable,
must be off.
Avoid accidental start
Entrapment hazard
To avoid accidental start, switch off and lock power
supply before starting any dismantling work.
•
Make sure that separator has come to a complete
standstill before starting any dismantling work
Remedy the cause
The cause of the emergency must be remedied

before attempting to restart the separator.
If the cause is not found, an overhaul must be
performed on the separator, and all moving parts
thoroughly checked
fMAf4N'NG]
I::.'1I:
Do not start the separator after an emergency stop
without first remedying the cause of the emergency.
Make sure that the bowl is clean before restart.
•
16 1810739-02
•
Separator reassembled
The separator must be fully reassembled with all

covers and guards in place and tightened before
unlocking the power supply and starting the
system.
Breakdown hazard
Assemble the separator completely before restart. All
breakdown.
•
1810739-02 17
1.9 Cleaning In Place

The use of Cleaning In Place (CIP) equipment is
recommended for best separation results. For
further information on the CIP equipment, see
the GIP booklet, bookno. 1817261.
•
Before connecting the CIP equipment to the
Separator, the switch on the control cabinet must
be turned to the CIP position. This is to avoid
accidental pumping of oil when the pipeline is
opened up.
For instructions on how to connect the CIP
equipment to the Separator, see the Service
Manual booklet.
For recommended CIP intervals see chapter 1
Technical Data in the Installation System
Reference booklet.
18
•
1810739-02
1.10 Automatic Operation
• For automatic operation, the system must be

equipped for automatic start. Make sure the
mode selection switch is in the 'AUTO' position
and Pr3 has the correct setting.
[NOTE]
If local control is needed (for example in an
emergency situation), turn the switch to manual
mode. This will automatically override the Pr3
setting.
[NOTE]
The first startup must always be carried out
manually.
The system can thereafter be run automatically as
long as no changes are made to it between runs.
1 Press the 'SEPARATION' button
• -••• ~--
Before the separator can be started, a number of

questions scroll across the display which have to
be answered:
•
1810739-02 19
'Has the bowl been dismantled? + = YES, - = NO'

2 If the bowl has been dismantled press the '+'
button.
•-
+
•
If no work has been carried out on the bowl, press
the '-' button. The start sequence begins and the
•
text 'Start' appears in the display.
'Assembled according to manual? + = YES, - =

NO' +
3 If the bowl has been dismantled and
assembled according to the instructions in the
Service Manual, press the '+' button.
'Bowl cleaned? + = YES, - = NO'

•
+
4 If the bowl has been cleaned press the '+'
button.
An automatic calibration of the system is
carried out. See display. • •
To stop the process, press the 'SEPARATION'
button (see 1.6 Stop, page 14.)
If the system is to be restarted, the system

valves can remain in operating positions.
[iliii]
•
20 1810739·02
1.11 Remote Operation
• Remote Operation
[NO'fE]
After maintenance, the system must be started
locally.
If in Remote, and '+' is pushed in answer to the
question 'Has the bowl been dismantled?" the
system reverts to local control.
Follow the instructions in chapter 1.10

Automatic Operation, page 19.
• 1810739-02 21
1.12 Emergency Operation

In the event of a water transducer failure, the
system can still be operated by setting
parameter Pr 4 in the EPC to standby mode (see
the Parameter List booklet). The transducer is
then disabled and the time to discharge
•
automatically changes to 15 minutes. 'Nc' (not
connected) is shown on the display. All Alcap
functions are disabled. Water is removed only
during a discharge. A reminder alarm is
activated after 24 hours.
If the system oil contains plenty of water, and
the oil density is less than 991 kg/m3 , emergency
operation as described below is possible.
1.1 2.1 Manual Operation of the

Separation System
In the event of extemely high water content, the
system can be run manually by a competent
engineer using the following instructions:
1 Ensure all oil system manual valves are in the

correct position.
2 Set the selection switch on the control unit to
the MANUAL position.
3 Fit a jumper between terminals X9: 1, and X9:2
in the EPG.
4 Start the feed pump.
S Start the separator.
6 Heat the oil to the correct separating
temperature.
Where there is a Heatpac® EHM electric
heater, use jumpers in the power unit to bridge
terminals X12.11 - X12.6, X12.11 - X12.9, and
X12.11 - X12.7. Switch on the heater and use
the switch to regulate the temperature.
[NOTE]
Remove the jumpers after emergency operation.
22 1810739-02
7 When the separator is up to speed and the
• correct oil flow and temperature are achieved,

close the bowl. Open SV15 for time specified
in timer Ti6D (See Parameter List booklet).
Wait for 15 seconds. Open SV16 for time
specified in timer Ti62. The bowl is now
closed.
8 Temperature, flow, and backpressure must

remain constant throughout.
9 Remove the water outlet pipe at D.
•
1810739-02 23
1 0 Screw in screw A to move the paring tube to
~U" •
its innermost position.
11 Open SV10 as follows:
Time Amount bowl

(secs.' filled (litre)
SA 811/816/821/826 40 0.7
SA 820/8251830/831/835/836 40 1,1
SA 84018411845/846 70 1.9
. - -
SA 850/85118551856 30 3.0
SA 860/861/865/866 50 4.5
SA 870/871/875/876 40 7.0
SA 6601881/8851886 45 11.0
12 Open SV1 to open oil feed V1.

13 Open SV5. This will open the water outlet
valve V5.
14 Carefully screw out screw A until water starts
to come from D.
15 Lock screw A in position.
•
Breakdown hazard
During operation open SV16 for about 5 seconds
every 10 to 15 minutes to ensure that the bowl
remains closed.
•
24 1810739-02
• Discharge
1
2
3
Close oil feed V1 using SV1.
Close water outlet V5 using SV5.

Open SV10 to add displacement water as
follows:
Time Amount bowl

(secs.) filled (litre)
SA 811/816/821/826 60 0.9
..- - - - --- --
SA 820/825/8301831/835/836 49 1.3
-- - --- -
SA 840/84118451846 79 2.1
-- -
SA 850/8511855/856 44 4.0
SA 860/861/865/866 59 5.4
-- ~. -_.
SA 870/871/875/876 47 8.4
. .. -
SA 880/8811885/886 84 15.0
4 Open SV15 until a discharge is heard (about 3

seconds).
5 Wait 15 seconds.
• 6 Open SV16 for time specified in timer Ti62.
•
1810739-02 25
7 Open SV10 as follows:
SA 811/816/821/826
SA 820/825/830/831/835/836
Time
(secs.,
40
40
Amount bowl
filled (litre)
0.7
1,1
•
SA 840/841/8451846 70 1.9
SA 850/851/8551856 30 3.0
·0 -- _.-
SA 860/861/8651866 50 4.5
.
SA 870/871/8751876 40 7.0
.
SA 880/881/8851886 45 11.0
8 Open Vi.
9 Open V5.
10 Maintain backpressure at normal setting
throughout.
Breakdown hazard
Discharging of the bowl, and supervision of the operation,
is now completely manual and under the direct
responsibility of the engineer who has placed the
separation system in the manual control mode.
•
•
26 1810739-02
S·type Separation System
Parameter List
• Printed Jun 2004
Book No. 1810572-02 V 10
•
•
•
A1fa Laval reserves the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.


A1fa Laval company.
Published by: A1fa Laval Tumba AB

SE - 14780 Tumba
Sweden
•
© Copyright AIfa Laval Tumba AB 2004.
,
Contents
• 1
2
Parameter Setting
Installation Parameters
2
3 Process Parameters 8
4 Factory Set Parameters 11
5 Sequence Diagram 24
5.1 Separation Sequence 26
• 1810572-02
1 PARAMETER SETIING S-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST
1 Parameter Setting
The parameters are set in the operator panel
for the different separator systems, and for
different conditions within the systems.
•
There are three parameter types: Installation,
Process, and Factory Set parameters.
The parameters are initially set at installation.
The process parameters can also be set as
required during operation.
Parameters not in use are not displayed.
The parameter list in this booklet is valid for
Separation Units (SU) and SA systems.
General principle
The 'ENTER' button is used to:
- enter into a parameter list
- enter into a parameter
- accept/store a new parameter value.
The '+' or the '-' buttons are used to change the
value flashing in the display window.
•
2 1810572-02
•
S-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 1 PARAMETER SETIING
To change parameters, proceed as follows: 4 Push the' +' or '-' button to change the
1 Push the 'ENTER' button. parameter value.
• 2
'Time to discharge P1 60' is shown. 'P1 is
the parameter, and '60' is the set value.
The '1' of the 'P1' is flashing.
Push the '+' button until the number of the
S
6
Push the 'ENTER' button. The new value is
stored.
The parameter number is now flashing.
Push the '+' or '-' button to go to the next
parameter you wish to program appears in parameter to be changed.
the display window. 7 To leave the list, push the '+' and the '-'
The chosen parameter number is now buttons at the same time. The display shows
flashing. 'Standst.' or, when in operation, the trigger
value to the left, and time remaining to
3 Push the 'ENTER' button. discharge on the right.
The chosen parameter number is now
shown on the left side in the display. The
parameter value is shown flashing on the
right side of the display.
LED for heater

(green)
Heater on/off
•
push-button
LED for control

program running
(green)
Control program
on/off push-button
Schematic
diagram with LED for stop
position LEDs sequence running
(yellow)
Sludge
discharge push-
button
Display window - push- + push- Enter Aiarm reset LED for common LED showing
button button push- main alarm (red) this panel
button active
• 1810572-02 3
1 PARAMETER SETIlNG 5-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST
The following lists are available for viewing

from a menu in the Epc·50 control unit:
•
•
•
Install (parameters)
Factory (parameters)
Alarms
•
• Test
For detailed information see each list.
To open the menu and select a list, proceed as
follows:
1 Push the 'ENTER' button. The process
parameter list is now open.
2 Push the' +' button until 'End' is displayed.
3 Push the 'ENTER' button and the' +' button at
the same time. 'Install' will show flashing on
the display.
4 Use the' +' button to select a list.
5 Use the 'Enter' button to enter into the
selected list.
6
7
To leave the list, push the '+' and the '-'
buttons at the same time.
To leave the menu, press the '+' button
repeatedly until 'Exit' is displayed. Push the
'ENTER' button.
•
4 1810572-02
•
S-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 2 INSTALLATION PARAMETERS
2 Installation Parameters
• The installation parameters must be set before

the initial start-up and before process
parameters are set. These parameters rarely
need to be adjusted again. If a new parameter
value is to be stored, it is necessary to go through
the whole list, and confirm at the end.
[NO'fEJ
Alfa Laval cannot be held responsible for injuries
and damage caused by usage of parameter values
which are not in proximity to the factory values set
by Alfa Lava!.
Parameter Factory set Plant set Range Description

value value
In1 en en = English Language. All information displayed
de = German on the operators panel is shown in
the selected language.
•
es= Spanish
fr = French
It = Italian
pt = Portuguese
fi = Finnish
se = Swedish
In 3 Alcap Alcap Separator type
- --~ -- ----,-- _. --- -- -- ---- - ---- ..
In4 836 811,816 Separator size
200,820,821,825,826 Parameters depending on separator
300,830,831,835,836 size are set automatically according
to the value in In 4
400,840,841,845,846
500,850,851,855,856
600,860,861,865,866
700,870,871,875,876
800.880,881,885,886
---. ---,"- - . ---'--
In 5 1 1-9 Separator identity
If more than one EPC on If more than one separator system is
same Saltbus connected to the internal Sattbus
communication, each system must
be given its own identity (1 or 2 or 3
•
etc.).
1810572-02 5
2 INSTALLATION PARAMETERS 5-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST
•
value value
In 6 Yes No Speed sensor
Yes
In 7 No No Vibration sensor
Yes
In 8 No No OP remote
Yes
- _.
In 9 Yes No Water transducer
Yes
. -- -
In 15 No No Sludge pump used
Yes
- -
In 16 No No 1/0 expansion board used
Yes
- . --
In 17 'c 'c Celsius or Fahrenheit
'F
- .
In 18 No No (no heater) Heater type
EL (electrical heater)
Steam (steam heater)
.
In 19 16 7,8,14,16,22,24,36,40, El heater size
50,56,65,72,84,96,98,
•
Activated when EL is selected in
100,110,112,126,128, In 18
130,144 kw
.
In 20 120 o- 999 seconds Steam-valve run time
Activated when Steam is selected in
In 18
6 1810572-02
•
S-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 2 INSTALLATION PARAMETERS

value value
• In 22
In 23
15
15
o- 30 seconds
o- 240 seconds
Alarm delay time
Change-over valve V1 temp_ alarm
delay
Prevents false alarm due to any
fluctuations in temperature caused
by valve actions_
- -- - - -
In 24 No No Change-over valve V1 action at extra
Yes alarm
When the extra alarm inpu1 is used,
action at alarm can be none (No) or
feed off (Yes)_
- - --
In 25 Yes No Power fail alarm used
Yes If this alarm is not required, set the
parameter to 'No"_
In 26 No No
,,- -
Type of computer communication
" ~- - -.-----
ExtPC = Fieldbus board used
I-Net = Internet
-- -- -- - --
In 27 0 0-255 Internet IP address, part 1
In 28
-
0
- -
0-255
~
- - - - --
Internet IP address, part 2
-
- " .• -~-- -- -- - - - --- -- --- ~_- ._-.. _-
- -- ---- .- . - ~._- ~- . _~ - .-
•
-- - -"'~-
-- - .------- -- - ._. -
In 31 No No Feed pump controlled
Yes Feed pump has to be connected by
EPC when running in auto mode_
---- ril3til-- - ~---'---
--
In 32 m 3ih Flow rate in-m 3/h perhour or ---
USG/h US gallons per hour_
The feed flow measurement, based
on inlet pressure, can be displayed in
one of these ways_
• 1810572-02 7
3 PROCESS PARAMETERS SoTYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST
3 Process Parameters
The process parameters can be adjusted easily
and as often as required, even during operation,
to meet changes in the operating conditions, e.g.
time between sludge discharges, oil temperature,
•
alarm points.
[MOTE]
Regularly check the condition of the bowl. If there is
no noticeable amount of hard sludge in the sludge
space, the discharge interval may be increased by 30
minutes at a time. The total discharge interval must'
not exceed three times the factory set value in order
to avoid an uneven bUild-up of sludge.
Parameter I Factory set

value
I value
Plant set I Range I Description
Pr 1 120 1 - 999 minutes Time to discharge
Pr 2 HF380 MOO = Marine Diesel Oil Oil type
GO = Gas Oil
IFxxx = Intermediate Fuel Oil (xxx represents viscosity in Cst at
HFxxx = Heavy Fuel Oil 50 'c)
LO TP = Lubricating Oil for
Trunk Piston Engines
LO CH = Lubricating Oil for
Cross Head Engines
-
Pr 3 OPloc OPloc = Local OP in control Control location
OPrem = Remote OP OPine is standard. OPrem, ExtPC
Rmind = Remind using and RemSW are shown only when
Saltbus installed.
ExtPC = Extern Computer

Board
RemSw = Remote swilches
Pr4 On On Alcap OnlStandby
Stb. MT-50 function disabled when in
standby (Stb.). Discharge every 15
minutes (overrides Pr1). No
displacement water added.
I --
Pr 5 0.0 0.0 = Not used Countdown service timer
0.1 to 10.0x1000 hours Action is to be taken when the timer
reaches O.
8 1810572-02
•
S-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 3 PROCESS PARAMETERS

value value
•
Pr6 0 o =service time elapsed Type of service
1- 9 =Service text 1...9 When service timer Pr5 reaches 0,
an alarm is given and a message
shown
Pr 7 0 Information
- Keys to special functions used by
1 =timers shown service engineer
2 =Service mode When Pr7 is set to 1 during normal

operation, the actual timer is
displayed if the '+' button is pressed
I
once.
~
_I
Pr 10 3.0 0.0-6.0 bar High oil pressure limit
=
0.0 oil pressure sensor (cleaned oil outlet)
disabled
-
Pr 11 1.0 0.0-6.0 bar low oil pressure limit
Pr12
-- -
5.5
- .
0.0 - 6.0 bar

---
High water pressure limit
0.0 = water pressure sensor
(water outlet)
disabled
- . --
Pr13 0.2 0.0-6.0 bar Low water pressure limit
- - - --- --- ~---
- _ . ~ _ .. _- .~-~_.-
-_1
Pr 14 3.0 0.0-6.0 bar High feed pressure limit
=
0.0 feed pressure sensor
disabled
- -
0.0 _ .6.0 bar
- - 1
Pr 15 0.2 low feed pressure limit I
•
I
Low'pressure indicates insufficient 1
flow. The low pressure limit must bel
higher than any static pressure and I
lower than normal pressure. I .1
Pr16 105'C 0-115'C or HFO/lO high temp. limit
0-255 'F
-
o_=..Temp
_ _-
sensor disabled
. -- -
...
- -_.~---_ .. --,~-
Pr 17 85 'c 0-115'Cor HFO/lO low temp. limit

0-255'F
• 1810572-02 9
3 PROCESS PARAMETERS 5-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST

value value
Pr18 95 ·C 0-110·Cor HFO/LO setpoint')
0-240 of Setpoint for feed temperature is valid
o = Temp sensor disabled only when a temperature controller is
installed in the EPC.
Pr19 40 ·C 0-115·Cor DO high temp. limit
0-255 ·F
Pr 20 20 ·C 0-115·C or DO low temp. limit
0-255 ·F
Pr21 30 ·C 0-110·C or DO setpoint')
0-240 ·F Setpoint for feed temperature is valid
only when a temperature controller is
installed in the EPC.
Pr22 40 10-500% P-constant')
Preset value based on experience
with Alia Laval Heatpac heaters.
Pr23 1.2 0.1 - 10.0 minutes l-constant' )
Preset value based on experience
with Alia Laval Heatpac heaters.
_.- ~-
Pr 24 0 0-9 Heater control location

o = disabled or heater To be set when more than one EPC
controlled from EPC x temperature controller can be used
for one heater.
Pr25 2 0- 240 seconds Sludge tank alarm delay (during
Ti 68)
Pr40 60 o- 100 discharges Test of sludge in bowl
Pr41 15 0-100 % Max. decrease of displacement
water
1) Parameter appears only when heater board installed.
10 1810572-02
•
S-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 4 FACTORY SET PARAMETERS
4 Factory Set Parameters
• Parameter
Fa 3
Factory set
value
See table on
page 22
Plant set
value
Range
0.1 - 99.99 litre

Description
Conditioning water volume to be fed

after discharge
I- . .- _.'-'
Fa 6 0.2 0.0- 9.9 bar PT4 pressure increase or decrease.

(Test during Ti 59, Ti 64, Ti 70, Ti 71,
Ti 82) Signal that the bowl is filled.
Fa 10 See table on
- ----.
0-14000 rpm High speed
- - .~._---
page 22 o =sensor disabled

Is set depending on
separator size
._. - .-. - _..
Fa 11 See table on 0-14000 rpm Low speed
page 22 Is set depending on
separator size
. .. . _.,,- - . _....- . - - .. •... . . -
Fa 12
--
Fa 16
..
300
. . . .
0-2000 rpm
.
0.0-2.5 mm
-~_._- ~
.. ._ .
Speed decrease during discharge
.- - "-- _ .. ,-- - . _._
See table on Shutdown limit tor separator spindle
page 22 =sensor disabled amplitude
,~--
Fa 17
-- . See table on
0.0
~~--
0.0-2.5mm
----
. .
Vibration alarm prewarning
page 22
. .
•
- .. ...
Fa 18 0.5 0.0-2.5 mm Vibration sensor adjustment zero
point. Zero point should be within 1.5
mm±Fa 18
------ --- -. --
Fa 20 3.0 if Pr 2 = fuel 0.01 - 10.0 pF Alcap trigger factor
oil This is the amplification factor for the
0.6 if Pr 2 = lube transducer signal so that the proper
oil trigger range is achieved.
- - - -
Fa 21
--_.'----,
Fa 22
..
100
100
0-250 %
0-250 %
-
Trigger limit HFO
--- . ~ ~ ..
Trigger limit LO/DO
,. __ .•.. ,_._-- - ~. __ .-
... .- - .-_. - ... - -- ---~._._- - - - _.,'- . -..
Fa 23 120 if Pr 2 = fuel 0-999.9 pF Alarm limit for high water transducer
oil o = water transducer value.
90 ifPr2 = lube disabled
oil
• 1810572-02 11
4 FACTORY SET PARAMETERS S-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST

value value
Fa 24
Fa 25
Fa 26
70
25
5
0-999.9 pF
o- 250 seconds
o- 30 seconds
Alarm limit for low water transducer
value
Pulse time for open drain valve
Drain pause time. With the valve
closed, the system waits for the
•
resu~ of the draining.
..
Fa 27 70 0-100% The limit below which the trigger
value must be to interrupt draining.
--
Fa 28 5 0-20 Limtl for number of HFO drainings. If
the trigger value has not fallen below
the value of Fa 27 after Fa 28, an
alarm is given.
- - - -_.
Fa 29 5 0-100 Test of water transducer trigger
0= disabled signal every x discharge.
(x = 0-100)
-- - - .* - -----
Fa 30 250 0-900 % Trigger level during Ti 64 - Ti 65
-
Fa 31 2 0-4 Reduclion of Ti 72 due to trigger
o = No reduction signals during Ti 64, n 65.
1 = Reduction after every

trigg
2 = Reduction after 2
•
consecutive triggs
3 = Reduction after 2 triggs
within 3 discharges
4 = Reduction after 2 triggs
within 4 discharges
12 1810572-02
•

value value
• Fa 32
Fa 33
1.0
2
0.0-1.0
0-10
-
Reduction of Ti 72 in DO mode.
Timer Ti 72 is reduced by Fa 32
Limit for number of LO drainings. If a
higher no. of drainings than Fa 33
takes place within one separation
period (n 68), an alarm will be given.
..
. --- -- .... - - -- ---- --- --

Fa 34 +0.00 -2.00 - +2.00 -' HFO temperature adjustment, MT 50
0=-2.00 Temperature compensation for the
200 = 0.00 water transducer, HFO mode. I)
400 = +2.00
Fa 35 +0.00 -2.00 - +2.00 LO temperature adjustment, MT 50
200 = 0.00 water transducer, LO mode. I)
400 = +2.00
Fa 36 +0.00 -2.00 - +2.00 DO temperature adjustment, MT 50
water transducer, DO mode. I)
200 = 0.00
400 = +2.00
Fa 37 20 0- 100 Flush water every x disch.
- - -. .- ~~ .... ~ .. _- _.•.•._. '--~---- - -'-_.
•
Fa 41 5 1 - 30 minutes . Closing water pulse time
. .~ Time between closing water pulses
I) The transducer value can be influenced by temperature variations. This canbe compensated for by using this
parameter. Proceed as follows:
Note the transducer value. N.B. The transducer value must be steady (no water in oil) in order to do this test.
At normal stable running temperature, decrease the temperature by IQ CC.
At stable new temperature, read the temperature and transducer value.
Example:
Temperature decrease = 10 QC
Transducer value change ~ + I (from 82.6 to 83.6)
Since the transducer value increased, this must be compensated by making Fa34 negative.
Fa 34 = (1.0 x 10) /10 °C ~ .. 1.0
• 1810572-02 13
4 FACTORY SET PARAMETERS 8-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST
•
value value
Fa 42 No No V4 activated in Ti 64
Yes To get a faster pressure response
when oil feed fills the bowl (see
Ti 64) valve V4 could be closed =
Yes.
Fa 44 See table on o- 15 seconds Delay for close of V4 at leak test.
page 22 Automatically adjusted during test.
(Ti 66)
.. . .
Fa 45 See table on o- 15 seconds Delay of PT4 pressure reference
page 22 value registration during the
automatic adjustment of pressure
range for leakage test (see Ti 66).
. -
Fa 46 1.0 0-4bar Acceptable PT4 decrease during

leakage test
Alarm for leaking bowl if the pressure
decreases more than Fa 46 during
leakage test
. . . - . . ..
Fa 47 3.0 0-4bar PT4 high limit during leakage test
I. ._ -- -- -_. . - - ._" ---- - _._- - -
Fa 48 1.0 0-4bar PT4 low limit during leakage test
.
Fa 49 5 0-10 Max. no. of leakage tests to establish
the test pressure within high-Iow
•
limits.
[NOTE]
For parameters Fa 90 - Fa 95, see page 21.
14 1810572-02
•
Timer Sequence Parameters (separation

start, sludge discharge, stop)
• Parameters for timers are listed under Factory,

but are called 'Ti'.
When expected feedback from a timer is given,
the timer is interrupted and the next timer
starts.
Iffeedback is not received within the preset
time, an alarm is given.
Timers for start are 50 - 59.
Timers for operation are 60 - 69.
Timers for discharge are 70 - 79.
Timers for stop are 80 - 89.
Timers 50, 51, 52 and 87 are intended for the
'fully automatic' system (Auto mode) with pump
and heater controlled by EPC 50.
If pump and heater are started independent of
EPC and AIfa Laval starter, X6:4 - X40 must be
connected to a free closing contact at the
•
external pump contactor. Increasing
temperature is the only process condition needed
for timers 51 and 52. The program skips directly
to timer 55 when not 'fully automatic'.
• 1810572-02 15
•
value value
Ti 50 60 2 - 300 seconds Feed pump on
-- - -
Ti 51 15 o- 30 seconds Feed pressure feedback
Ti 52 4 o- 60 minutes Separator start-up (Speed feedback)
Speed above low limit (Fa 11)
expected_ Condition of betl, coupling,
motor bearings, height adjustment,
and speed sensor supervised_
- - -
Ti 53 15 o- 60 minutes Heater on (temp_ feedback)
Temperature above low limit (Pr 17,
Pr 20) expected to confirm that the
heater works normally_
- -- --- - -
Ti 55 0 0- 30 minutes Max_ time for 'Standby' mode_ During
o =no standby 'Standby' mode, the system is
waiting for an order to start the
process sequence_ The process
sequence is started with a push of
the start bullon.
=
When Ti 55 0 the process starts
-- ~-~.__ .-
without delay.
-- - - --
Ti 56 3.0 0.1 - 5.0 seconds Discharge if Ti 59 has expired after
alarm.
- -
•
Ti 57 15 o- 30 seconds =
Pause Draining of operating
system
Ti 58 See table on o- 60 seconds Close bowl
page 22
16 1810572-02
•

value value
• Ti59 170 o- 300 seconds Water flow rate calibration

At start three questions are
displayed:
• Bowl dismantled?
• -Assembled according to manual?
• Bowl cleaned?
When the answer to the third
question is Yes, calibration of the
water flow rate through SV 10 takes
place. SV 10 is open until pressure in
-. the water outlet increases (Fa 6).
The water volume is defined for each
separator size. Based on this and the
- time taken to fill the bowl, the EPC
calculates the water flowrate.
When the answer is No, this means
that stored calibration data will be
__ used and consequently the program
__.L performs Ti 63. . ~ __
[--
Ti60 See table on 0.1 - 30.0 seconds Discharge
page 22 - when starting, the operating
system needs some extra water to
•
support the operating slide before
closing the bowl. (This is not a
proper discharge, since the bowl is
emply.),
- afler a power failure to prevent a
period between discharges greater
than Pr 1.
-~--- _._----_._-_._--- -- - ~ .._------
'"'--~ _. ---------
TI61 15 o- 30 seconds Pause = Draining of operating
system
1- -- ------- _._' ..• -- -----_ _-
.. ----,--_._-_.-~."---- _
...•-.-- -. -. - ----~-----
TI62 See table on o- 60 seconds Close bowl

page 22
• 1810572-02 17
•
value value
Ti63 120 Seconds, calculated Conditioning water added
Based on the calibration of the water
flow rate, the EPC calculates the
time to which Ti 63 is set, so that the
correct volume of conditioning water
is added to the bowl. Data
concerning the bowl is activated
when size of separator is choosen
(In 4). The preset value is just for
start. After the calculation, the
correct value for Ti 63 is set
automatically.
- - -- -- - - - --
Ti64 60
_.
o- 60 seconds Oil feed on. Max 60 secs.
. - -- . - -. -- . -"---~-
Ti65 15 o- 30 seconds Water transducer pulse control time

Test of the signal from the water
transducer. If this shows water in the
oil, the displacement time prior to
next discharge will be reduced.
- .
Ti66 See table on o- 30 seconds Bowl leakage check
page 22 (See also Fa 44 - 49)
.
Ti67 60 o- 300 seconds Time for stabilisation of the
transducer signal. When the time
has elapsed the EPC stores the
actual transducer value as a
reference for changes in water
content. •
18 1810572-02
•

value value
• Ti 68 120 (= Prl) o- 300 minutes Time between discharges. This is the

same as Pr 1. If one is changed, the
other one is automatically changed.
During Ti 68 the water transducer
supervises changes of the water
content in the clean oil. If the trigger
value is greater than 100, the drain
valve (V5)opens. For details see Fa
25--28.
- -.-- . _. . - _. -- ._._-- .- - . -- - --. _.-
Ti70 15 o- 30 seconds Oil feed off. Oil outlet pressure below

low limit (Pr 11) expected.
- - --_. - - - --- ----- - - - -
~_._.
" --_._- --------- ..- -
Ti 71 15 o- 120 seconds Displacement of oil. During n 71, V4
is closed until increasing pressure is
sensed, indicating displacement
Ti72 150
~
--
Seconds, calculated (max.
- --
water has entered the- bowl.
-
Displacement water (SV 10)
_.----,- .•
-
300 seconds) continues for the calculated time.
- -- - -- -- - .. --
Ti73 10 o- 30 seconds Opening of the drain valve to wash
out any oil from the paring tube and
piping.
- - - -~-_._.- _-
.. ---~
. - - . .. _. - ---_._-----_
.. _- -,
Ti74 3.0 0.1 - 5.0 seconds Discharge
• 1810572-02 19
•
value value
Ti75 15 o- 30 seconds Pause = Draining of operating
system
Discharge feedback (as shown by
decreased speed, Fa 11).
If the speed sensor is out of order!
disabled, feedback is automatically
taken over by timer Ti 64. (If time
close to 0 there was no discharge).
Draining of operating system takes
place during Ti 75.
After Ti 75, the program returns to
Ti 62. provided stop is not ordered.
If however any value or timer
influencing the water calibration has
been changed, the program returns
to Ti 56.
When stop is ordered the discharge
precedes the stop sequence.
- _. .. - . - ._-_.
Ti 81 See table on o- 60 seconds Close bowl
page 22
Ti82 150 o- 300 seconds Heater 011.
•
Addition of water until 80% of bowl
volume, or increased pressure is
sensed in the oil outlet (Fa 6). This is
to keep the bowl filled during stop
sequence.
.. . .
Ti83 10 o- 30 seconds Opening of the drain valve to wash
out any oil from the paring tube and
the pipe.
Ti85 5 o- 30 minutes Temperature decrease
The EPC switches the separator
motor 011.
Decreasing oil feed temperature
greater than 5 ·C expected.
If Ti 85 = O. no temperature control.
20 1810572-02
•

value value
• I
Ti 86
Ti87
3
60
o- 30 minutes
0- 300 seconds
Decreasing speed expected (Fa11).
Pump off
In Auto mode, the EPC switches the
feed pump off. By doing so after
switching off the separator, further oil
is fed to the heater (which is already
switched off) to help cooling.
- - -- .
Ti89 30 30 - 60 minutes - The EPC is waiting for zero speed.
As long as the separator is rotating
at a speed greater than 6 revs/min.
(1 puis/ rev.), the speed is displayed
alternating with 'Stop.' Speed less
than 6 revs/min. is displayed as O.
When speed 0 has been displayed
for 1 minute (alternating with 'Stop'),
-- 'Standst.' will be displayed.
--~.-
- -- - - -- . --
Fa 90 -- 0-9999 days Set runtime_ See chapter 4 Change
of Circuit Board in the Alarms and
Fault Finding booklet.
- . -- ---- - - - - - -- _.~- .- -----_.- . •. __ . _. -. .,. ~- ~. __ .
Fa 91 50 0-99°C Break point, cold start.
0-210 OF The temperature up to which gain
factor Fa92 is active. Above this
•
temperature normal gain (Pr 22) is
active.
- - - . --- --. - - -- . - -- ------
---,---~_.-
Fa 92 40 1 -100 % Gain factor, cold start

This factor is used to increase the
normal P-band (Pr 22) when
temperature is below that defined in
Fa 91.
Ex. Normal P-band 30, Fa 92 40= =
gives an actual P-band below Fa 91
of 0.40 x 30 12. =
• 1810572-02 21
•
value value
Fa 93 SBSU SBSU (Sattbus on RS232) Communication type
ASCII (ASCII protocol)
PRINT (Printer output)
-
Fa 94 9.6 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, or Serial communication Baudrate
38.4 channel A
(4.8 = 4800)
-- - -
Fa 95 No No Communication parity channel A
Odd
Even
-- . -_. • • +- ... ----_ - ..
Fa 96 3.0 ~ Pr 2 = fuel 0.1-10.0 pF Alcap trigger range during discharge

oil
0.6 if Pr 2 = lube
oil
Parameters depending on separator size

Separator size Fa3 Fa10 Fa11 Fa16 Fa17 Fa44 Fa45
S 811, S 816, S 200, S 821,8826 0.16 13.300 11.000 0.3 0.2 2 5
•
S 820, S 825, S 300, S 830, S 831, 0.3 11.000 9.900 0.3 0.2 2 5
S 835, 8 836
. - - - _. -- - - -~_.
---- -. _. -" .---"
8400,8840, S 841, S 845,8846 0.4 9.600 8.600 0.5 0.3 4 10
- - _
-- ._ ..- ._--
..
- - -- _.
8500,8850, S 851, S 855,8856 0.7 8.300 7.400 0.5 0.3 6 10
-
8600,8860,8861,8865,8866 0.9 7.800 6.400 0.5 0.3 8 10
.
8 700, 8 870, S 871, 8 875, 8 876 1.5 6.700 5.500 0.5 0.3 10 10
- - - - --_ .. --
8800,8880, S 881, 8 885,8886 2.5 5.800 4.700 0.5 0.3 10 10
Separator size Ti58 Ti60 Ti62 Ti66 Ti81

8811,8816, S 200, 8 821, 8826 15 5 15 10 15
8820,8825, S 300, S 830, 8 831, 8 835, 15 5 15 10 15
S 836
-
8400,8840,8841,8845,8846 15 5 15 20 15
-~'.-._'- •.. ,,_.,,~- '.-- - - - -~ --_. - -
8 500, 8 850, 8 851, 8 855, 8 856 15 5 15 20 15
8 600, 8 860, 8 861, 8 865, 8 866 25 15 25 25 25
- - - -
8 700, 8 870, 8 871, 8 875, 8 876 35 25 35 30 35
_..•.
- .- . - -.
8 800, 8 880, 8 881, 8 885, 8 886 60 25 60 30 60
22 1810572-02
•
5 SEQUENCE DIAGRAM S-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST
5 Sequence Diagram
Activity
Autostart
Ti50 Ti51
60s 15s
- --
4m
Start
Ti52 TI53 Ti55 Ti56 Ti57 Ti58 Ti59 Ti60 Ti61
15m 30m 3s 15s 15s 170s 5s 15s
Separation
Ti62 Ti63 Ti64 Ti65 Ti66 Ti67 Ti68
15s Calc 60s 15s 10s 60s 60m
- -
•
Feed pump I"
malaTon
-
- --
Flow stabilized
1) - . 1-- _. - .
Separator
malar on
1»
. .
- - . .
Healer on
-
temp. increase
Heater max. lr - "
start time
Discharge.
SV15
Drain of
-
operating water
-- I--
-
. . . -.
Closing water.
SV16
Calibration of
water flow rate
_. - - I) - - 2)
•••
SV10
Conditioning
waterSV 10 I--
Feed on 111
1) -
Oil outlet
closed. V4
..
I-- I--
. . . --
Leak test
- . . - - I--
Ref. time·
-- I--
Separation
Drain of water;
';)-
V5
I- . .-
I--
_.
Feed off I
.
Displacement
water
SV 10 i
. ._. - . . . . ,--~
-- ---- -- - I- _J
Water
SV10
Optional
sludge pump
- 11) 10)
• i
,
1) Interrupted by feedback signal 5) Interrupted by decreasing speed 9) 1 sec. pulse at 4000 rpm
2) Pulse 1 sec. every 5 min. 6) Interrupted by pump off feedback 10) 5 sec. every 30 minutes
3) Activated when needed 7) Interrupted by o-speed dUring 1 min_ 11) 15sec.only
4) Interrupted by decreasing temperature 8) Interrupted by calculated time
or trigger signal
["o'(£J
24
Note! This diagram is valid for normal operation only_ See the flow chart on page 30 for a more detailed
sequence description.
1810572-02
•
S·TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 5 SEQUENCE DIAGRAM
• Discharge
Ti70 Ti71 Ti72 Ti73 Ti74 Ti75 Ti62 Ti63 Ti64 Ti65 Ti66 Ti67 Ti81 Ti82 Ti83 Ti85 Ti86 Ti87 Ti89
155 155 Cale 105 35 155 155 Cale 60s 155 105 60s 155- 1505 105 5m 3m 60s 30m
,
Slop
Activity
4) 5) 6) 7) Feed pump
motor on
Flow stabilized
1- - . - " .- -
Separaior
motor on
I' Heater on i
temp. increase,
1'- ,. .. - ,. ,- ,., ..
Heater-max. - ,
start time
I: . -- -- .
Discharge;
8V15
--. ------
Drain of
operating
.-
- -
-
.... -
--- ---
9)
..
water
Closiiig water,-
8V16
Callbration"f
water flow rate
8Vl0
•
CO"dijioning;
water 8V 10 _....I'
...... .. _ _ __ • . _. _<~._.
Feed on Vl
- .. , , - - - 1)
,,'''_' • ~_
!--
,. . . 0, . . _
1)
- ~~;::,~e~4--1
Leak tesr----
Rel.lime- ,. - i
.- -~- '
_.J
8eparation
1)
- - 1) 8)
.. ..
- - -
- Drain -ofwafer;!
V5
_____.
Feed off
Displacement
_I!
i
water I
- .- ..... - " - ____ ~ J'
8Vl0
-I ,." . --" 1--
Water
!-- 8Vl0
11) If 'Stop' after t162 skip to Optional
1-+~Ti81 sludge pump
,
Flow rates for Flow rates for Flow rates for Flow rates for Flow rates for
8811, S816, 8200, 8820, 8825, S300 S500, S85O, 8851, S7OO,8870, 8871, 8800, S880, 8881,
8821,8826 8830, 8831, 8835, S855, 8856, 8600, S875,8876 8885,8886
8836, 8400, 8640, S860, S861 , 8865,
•
8641, S 845, S846 S866
SV10: 0.9 I/m 8Vl0: 1.6 I/m SV10: 5.5 I/m 8Vl0: 11 I/m SV10: 151/m
8V15: 11.0 Vm 8V15: 11 Vm SV15: 11 Vm 8V15: l11/m 8V15: lll1m
SV16: 2.8 Vm 8V16: 2.8 Vm 8V16: 2.8 Vm 8V16: 2.8 Vm 8V16: 2.8 Vm
1810572-02 25
5 SEQUENCE DIAGRAM S·TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST
5.1 Separation Sequence
-
en
Q)
::1
Timer
Ti 56
SV 15
=3 sec.
Action
Discharge
To ensure that the operating system gets sufficient
water before closing.
6. Alarms
•
Ti 57 =15 sec. Draining of operating water
=
Ti 58 See table Bowl closing
chapter 4.
SV 16
Ti 59 =calculated Calibration of water flow 'NO PT4 PRESSURE

FEEDBACK DURING Ti 59'
V 4, SV 10 Bowl filled with water until pressure is indicaled in the
oil outiet (parameter Fa6 ~ 0.2 bar). Flow rate is Ti 59 has a max. value of 170
calculated based on the known bowl volume and time sec. Alarm is given if no
taken to fill with water. pressure response within this
time.
=
Ti 60 See table
chapter 4.
SV 15
Discharge
Normal start begins here. There are two reasons for
this:
•
1. To ensure that the operating system gets sufficient
water before closing.
2. To empty the bowl before start after power failure.
Ti 61 =15 sec. Pause

During this timer, water is drained from the operating
system.
=
Ti 62 See table Bowl closing
chapter 4.
SV 16
Ti 63 =calculated Filling of conditioning water

SV 10 The time (volume) is based on the calibrated flow rate Max, 120 sec.
•
and bowi volume.
.......
26 1810572-02
S-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 5 SEQUENCE DIAGRAM
Timer Action 6 Alarms
• Ti 64 = 60 sec.
V 1, (V 4 automatic
selection)
n 65 = 15 sec.
Feed on to separator
Test of water content in oil outlet

'Oil backpressure PT4 - LOW'
Alarm is given if no pressure
response in oil outlet within
Ti 64.
V1 If traces of water are detected in the oil outlet, the time

for displacement (Ti 72) will be reduced before next
discharge.
After calibration start, the oil outlet pipe is filled with oil
and the system now skips to Ti 70 to perform a
discharge. Ti 72 max 90 sec interrupted by
transducer response.
n 66 = See table Bowl leaking test 'OIL LEAKING FROM BOWL'

chapter 4.
With the feed off and the oil outlet closed, a Alarm is given if the pressure
V4 decreasing pressure indicates that the bowl is falls by more than 1.0 bar.
leaking.
In order to find a suitable pressure range (1 - 2 bar)
for test, Ti 65 and Ti 66 may be repeated (see Fa 49).
Ti 67 = 60 sec. Reference time

V1 After the process has stabilized, the transducer
(MT 50) reference value is stored.
Ti 68 = 120 min. Separation. 'Water drain • INSUFFICIENT'

V1 (V5) When necessary, the drain valve (V5) in the water During separation all necessary
outlet opens for a short while. The trigger value is then functions are supervised.
checked during a few seconds. Draining stops when Alarm given if more than 5
the trigger value is lower than 70. Draining can openings and trigger value not
continue max. 5 openings. After 5 openings, skip to less than 70.
Ti 74.
'. 1810572·02 27
5 SE~UENCE DIAGRAM S-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST
Timer Action ~ Alarms
Ti 70 = 15 sec. Feed off.

Oil outlel pressure decreases.
'OIL PRESSURE PT4 HIGH
DURING Ti70'.
Alarm given il no pressure
feedback.
•
Ti 71 = 15 sec. Displacement water. 'NO PT4 PRESSURE
FEEDBACK DURING Ti71'.
V4, SV10 Oil outlet pressure increase more than 0.5 bar
indicates that water is fed. The timer is then Alarm given if no pressure
interrupted. feedback.
Max. 15 sec.
Ti 72 = 0 -150 sec. Displacement water.

SV10 Max. to calibrated value.
Ti73=10sec Water pumped out through the water outlet to wash

out any remaining oil.
V5
Sludge pump in operation.
Ti 74= 3 sec. Discharge.

SV15
Ti 75 = 15 sec. Discharge feedback and draining of operating 'Discharge feedback -

system ERROR'.
After'bowl cleaned' at start, the program continues Alarm is given if bowl speed
.'
with Ti 58 - 68. Once Ti 68 has elapsed, the program after discharge is not below
skips from Ti 75 to Ti 62 after every discharge, or to Fa 11 minus Fa 12.
Ti 81 if stop is ordered.
Ti 62 to 67
repeated.
or Ti 81
.'
28 1810572-02
Timer Action 6 Alarms
• =
Ti 81 See table
chapter 4.
SV16
Ti 82 = 150 sec.
Bowl closing
Water to the bowl.

V4, SVlO Timer interrupted when 80% of bowl volume is fiHed, Max. 300 sec.
Heater off or when pressure in oil outlet is increased by more
than 0.2 bar.
Ti 83 = 10 sec Water pumped out through the water outlet to wash

out any remaining oil from the paring tube and pipes.
V5
Ti 85 = 5 min. Waiting for oil feed temp. decrease. 'Temperature. NOT

DECREASING'
Separator motor off Timer is interrupted when temp. decrease below low
limit. If temp. not decreased within Ti
85.
Ti 86= 3 min. Waiting for speed decrease. 'Bowl speed - HIGH xxxxx'
Time for cooling of heater If speed not decreased within
timer.
•
Ti 87 = 60 sec. Timer is interrupted by pump off feedback.
Feed pump off
Ti 89 = 30 - 60 min. Waiting for zero speed

When speed = 0, timer is interrupted and 'Standst' is Max. 60 min.
indicated.
• 1810572-02 29
5 SEQUENCE DIAGRAM S-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST
Process Start Start With Calibration
Bowl No
Ti50-54 Feed,
speed,and
temp check
TI 56
Discharge
•
dismantled? Ti55 Standby.
Push
'Separation' to
continue
Ti 60 Discharge
Assembled No
according to Standst.
manual?
Yes Ti62 Bowl

closing
No Go to Start
Bowl Ti64 Feed on
cleaned? Without
Calibration
Yes
Go to Start With
Calibration
Ti65 Stabilizing
Ti70 Feed off Ti65 Mt 50

.'
signal test
Ti71 Displ.
Repeated at start
water check
Ti72
Displacement
Yes
,
Ti68Timeto No
discharge Stop?
Ti 73 Water
outlet flushing.
No
Ti68 No
elapsed? Man.
discharge?
Ti75 Pause and Yes
•
discharge Yes
feedback
Discharge
30 1810572-02
1810572-02 31
$~e$~aMoon$pgm ~
Alarms and Fault Finding ~'VAot:
• Printed
Book No.
Mar 2005
1810573-02 V 10
•
•
AIfa Lava! reserves the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.


AIfa Laval company.
SE ·147 80 Tumba
Sweden
•
o Copyright Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2004.
S-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING
1 Alarms 2
•
1.1 Alarm Functions 2
1.2 Reading Alarm History List.. 2
1.2.1 Alarm message explanation: 3
1.3 Alarm Reset 3
1.4 Abnormalities not displayed 4
2 Display Alarms and Actions 5
3 Alarm Tests 19
• 1810573-02 1
1 ALARMS S-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING
1 Alarms
1.1 Alarm Functions
The alarm system is designed to ensure a safe
separation system.
•
All alarms are shown on the operator panel
display, and most of them are complemented by
light emitting diodes (LEDs).
The alarms are displayed in order of occurrence.
1.2 Reading Alarm History

List
To read the stored list of alarms, do as follows:
• Push 'Enter'.
• Push '+' until 'End' is shown on the display.
• Push 'Enter' and' +' at the same time.
•
•
•
Push' +' repeatedly until 'AL list' shows on the
display.
Push 'Enter'.
Go through the list using the' +' push button
•
until 'End' shows on the display.
• Push 'Enter'.
• Push' +' repeatedly until 'Exit' shows on the
display.
• Push 'Enter' to return to normal display.
("O~EJ
The texts'Alcap Pr4 = Onl Stand by', and 'Discharge
Repeated' are reminders to the operator, and not
alarms.
2
•
1810573-02
S-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING 1 ALARMS
1.2.1 Alarm message explanation:
•
The display shows:
Alarm no. 5 Alarm number

0:13 This alarm occured 13 minutes ago.
Feed pressure low Type of alarm
P1 60 Parameter Pr I was set to 60 minutes.
00:02:13 The alarm was reset after 2 minutes 13 seconds.
1.3 Alarm Reset
Breakdown hazard
1 Acknowledge the alarm signal by pressing the
•
alarm pushbutton.
The flashing LED then changes to steady
2
shine.
Remedy the cause.
~ ALARM
3 Reset the alarm function by pressing the

alarm pushbutton a second time. o
~
The LED will go out.
ALARM
It is possible to reset the system without

remedying the cause. but the alarm signal will
be repeated.
[NOTE)
The STOP sequence is automatically initiated if an
alarm is not remedied within 30 minutes.
• 1810573-02 3
1 ALARMS S-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING
Risk of injury
Never return to the operator panel to acknowledge or
reset an alarm if doing so is by any means
hazardous.
•
1.4 Abnormalities not
displayed
There are some abnormalities not shown on the
display. Below are listed the most common:
Why? What to do
Smell • Normal occurrence during start None.

while the friction blocks are
slipping.
Noise
• Oil level in oil sump too low.
• Height posijion of paring disc is

incorrect.
• Bearing(s) damaged or worn.

Check oil level and add oil if
necessary.
Stop the separator, measure and

adjust the height.
Renew all bearings.

•
• Improper bowl assembly Check and reassemble.
Unsatisfactory separation result • Incorrect separation Adjust.

temperature.
• Throughput too high. AdjuSt.
• Disc stack is clogged. Clean disc stack.
• Sludge space in bowl is filled. Clean and reduce the time

between sludge discharges.
• Bowl speed too low. Examine the motor and power

transmission for correct frequency
parts.
Check belt and coupling pads.
• Bowl rotates in wrong direction Check the electrical connections

to the motor.
4 1810573-02
•
S-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING 2 DISPLAY ALARMS AND ACTIONS
2 Display Alarms and Actions
• on page on page
Alcap in standby· MORE THAN 24 HOURS

o 17 10 expansion board· ERROR
o 18
xxxxx board· ERROR 18 IP address· FAULT 13
Bowl speed· HIGH XXXXX II Level switch· DISABLED 18
Bowl speed. LOW xxxxx 12 Local OP in control 17
Bowl speed sensor· ERROR 13 Lockswitch • FAILURE 7
Communication· ERROR xxxxx 18 NO PTS DRAIN FEEDBACK DURING Tixx 17
Computer communication board· ERROR 18 NO PT4 PRESSURE FEEDBACK DURING Tixx 15
• Discharge feedback· ERROR
Emergency stop' BUTTON PUSHED
Feed flow PTl • ERROR DURING Tixx

17
11
NO SIGNAL FROM EXTRA INPUT X6:B
Oil backpressure PT4 - HIGH
Oil backpressure PT4 • LOW

16
13
14
Feed pressure PTl • HIGH 15 Oil feed temperature· HIGHxxxxx 9
Feed pressure PTl • LOW 15 Oil feed temperature - LOWxxxxx IQ
Feed pressure sensor PTl • ERROR 15 OIL LEAKING FROM BOWL 13
Heater· FAULT 16 OIL PRESSURE PT4 HIGH DURING Ti70 15
Heater board - ERROR 18 Oil pressure sensor PT4· ERROR 14
Heater connection· ERROR 18 Parameter xx:xx • ILLEGAL 18
High vibration· SHUTDOWN 7 Parameter changes. LOCKED 13
High vibration - WARNING 8 POWER FAILURE 17
• ,
HIGH WATER CONTENT
HIGH WATER CONTENT IN OIL

16
17
Pressure in water outlet PTS • HIGH
Pressure in water outlet PTS - LOW

15
15
1810573-02 5
2 DISPLAY ALARMS AND ACTIONS S-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING
on page
Pump starter - FAILURE

0 15
•
Separator motor - FAILURE 13
Separator run-up lime - TOO LONG 16

,
Service alarm 18
SLUDGE IN BOWL 13
Sludge tank level- HIGH 13
Switch power off/on 17
Temperature increase - TOO SLOW 18
Temperature - NOT DECREASING 18
Temperature alarm sensor - ERROR
Temperature control sensor - ERROR
Transducer - NO RESPONSE
10
11
17
•
MT 50 board - ERROR 16
Transducer value - HIGH 16
Transducer value - LOW 16
Vibration board - ERROR 18
Vibration sensor - ERROR 8
Water drain pressure - HIGH 17
Water pressure sensor PT5 - ERROR 15
6 1810573-02
•
• Lockswitch· FAILURE
Why?
• Separator not mounted as

described in the Service Manual
What to do
Mount the separator according to

the instructions in the Service
j
booklet. Manual booklet. I
I
[NO'fEJ I
j
The cause of this alarm must 1
be remedied within 30 I
minutes. If not, the STOP i
sequence will begin. I,
High vibration· SHUTDOWN • Sludge remaining in part of the Dismantle, ctean and check the
bowl bowl before restart. See Service
Manual.
If excessive vibration occurs, stop Disintegration hazard
separator and keep bowl filled with
•
The separator bowl must be
liquid during rundown.
manually cleaned before
The cause of the vibration must be
identified and corrected before the starting up again.
separator is restarted.
• Bowl wrongly mounted Check assembly. See Service

• Disc stack compression incorrect Manual.
• Bowl assembled with parts from
other separators
• Height posijion of paring disc is Stop the separator, measure and if I'
incorrect. necessary adjust the height.
• Bowl spindle bent. Renew the bowl spindle. I

• Bearing(s) damaged or worn, Renew all bearings. I
• The frame feet are worn out. Renew the frame feet. I
• Spindle top bearing spring Renew all springs.
broken,
• 1810573·02 7
High vibration· WARNING
Vibration sensor - ERROR
8 1810573-02
•
•
Why? What to do
_ .;:.:r
••. .-r
Emergency stop· BUnON PUSHED • Emergency button pushed Remedy cause for pushing button.
Reset pushbutlon.
Oil feed temperature· HIGHxxxxx • Steam supply valve faulty Investigate cause and remedy.
• Faulty triac module(s) in the Ifrelay K11 is on:

power unit or faulty controller in
Disconnect X12:10.
the control unit (electric heater).
If the temperature is falling,
replace the control module in the
control unit.
If the temperature is not falling,
replace the triac module(s).
If relay K11 is off, but contactor
K12, K16, or K17 is on, and the
temperature is not falling:
Check if power is supplied from
the control unit to the contactor ,i
•
which Is on (X12:6 - X12:12, X12:7 i
- X12:12, X12:9 - X12:12). If it is, '
replace the control module in the
control unit.
• Broken wiring or defective heater

resistance, or faulty controller in
Check adjustment of P and I
functions In the control unit.
I
I
the control unit.
If contactor sequence correct: II
Check wiring and heater I
resistance of each block or heater ,
I
element. See EHM heater !
component booklet. !
If contactor sequence not correct: I
I
Replace the control module in the '[
control unit. ,
• 1810573-02 9
•
Why? What to do
Oil feed temperature· LOWxxxxx • Heater clogged Investigate cause and remedy.
• Steam supply insufficient
• Steam trap faulty
• Steam supply valve faulty
• Faulty fuses or burned Check and renew broken fuses.

contactors Reset overcurrent protection
(electric heater) (applicable foran -24/22 kW
power unit).
Check wiring and contactor coils.
• Broken wiring or defective heater Check wiring and heater

resistance resistance of each block or heater
(electric heater) element. See the Service Manual
booklet.
Temperature alarm sensor· ERROR • Short circuit I broken sensor or Disconnect cable at sensor.
cable. Measure resistance between 1-3.
Resistance shall be within 100-142 '
=
ohms 0-110 C /32-230 F.
Test of EPC 50 input:
• Disconnect cables from sensor,
(terminal X 5:1-2-3).
• Move jumpers Xj1 and Xj2
upwards - from Normal to Test.
(The jumpers can be found In
•
the upper left corner of the 110
Board)
• Indication within 50-60 C when
OK.
• If no spare sensor available set
=
parameter Pr 16 0, or if control !
sensor free, move connection
to that one.
10 1810573-02
•
•
Why? What to do
Temperature control sensor· ERROR • Short circuit I broken sensor or Disconnect cable at sensor.
cable. Measure resistance between 1·3.
Resistance shall be within 100-142 .
=
ohms 0-110 C /32-230F. If no
spare sensor available set
parameter Pr 18 = O. Heater is then :
out of function. 1
Feed flow PTl • ERROR DURING Tixx • Pump not working Check pump.
• Pressure in feed line too low Check feed line.
Bowl speed - HIGH xxxxx • High power (net) frequency Check power supply before
restart.
• Incorrect transmission parts

(50 Hz belt pulley and belt for
60 Hz power supply).
Stop and change the belt
•
transmission to suit the
power supply frequency.
• 1810573-02 11
•
Why? Whal 10 do
Bowl speed - LOW xxxxx • Slipping belt , Change bell.
• Worn coupling pads Check I change pads.
• Bowl not properly closed , Check closing waler supply (valve

, SV 16).
Check bowl operating syslem for
, leakage.
I Check nozzle.
• Bowl not properly assembled Check Ihallhe lock ring is in

place.
• Low power net frequency Check power.
• Motor failure. Repair Ihe molar.
• Bearing(s) damaged, , Renew all bearings.
• Incorrect transmission parts (60

Hz bell pulley and bell for 50 Hz
•
power supply).
Slop and change Ihe belt
lransmlssion 10 suillhe
power supply frequency.
12 1810573-02
•
•
Why? What to do
Bowl speed sensor· ERROR • Sensor or cable damaged Replace sensor. If no spare sensor·
available set parameter In 6 = No
to be able to run the system. Note ;
that It is not possible to run in
AUTO mode.
Separator motor· FAILURE • Feedback signal from contactor Check the contactor function.
K 2 missing Input terminal
X 6:5 in EPC 50.
OIL LEAKING FROM BOWL • Bowl periphery sealing Change seal ring In bowl hood.
damaged
Check/change rubber rings and
valve plugs.
• Leakage somewhere in oil outlet· Check for leakage.
• Closing water leaking Check/change sealings and plugs.
SLUDGE IN BOWL • Too much sludge in bowl This alarm cannot be

acknowledged. The separator will
come to a stop. Wait until EPC
•
comes to 'Standstill'. Investigate
cause and remedy.
Sludge tank level· HIGH • Pump has not drained the tank Check the pump function.
Parameter changes - LOCKED • A code has been set to make Unlock the code.
parameter changes not possible
IP address· FAULT • Wrong IP address used in Check the selling.

In 27-30
, Oil backpressure PT4 • HIGH • Increased throughput Check. Reduce backpressure.
• Regulating valve too restricted Adjust valve
• 1810573-02 13
Oil backpressure PT4· LOW
Oil pressure sensor PT4· ERROR
14 1810573-02
•
•
Why? What to do
OIL PRESSURE PT4 HIGH DURING Ti70 • No decrease in oil pressure Check function of change-over
during this limer. valve V1.
NO PT4 PRESSURE FEEDBACK DURING • No increase in oil pressure Check supply of displacement
during this timer. water. Valve SV 10.
Pressure in water outlet PTS - HIGH • Paring tube nol moving correctly Check that movement is not
impeded by friction.
Pressure in water outlet PTS - LOW • Paring tube not moving correctly Check that movement is not
Water pressure sensor PTS - ERROR • Sensor or cable damaged Check cable connections i
,
Replace sensor. If no spare sensor i
available set parameter Pr 12=0.0 '
to be able to run the system.
Feed pressure sensor PT1 - ERROR • Sensor or cable damaged Check cable connections
Replace sensor. If no spare sensor

available set parameter Pr 14=0.0
to be able to run the system.
• Feed pressure PT1 - HIGH
Feed pressure PT1 - LOW

• Pipe restricted
• Low flow
Check recirculation for restriction
Check pump and flow regulation.
Check heater for fouling.
Pump starler - FAILURE • Feedback signal from contactor Check the contactor function.
K 3 missing
Check input terminal X 9:1 In the ,
EPC.
• 1810573-02 15
•
Why? What to do
NO SIGNAL FROM EXTRA INPUT X6:8 • Depends on use of the input Depends on use of the input
Separator run-up time· TOO LONG • Separator coupling slipping Check the coupling.
• Be~ slipping Check the belt.
• Height position of paring disc is Stop. Check and adjust the height.
incorrect.
• Motor lailure Repair the motor.
• Bearing(s) damaged or worn. Renew all bearings.
• Separator start button not Push start bullon.

pushed.
Heater· FAULT • OV in cable heater X 12:3to EPe • Check the power supply to the
50 X 51:4 heater.
(electric heater)
• High temp. switch released : Check temp. setpoint in the

(electric heater) control unit.
Check the heater and clean if •
necessary.
Reset temp. switch in power unit.
Restart heater.
MT 50 board· ERROR • Faulty board Change MT50 Board (see Change

of Circuit Board in the service
Manual booklet).
Transducer value· HIGH • Extremely high water content Check the dirty oil quality.
• Fouling in the monitor MT 50 . Dismantle and clean with

detergent.
Transducer value· LOW • Too much air in oil outlet Check oil back pressure
HIGH WATER CONTENT For HFO and DO
• Too much water in oil Investigate cause and remedy.
• Much water in the feed Check the dirty oil quality.
• Paring tube not moving properly Check that movement is not

16 1810573·02
•
S·TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING 2 DISPLAY ALARMS AND ACTIONS
•
Why? What to do
HIGH WATER CONTENT IN OIL For LO
• Too much water in oil Investigate cause and remedy.
• Much water in the feed Check the dirty oil quality.
• Paring tube not moving properly Check that movement is not

Alcap in stand by - MORE THAN 24 HOUR • Reminder Check the reason for stand by and i
try to get back to normal operation:
as soon as possible. j
i
Water drain pressure· HIGH • Water pressure has not Check V5 function.
decreased sufficiently though
valve V5 open.
NO PT5 DRAIN FEEDBACK DURING Tixx • Restriction in water outlet Clean the outlet pipe.
causing no reduction in pressure
Transducer· NO RESPONSE • Expected increase of trigger Check water supply. Valve SV 10. ,I
signal during Ti 64 and Ti 65
•
failed !I
Discharge feedback· ERROR Speed not decreased as discharge

feedback (below Fa12) caused by:
• Strainer in the operating water Clean the strainer.

supply is clogged.
• Water flow too low. Check opening water. Valve SV 15. i;

• Hoses between the supply Correct.
valves and separator are
incorrectly fitted.
• Rectangular ring in the operating Renew the rectangular ring.

slide is defective.
Local OP in control • Attempt to operate remote OP Not legal when local OP Is active.
POWER FAILURE • Black-out has occurred with EPC Check plant conditions and
in operation restart.
Switch power off/on • Alarms comes at standstill after

emergency or vibration shut
Investigate the cause for the stop I
and switch the power off and then 'I
down on to the EPC 50.
I
• 1810573-02 17
•
Why? What to do
Parameter xx:xx - ILLEGAL • If parameters are changed Switch EPC50 power off. Move X
automatically by "thunderstorm" J4 on VO board to position right.
type influence, alarm is given to Switch power on. Parameters are
indicate out of range. now all set to default values. Move
X J4 back to original position.
Adjust all parameter settings to
correct value.
; Switch power off and on again.
10 expansion board - ERROR

·
• X71:2 and X71:3 are both set to : Set X71:2to X41 and jumper
o or both set to 1 ; between X71:3 and X40
xxxxx board - ERROR • Transducer board, operator • Check cables to board or replace
panel board, or 1/0 board in EPC the board (see Change of Circuit
not working Board in the Service Manual
, booklet).
Computer communication board - ERROR • Bad connection Check connection
• Board faulty • Replace the board

,
•
Communication - ERROR xxxxx • Cable errors i Check cables to board or replace
• the board (see Change of Circuit
, Board in the Service Manual
, booklet).
Heater board - ERROR • Optional heater board in EPC not i Check cables to board or replace
working I the board (see Change of Circuit
i Board in the Service Manual
booklet).
,I
Vibration board - ERROR • Optional vibration board in EPC ' Check cables to board or replace
not working ; the board (see Change of Circuit
, Board in the Service Manual
ibooklet).
i
Heater connection - ERROR • System cross-connection heater I Check parameters and cable.
communication error I
Level switch - DISABLED • If Pr 25=0 the high level alarm is ! The alarms comes as warning to
disabled ! operator.
I Service alarm • If Pr 5 is used, the text in Pr 6 is I Take action according to what the
displayed ; text means (plant dependant).
Temperature increase - TOO SLOW • Insufficient heating during start I Check heater function.
I (Ti53)
,
Temperature - NOT DECREASING I
• Heating on during stop sequence Check heater function.
18
• Recirculating oil not cooling I Reset alarm to continue.
•
1810573-02
S-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING 3 ALARM TESTS
3 Alarm Tests
• [NO,.E]
If any parameter value is changed to activate an
alarm, do not forget to reset to the original value
before operation.
Alarm message Red Sequence Method Termin Reaction

diode al
Standard functions
Bowl speed sensor - ERROR Standsl. Start separator with sensor X6:1
disconnected.
POWER FAILURE Start Switch power off / on during
operation
Feed pressure PT1 - HIGH PT1 Start Decrease Iimtl (Pr14)
Feed pressure PT1 - LOW PT1 Start Increase limit (Pr15)
Feed pressure sensor PT1 - PT1 Start Disconnect sensor X5:4
ERROR
Pump starter· FAILURE Pump Start Swtlch pump off
Oil feed· TEMPERATURE HIGH TT Start Decrease limit (Pr16/Pr19) V1 off.
• Oil feed· TEMPERATURE LOW
-
Temperature alarm sensor-
ERROR
TT
TT
Start
Start
Increase limit (Pr17/Pr20) or
decrease Ti 53
Disconnect sensor X5:2
Heating off.
V10ff
V1 off
Heating off.
Bowl speed· HIGH Separation Decrease limtl (Fa10) Stop
sequence.
- -
Bowl speed· LOW Separation Increase limit (Fa11) Stop

sequence.
-
Oil backpressure PT4· HIGH PT4 Separation Increase backpressure V1 off
-
Oil backpressure PT4 • LOW PT4 Separation Decrease backpressure V1 off
-
NO PT4 PRESSURE TimerTi 71 Disconnect V4 X8:3
FEEDBACK DURING Tixx
--
Oil pressure sensor PT4 • PT4 Separation Disconnect sensor X5:6
ERROR
• 1810573-02 19
3 ALARM TESTS S-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING
Alarm message Red Sequence Method Termin Reaction
•
diode al
Pressure in water outlet PT5 - PT5 Separation Force the paring tube
HIGH outwards or decrease limit
(Pr12)
Pressure in water outlet PT5 - PT5 Separation Force the paring tube
LOW inwards or increase limit
(Pr13)
Water pressure sensor PT5 - PT5 Separation Disconnect sensor X5:8
ERROR
Transducer value - HIGH MT Separation Decrease limit (Fa23) V1 off
Transducer value - LOW MT Separation Increase limit (Fa24) V1 off
Transducer - ERROR MT Separation Disconnect X2 cable plug
HIGH WATER CONTENT IN Separation Add much water to the feed V1 off
OIL and wait for 5 draining
actions. Discharge. After
another 5 drainings alarm is
given.
Discharge feedback - ERROR Discharge Disconnect SV 15 X8:5 A second
attempt to
discharge will
take place
before alarm
and stop.
Emergency stop - BUTTON
PUSHED
Separation Push the button Sep.motor off,
heater off, feed
on for max.3
minutes. Feed
stops when
pressure
•
reaches Prll.
Optional functions
Temperature control sensor - TT Start Disconnect X51:3
ERROR
Heater - FAULT Heater Start Disconnect X51:4
Sludge tank level - HIGH Tank Start Disconnect X201
Separator run-up - TOO LONG Start Decrease Ti 52 to 1. Start Sep. motor off.
the separator.
Temperature increase - TOO TT Start Start separator and EPC but
SLOW not heater, or start system
with To 53 set to 1.
•
20 1810573-02
•
• 6
•
SA 851/856/861/866 Separation Systems ~
-l:!"'J/"<ot:
Installation System Reference
• Printed
Book No.
Jun 2006
1810951·02 V 5
•
•
•
Alfa Lava! reserves the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.

suggestions for improvement of this publication would be •
Alfa Laval company.

SE -147 80 Tumba
Sweden
•
© Copyright Alfa Laval Tumba AB Jun 2006.
Contents
• 1 Technical Data
1.1 Demand Specification Water............. .. .
. . 1
. 1
1.2 Demand Specifications Air . 1
1.3 System Data .. .. ... 2
2 Drawings........................................... . 4
2.1 Flow Chart................. . .4
2.2 Drawings .. 5
2.2.1 SA 851/856 Separator Mounting Drawing, DIN... .. 5
22.2 SA 851/856 Separator Mounting Drawing with S R K, DIN .. 6
2.2.3 SA 851/856 Separator Mounting Drawing, JIS 7
2.2.4 SA 851/856 Separator Mounting Drawing with S R K, JIS 8
2.2.5 SA 851/856 Separator Basic Size Drawing 9
2.2.6 SA 851/856 Separator Foundation Drawing 10
2.2.7 SA 861/866 Separator Mounting Drawing, DIN 11
2.2.8 SA 861/866 Separator Mounting Drawing with S R K, DIN 12
2.2.9 SA 861/866 Separator Mounting Drawing, JIS 13
2.2.10 SA 861/866 Separator Mounting Drawing with S R K, JIS 14
•
2.2.11 SA 861/866 Separator Basic Size Drawing 15
2.2.12 SA 861/866 Separator Foundation Drawing 16
2.2.13 Valve Block Oil, DN 40 Dimension Drawing .. 17
22.14 Valve Block Oil, DN 40 Assembly Drawing. .. 18
2.2.15 Valve Block Water Assembly Drawing.. .. 19
2.2.16 Valve Block Air, Assembly Drawing 20
2.2.17 Control Unit EPC 50 Dimension Drawing 21
2.2.18 Starter Dimension Drawing................. .. 22
2.3 Electrical System Layout .. 23
2.4 Electrical Diagrams 24
2.4.1 Cable List 24
2.4.2 Interconnection Diagram, Starter 27
2.4.3 Interconnection Diagram, Starter, cont 28
2.4.4 Interconnection Diagram, Transmitters 29
2.4.5 Interconnection Diagram, Solenoid Valves 30
2.4.6 Interconnection Diagram, Solenoid Valves cont. .. 31
2.4.7 Interconnection Diagram, Optional Equipment.. 32
2.4.8 Transformer Connection Diagram 33
2.4.9 Circuit Diagram, Power Circuits 34
2.4.10 Circuit Diagram, Separator Starter and Feed Pump 35
2.4.11 Circuit Diagram, Remote Start tnterlock (optional) 36
•
2.4.12 Circuit Diagram, ESD-relay and Trip Contacts (optional) 37
1810951-02
3 Remote Operation Systems...... . 39
4 Specifications........
4.1
4.2
4.3
Cables
Cable Routing
Oil, Water, Steam, and Condensate Piping
42
42
43
43
•
4.4 Ambient Temperature Limitation..................... . 44
4.5 Sludge Removal Kit (Optional Equipment) 45
4.6 Sludge Tank. . 47
4.7 Sludge Piping 49
5 Commissioning and Initial Start 52

5.1 Completion Check List 52
5.2 Initial Start·up 54
5.2.1 Calculating Operating Pressure 56
6 Shut-down and Storage 57

6.1 Shut.cJown after Use 57
6.2 Protection and Storage 58
6.3 Reassembly and Start up 59
•
1810951-02
SA 851/856/861/866 SEPARATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 1 TECHNICAL DATA
1 Technical Data
• 1.1 Demand Specification Water
A/fa Laval ref. 574487 rev. 0
Poor quality of the operating water may with time cause erosion, corrosion and/or
operating problems. The water shall be treated to meet certain demands.
The following requirements are of fundamental importance:
1 Turbidity-free water, solids content <0,001 % by volume.

Max. particle size 50 IJm.
Deposits shall not be allowed to form in certain areas in the system.
2 Total hardness less than 180 mg CaC0 3 per litre, which corresponds to 10 °dH or 12,5 °E. Hard
water may with time form deposits in the operating mechanism. The precipitation rate is
accelerated with increased operating temperature and low discharge frequency. These effects
become more severe the harder the water is.
3 Chloride content max. 100 ppm NaCI (equivalent to 60 mg Cl/I). Chloride ions contribute to
corrosion on surfaces in contact with the operating water.Corrosion is a process that is
• 4
accelerated by increased separating temperature, low pH, and high chloride ion concentration.
6,5 < pH < 9

Bicarbonate content (HC03) min. 70mg HC0 3 per litre. which corresponds to 3,2 °dKH.
( NO'fE]
Alfa Laval accepts no liability for consequences

arising from unsatisfactorily purified operating
water supplied by the customer.
1.2 Demand Specifications Air

Specific requirements regarding the quality
of air [NO'f£J
1 Pressure 500 - 700 kPa (5 - 7 bar). Electrical interconnections must be made by
qualified electricians.
2 Free from oil. and solid particles larger than Mechanical interconnections must be made by
0.01 mm. qualified mechanical technicians.
3 Dry, with dew point min. 10°C below
•
ambient temperature.
1810951-02 1
1 TECHNICAL DATA SA 851/856/861/866 SEPARATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE
1.3 System Data

Media
Feed density, max.
Viscosity, max.
Pressure:
Fuel oil and lube oils for diesel engines
1010 kg/m" at 15"C
55 eSt at 100 "C (700 eSt at 50 "C)
•
oil inlet Max. 200 kPa (2 bar) at separator inlet
oil outlet Max. delivery head 250 kPa (2.5 bar)
sludge outlet from separator open outlet
sludge outlet from sludge pump Max. 5 bar at 6 bar air pressure
Feed temperature lOO "C
Ambient temperature Min. +5 "C, max. +55 "C
Discharge volume
SA 851/856 7.2 litre/discharge
SA861/866 I 0 litre/discharge
Operating water pressure Min 200 kPa (2 bar), max. 600 kPa (6 bar)
Operating water temp. Min. +5 "C, max. +55 "C (unheated water)
Operating water consumption (without make-up water)
SA 851/856 8.4 litre/discharge
SA861/866 11.6 litre/discharge
•
Make up water 1.1 Iitrelhour
Operating water flow from SV 10: 5.5 Vm
from SV IS: 11.0 Vm
from SV 16: 2.8 Vm
Air quality Instrument air
Air pressure Min. 500 kPa (5 bar), max. 700 kPa (7 bar)
Drain connection size 2xl" (internally threaded)
Mains supply voltage 3x230/400/440/4801575/690 V ± 10%
EPC supply voltage (from starter) 230 V /IIOVlI15 V/IOOV ± 10%, max. fuse 10 A
Control vo~age, operating 24VAC
Power consumption, startup
SA 851/856 19kW
SA861/866 24 kW
Power consumption idling/max. capacity
SA 851/856 3.8 kW/I 2.5 kW
SA861/866 4.7 kW/I 6.3 kW
Frequency 50 or 60 Hz ± max. 5%
Enclosure class Min.IP 54
Storage time before use (with bowl removed) max. 6 months
Storage temp. Min. +0 QC, max. +70 QC
2
Storage humidity Relative humidity (RH) 10% - 95 % Non Condensing
•
1810951-02
SA 851185618611866 SEPARATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 1 TECHNICAL DATA
Service intervals: Note! Regularly check connections. Tighten if necessary.
• Separator
Note! Gleaning In Place (GIP) is recommended to avoid

manual internal cleaning of the bowl. The following intervals
are recommended:
Inspection every 4000 hours or 6 months operation
Overhaul every 12000 hours or 18 months operation
Prior to inspection and overhaul

HFO 1 - 2 months depending on oil quality
LO (Gross·head engines) 1 - 2 months depending on oil
quality and engine condition.
LO (Trunk engines) 1 month
Separation System Planned Maintenance Kits

Hours Period Separator Ancillary
Equipment
1000
- . . - - .
2000
..
4000 6 months Inspection
-
.. .. . .. . .
12000
- -
18 months
..
Overhaul _ .
.
,._ .. -
- .. - -
•
24000 3 years Overhaul
. -- .
_._.- - .
As necessary Repair
- . -_. _.. ...

(components)
- . - -
With delivery Inspection
Tools
•
1810951-02 3
:IJ
~ ...
t,)
•
'"
0
:0
.am
en ~
Ol
0) zQ
0-
~
~
."
,,r ,,,
(f)
0
:IJ 1,; .. _ .. _ .. _ .. ,,r , ,,
:e
(])
:< c
"r c "
'" I yo
_.:s
Control unit
: Drain (')
E
L .. _ ._.. -l
[LJ]
...
:::r
AI
ca
en
201 Oil inlet
206 Water for water seal and
displacement
L
~
Q) 209 011 Recirculatlon to tank

~
o 220 Clean oil outlet

to
r.n
~
221 WaterouUel
6 222 Sludge discharge outlet
'" 371 Operating water
375 Opening/closing water
462 Drain
Le-application 501 Operating air
AI< 540 Ventilation

r···· ....... ~., Fe
MCFR
Flow Control !:
Flow Control All
- = Optional Alfa Laval
delivery
...... __ .......... ~
•
... _---- Block mounted
,•• ••• .. ,,
,,• Not included in
:•
Alia Laval standard
,,, delivery
•• ,
Feed pump
...,
I
L J
• • 11)
•
• I\) Cf)
»
•
...
11)
I\) '"'"
The EPC·50 Control Unit must be
postioned close to the separator.
201 Oil inlet
•
en
J:o
.,. ~
~
'"
Cl)
0>
206 Waler for conditioning/displacement
Cl SI)
It must be possible to see the separator '"'"
from the EPC·50 Control Unit position. 2(1.
220
all Recirculatlon to lank
Clean Oil oullet
...
c.n
_.
~ Cf)
m
"U
CD ::::I »
,,~EJ----_·_-_·~,, 221 Water oullet c.n ca
:D
»-<
en 6
: Starter
,
:
, '" Sludge discharge outlet
en III z
,,, ,,, 371 Operating water - see 1.1 Demand
Specification Waler.
~ Cf)
-<
"Dl
Cf)
...
, , Pressure 2QO.6oo kPa (2-6 bar).
.----------" AI -<
m
Temp. mln +SoC, max. +55"C.
;::
Cf)
375 Opening water/closing waler
501 Operating air. Instrument air, 0 z

Cf)
pressure 500-700 kPa (5-7 bar). »-<
e-
'OIl Mains supply 3x2301400/440/4801 i!: t;;
.._.
5751690 V 0 -<
C 6
'''' EPC 50 supply vollage, 23QV. 1101
115Vor lOOV. AC
::l z
Cf)
-<
::l Cf)
-<
u::l m
.ICI
AI
;::
:D
m
."
m
_.
~
::l
:D
m
Z
0
u::l m
w
Connection.
I
A
.
B
DIN Flange DN4Q·PN16·DIN2B33
DIN Flange DN10Q-PN16·DIN2543
-Z
ICI
C ISO G 1/B
D ISO G 1/2
F Flange DN40·PN16·0IN2633
.•
- - - Optional
"Internal flexible connection (enclosed

[ with delivery)
If there is more than one separator system in the

same installation, the EPC·50 Control Units and their o'"
:D
corresponding separators must be clearly marked
~
Z
Gl
U1 Cf)
Cl
JJ The EPC-50 Control Unit must be If there is more than one separator system
'"
o
~
~
postioned close to the separator. in the same installation, the EPC-50 Control
c.n It must be possible to see the separator Units and their corresponding separators 201 Oillnlel
~
-.J
-.J
<D from the EPC-50 Control Unit position. must be clearly marked 206 Water lor conditlonlno'dlsplacement
z
G)
W (j')
0 209 Oll Reclrculation to lank
JJ
ID 220 Clean Oil outlet
'"
~
x
221 Waler outlet
222 Sludge discharge outlet
371 Operating waler - see 1.1 Demand

Specification Waler.
Pressure 200-BOO kPa (2-.6 bar).
Temp. mln +S"C, max. +SS"C.
i!1 § 375 Opening water/closing water
501 Operating air. Instrument air,

~-" !!
pressure 500·700 kPa (5-7 bar).
:l' 540 Ventilation
709 Mains supply 3x2301400144014BOI

575f690 V
u, 79. EPC 50 supply voltage, 23QV, 1101

~
115Vor l00V. AC g:
Connoctions
A DIN Flange DN4Q·PN16·
i'"
DIN2633 ~
C)
B DIN Flange DN25·PN16· (j')
x DIN2543 m
:g
C ISO G 1/B :IJ
D ISO G 1/2
:";
CS
G Pipe" 76.1
z
~
- - Optional
"1
m
x I (enclosed
Internal flexible connection
with delivery)
;;:
(j')
4 holes 012 for z

foundation bolt
~
~
CS
z
(j')
-<
JI
"1m
;;:
:IJ
m
."
m
:IJ
m
Z
om
• • • 'i:
i!!
The EPC-50 Control Unit must be
~
201 Ollintet ~
It must be possible to see the separator 206 Water for cOnditioning/displacement
'"
05
from the EPC-50 Control Unit position. 209 Oil Aecirculalion 10 tank '"
'"
(fl
220 Clean Oil outlet m
Water outlet
::;:D
-- 221
, 222 Sludge discharge oullet
:'<
371 Operating water- see 1.1 Demand ~
(fl
Specification Water.
Pressure 200-600 kPa (2-6 bar).
-<
Temp. min ...S"C, mall.. +SS·C. 'm!1
~I ~I
;;:
375 Opening waler/closing water (fl
501 Operating air, Instrument air, z

~
pressure 500-700 kPa (5-7 bar).
709 Mains supply 3x230/400/44014801 r
~
0",1 5751690 V
~I
~Il , 799 EPC 50 supply voltage, 230V, 1101 is
115Vor1QOV,AC z
~m
;;:
:D
m
-n
m
:D
m
Z
o
m
Connections
A Welding connection 0 49
B Flange 100A·1QK·JIS 82222
C ISOG 118
o ISO G 1/2
- - - Optional
Internal flexible connection (enclosed
[ with delivery)
'"o
~
z
Gl
(fl
ex> JJ The EPC-50 Control Unit must be
~ postioned close to the separator.
If there is more than one separator system
fI)
•fI) '"0
in the same installation, the EPC-50 :D
'"...,..., 201 Ollinlel
~ ~
~
It must be possible to see the separator Control Units and their corresponding
<D from the EPC-50 Control Unit position. separators must be clearly marked 206 Water for conditioning/displacement zGl
~
209
en (j)
JJ
<1>
011 Recirculalion 10 lank
J>
220 Clean 011 outlet
CD
'"
-
x
~
221 Waleroutlal en
....
CD
371 Operating water - see 1.1 Demand en
Specification Waler. en
Temp. mln +5~C, max. +55·C. en
Cl)
!I ~ 375 Opening wluer/closing water
".
...
501 Operating air. Instrument air,
III
pressure 50Q.7QO k.Pa (5-7 bar). III
540 Ventilation
0
709 Mains supply 3x23014001440f480f
575/690 V
!i: (j)
0 »
.._.
161 799 EPC 50 supply voltage, 230V, 110/
115Vor 1QOV. AC C
69)111 :::l ~
03
:::l
ll:I
'"03'"
.
C
III
'"
03
'"'"
(j)
x
_.::e m
":D»
Connections :::l »
ll:I ~
is
B ::e z
,,-.--...... Flange 25A·16K·JI$ 82222
:0: (j)
222 221 8 -<

C ISO G 1/8 :T (j)
~
D ISO G 1/2 en m
;::
4 holes 012 for G Pipe 10 76.1 ::a (j)
z
(j)
foundation bolt - - Optional ;lII; ~
~ »
I
-en
r
x Internal flexible connection e- <;;
(enclosed with delivery) :::!
0
z
(j)
-<
" (j)
~
m
s::
:D
m
-n
m
:D
m
Z
0
m
.X019256A
JJ
• • • (j)
»
~
01 ~
Rl 03
'"'"o §
~
JJ 03
~ ill
~V- Maximum horizcntal displacement
'"
J
(j)
m
~---r I:'0 at t~e inlet/ou.lle I connections
-llH<m ~
i
. dunng operatlon:!:5mm
• ~
,/ ~ ISO-G 1/2
~
081 I
701
1139
I
I r Maximu m vertical
displac ement at the
sludge connection
during operation :!:2 mm
~
.--<
m
s:
(j)
1001 1036
~ ,1r\1
Z
@ "- t"-.
~L ""'1'0 i ~
.l~ I 2t •I•
~ J 2 S
oz
T I -I k .... '[ ISO-G 3/4
(j)
CD
...... j -<
~ ;rl1~~:;:~
~
0 "==' ~
I,
!? m
'/ '////
C!J Tightening torque 160 Nm 42 352 '/ ~;/ s:
01
~ ~ 31 :D
m
6 352 764
353 -n
-n
'"
~
:D
-n
Z
4 holes M12
om
'00
36 36
038, dePth 55
28 2 holes M10,
thread depth 30
I
'82
Connection house with connections 201,220,
and 221, turnable in 60 0 steps all round.
022, depth 45
1-~\-\--2fP)~T20'1
All connections 10 be installed non-loaded and
flexible.
--1:-I?I0T 130
'75,S
95,S
All dimensions are nominal. Reservation for
52
28
I
I 1iI ::;; 109
individual deviations due to tolerances.
6,
'"o
:D
~
Z
Cl
co (j)
'"o
~
0 :u
~ :n
CJ'
0> ~
'"
())
Min. lifting capacity required
Z
Q
'":u'" when doing service: 300 kg (f)
<1> 2:.'00
:<
0
·-------~f
I
I Service side
;'" Max. height of lar est
1800
( ~ S ~~
j : V-I-
J-/~7m~d7 8/;77 Recommended free floor space for
<X> a unloading when doing service.
~
525 No fixed installation within this area
200 -1 I.r"" S Centre of gravity (complete machine)
r~~'
!' I I \ A
.,1
e,1 J3 Verticallorce not exceeding 16 kN/fool
tm1
I4Cl
\X
'~ I ~-~"!,=;--~l--:'
- -,- _ . _ - - T ---, g;1 ~ Foundation boil <~) Horizontal force nol exceeding 16 kN/foot
I ~ ;\) ,
\. I ,,----1 \ Installation ace. to stated foundation
forces.
i I /-\-1<-1-t----\----'- Foundation turntable 360 a
Centre of ~"::-~).-:: "\ \ Centre of motor
separator bowl I \.8 hi ales for foundation bolts
,.... 555 -:
• X0192t4D
• • • ~
(f)
:J>
~
CD
(f)
-.j co
(f)
en co0>0>
The EPC-50 Control Unit must be 201
1:0 co0>
postioned close to the separator. ..... + Oil inlet CD
It must be possible to see the separator
from the EPC-50 Control Unit position.
206 Water 10r conditioning/displacement
-20' Oil Recirculalion 10 lank ...
en 0>
(f)
m
."
Cii :J>
220 Clean Oil outlet en
en ""'i
221 Water outlet i5
en z
~
(f)
-<
371 Operating water- see 1.1 Demand
Specification Water.
Pressure 200-600 kPa (2-6 bar). ...
'l:l
III
III
'm!1
s:
(f)
.i:
Temp. min +soC, max. +55"C.
.... Z
37' Opening water/closing water 0 (f)
-<
SOl Operating air. Instrument air, :J>
r
pressure 500·700 kPa (5-7 bar).
.....
709 Mains supply 3x230/400/44014801
0 ~
575/690 V C i5
:::l z
(f)
799 EPC 50 supply voltage, 230V, 1101 =:!'. -<
115Vor 10QV, AC :::l (f)
-<
la m
.
C
III
s:
"m
"m
~. "m
Z
:::l 0
la m
w
Connections
A DIN Flange DN40·PN16·DJN2633
-
C
Z
8 DIN Flange DN125·PN16·0IN2543
c ISO G 1/8
o ISO G 1/2
F Flange DN4Q·PN16·DIN2633
- - - Optional
• !Internalllexible connection (enclosed

with delivery)
'"o
"~
Z
Cl
(f)
~
:0
I\) The EPC-50 Control Unit must be If there is more than one separator system o
~ in the same installation, the EPC-50 Control
~z
..,<D..,
on
It must be possible to see the separator Units and their corresponding separators
W
'"
:0
(1)
from the EPC-50 Control Unit position. must be clearly marked
@ 20'
206
Oilinl&1
Water for conditionln~displacement

Gl
(f>
x
"
~
209 Oil Reclrculatlon \0 tank
220 Clean Oil outlet
221 Wateroullet

~
371 Operating water - see 1.1 Demand
~I Specification Water.
Pressure 200-600 kPa (2·6 bar).
~l Temp. min +5°C, max. +55°C.
375 Opening water/closing waler
50' Operating air. Instrument air,

pressure 50C)-700 kPa (5·7 bar).
540 Ventilation
'" Mains supply 3x2301400/440/4801
~
709
69h21 575/690 V ~
799 EPC 50 supply voltage, 230V, 1101 ro
'"
~
,'SVorl00V,AC
~
ro
8l
x (f>
,.
m
"U
JJ
Connection.
~
A DIN Flange DN40·PN16- B
D1N2633 z
(f>
B DIN Flange DN25·PN16·
DIN2543 ~
m
4 holes 012 for C ISOG 1/8 s:
(f>
foundation bolt D ISO G 1/2 Z

G Pipe 12' 76.1 ~
r
- - Optional
~
x Internal flexible connection B
(enclosed with delivery)
z
(f>
-<
Ci1
m
s:
JJ
~
JJ
m
z
()
m
• • • N Ul
:J>
•
N CD
~
iD Q;
en
<2!
en
The EPC-50 Control Unit must be
'01
'os
Oil inlet
•en
Cl)
CD
'"
Q;
'"
...
It must be possible to see the separator Water for conditioning/displacement CD
Ul
from the EPC-50 Control Unit position. 209 Oil Recirculation to tank m
"0 Clean 011 outlel CD ":J>

en :JJ
~
'" Water outlet en 6
'" Sludge discharge oullet en z
Ul
CD -<
...
371 Operating water - see 1,1 Demand
Specification Water. "Cl ~
Pressure 2QO-£OO kPa (2·6 bar). ~ m
Temp. min +5"C. max. +55"C. ;::
.,,nl ~ Ul
.
0
375 Opening water/closing water Z
0 Ul
501 Operating air. Instrument air, -<
pressure 50(}.700 kPa (5-7 bar).
:J>
r
i:
~
.._.
0
709 Mains supply 3x230!4QO/440/4801
575/690 V C 6
". EPC 50 supply voltage, 230V, 1101 :s z
Ul
115Vor lQOV. AC -<
:s en
-<
Y:I m
.
C
~
;::
:JJ
m
-n
m
:JJ
:lE m
z
:i'
Y:I
Cl
m
~
Connections
A
I· ...
Welding connection 0 49
-
C.
en
8 Flange 125A·10K·JIS 82222
C ISO G 1/8
D ISO G 1/2
- - Optional
• !Internal ftexible connection (enclosed

,n
COl with delivery)
"
If there is more than one separator system in the
same installation, the EPC-50 Control Units and their
corresponding separators must be clearly marked
'"o
~
Z
Gl
Ul
:0The EPC-50 Control Unit must be If there is more than one separator system
N '"o
N
!E.
postloned close to the separator.
~ It must be possible to see the separator
8
In the same installation, the EPC-50 Control
Units and their corresponding separators
@ 201 Oil inlet ...o
•
J)
~
from the EPC-50 Control Unit position. must be clearly marked <fJ 206 Water for condilionin~displacement
Z
Gl
w
:0 J?J
I
J@. 20' Oil Recirculatlon to tank
~
CA
~ ,;c----------~, ?1flll 220 Clean 011 outlet
:, Starter :,
1ifrn
x
221 Water outlet I...
,,
,
,
, ,
,,
,,
222
371
Sludge discharge outlet
Operating water - see 1.1 Demand

caCll
. _--------~ .. Specification Waler. Cll
Temp. mln +S"C, max. +5S oC. III
CO
375 Openillg water/closing water
II
501
540
709
Operating air. Instrument air,
pressure 5()O.700 kPa (5-7 bar).
Ventilation
Mains supply 3x2301400/44OI4801

...
DJ
o
/" - 1/ 575/600 V
ill:
o
~
~
o
ID
x
7" EPC 50 supply voltage, 230V. 1101
11SV Of l00V. AC
..
C
:::l
;'
ea
01
,
~
Cl
o
DJ
'" :E
Connections ;'
ea
®
~ /c."'- B ---
,.~-~--
~I B Flange 25A·16K·JIS 82222 :E
;;:
::r
@ C ISOG 1/8
de, 0.f
D ISO G 1/2 III
I \\5 4 holes 012 for G Pipe 076.1 :I:l
'0000.;00 ,,"
- - Optional ~
~
-~
... ,v -- - Ir~-I
;1 Internal flexible connection
(enclosed with delivery)
-
c.
I II
r'---
.~
I
+~
"4
_____........../ . - '
/
eX01925BA
e e
• • • ~
(f>
»
......
~ ~
a;
Cl)
'"
~
~ '"
.!!l CXl
05
'"'"
I Maximum horizontal displacement
...
Gl (f>
;~ \
at the inlet/outlet connections m
-- during operation ±5 mm "U
»
r- !J11-.' ;: I
220
CD
Gl
:D
»
-<
Gl is
/' ~ Cl)
z
r :1 \ I
CIl
(f>
-<
, (f>
, ,
, Maximum vertical
"il -<
...
Dj m
@ displacement at the
sludge connection
;::
@ I I
(f>
1/95
illS
@1\ '" I'.- .~~. / I

i
• /149
dUring operation :1:2 mm
0
lID
Z
(f>
-<
»
r
S
N ' '
I
Dj
CIl
tj'
is
z
Jf6 1\ I I
38 depth 50
2 holes M10
Ih[ead.depL30 .__ .
(f>
-<
Cl) (f>
-<
j;j' m
;::
////// r//////,\ CIl
¥
~ Tiahtenina toraue 160 Nm
~- .
Cl
Dj
:D
m
":rJm
m
Jm ~5 I
~22 depth 42 -,
:lE
::s
Z
0
m
10
Connection house with connections 201,220,
and 221, turnable in 60 0 sleps all round.
All connections 10 be installed non-loaded and

flexible.
All dimensions are nominal. Reservation for
individual deviations due to tolerances. , "-
~~~
~
~'"
4 holes M12 _r ~
~
I 96
'"o
:rJ
~
Z
Cl
(f>
~ '"o
Min. lifting capacity required
when doing service: 300 kg
...
~
11)
~
Z
G)
III en
s' 11, 2400 :I>

CIIl
!JillJ ...
I en
IT '1 CD
rdfJ
en
en
I 800 Se",ice side I III
2000 ml,.
I '\
Max. heighto! largest
component incl. lifting tool.
. I ~
-'----
! . - - -I 'l:l
...
1900
AI
,
A1
'3~JJ
1
I, o
I ,,
'11
f L . o en
»
511 ,l
I .
1
1
C
..O·
::J
Q,
AI
~
)jj
§i
I
r-- 1
::J i'"
/ /
1:1 '"en
525
A1 ~:0
/,~.,-,A,,~\~"_I4 - ._ _,
!.::J ~
~
(5
Recommended free floor space for la Z
I 1 (I unloading when doing service.
\.t/ \"<t,,;./~==±=,,,,---,
I
i I.
Foundation bolt
No fixed installation within this area ~
--'-'/1-'-'-'-'-1,-
m
s:
en
Installation ace. to stated foundation Centre of gravity (complete machine)
-==;.d,.L----'-
forces. Z
\,/
h" ..(.',
~
It\ 1 /1, - Foundation turntable 360"
"! i ( " --j-----\---'
r"WL-'
Vertical force nol exceeding 18 kN/foo!
1 : .....--·1----/
" Centre of motor
Horizontal force not exceeding 18 kN/foo!
S
(5
"-8 holes for foundation bolts z
Centre of
separator bowl
I 585
~m
s:
:0
m
."
m
:0
m
Z
om
• X019214E
SA 851/856/861/866 SEPARATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 2 DRAWINGS
2.2.13 Valve Block Oil, DN 40 Dimension Drawing
• "I
!
-, -1:>----r~1 ?(~:[;'. '; Jl
(I
r d~i e'l ~ - :-
;0/
!
:;'1
I
'""-
'u
'"t '
- DSZ - _J .E
(J)
6';
IlL
4
4
•
;;) •
SSl ~
c:r:::;m
H [:]]:BF0il1~· .~
.' , .' "i1})a:rno '
~_~~~J
i ..
HI]
,- []
L~_~.
i.
.jiQr"-'
~ctkr~~ 'I~r ]fl-----i----i~1;c~I. ~ I
~. . ] J =JJ ;cl!:gj r-:.I"'--'
~rPI}l@ro
y~
~ (11~~11 ~~
i U ;
T' -
I i '
~;;:;== I i ~iI ~~~
I
, Ib!:- I ,,"
..JJJ -- .
~ __J
0\
• Ref. 568066 Rev. 0
1810951-02 17
2 DRAWINGS SA 851/856/861/866 SEPARATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE
2.2.14 Valve Block Oil, DN 40 Assembly Drawing
•
Water transducer Cable 19
Connection kit
Angular coupling
Non-return valve
•
Nipple
Pneumatic
change-over valve
Non-return valve
Nipple
Screw Washer Hexagon plug Elbow Silencer Flexible connection
Ref. 567854 Rev. 2
18 1810951-02
•
2.2.15 Valve Block Water Assembly Drawing
•
Flow valve for SV 10
Connection for solenoid valve
/----~ iu~\
/~ ~. Quick coupling
// !
/ / r.6:t /"
;/ / ~
8>
I ,. '----./
Valve block --- !

I !
! I
'i,
; , It:::!
(' Y " / / Non return
I~t;i;
'- / j '
T'~ /
/ / r~
I valve kit
•
o 1 ~= , / I
~,
, / /, ,
I~ / /
I
,±" /'/
~\\~ /
~ ~ ------ ------
'i-~~
~
Flexible connection ~ ----_,
"'" ---==n-lf}
Flexible connection
Ref. 567940 Rev. 0
•
1810951-02 19
2.2.16 Valve Block Air, Assembly Drawing
•
Spade connection
Flexible connection
•
_ _-L1l=E
ReI. 568048 Rev. 0
20 1810951-02
•
2.2.17 Control Unit EPC 50 Dimension Drawing
• Operating panel
09 I~xl
48' 0251hl
Separator interlock
indication (optional) Emergency stop,
separator
Sludge valve ~
=It==l
interlock indication
(optional)
= 5J
~
~
~
On-off, feed
pump
PC connection ~ffi On-off,

separator
511
H
•
Q, Plugged holes
. for extra cable
glands
V
~
~I
:/ 11 ]:
Technical Data
Ambient temperature Max. 55 QC
I - .
Protection class IP 65
Material in cabinet Sheet steel

Power supply 100,115, or 230 V AC 50160 Hz
Operating voltage 24 v AC 50160 Hz
Power consumption 70 VA (+200 VA for VO)
Weight 19k9
Optional
• Ref. 568304 Rev. 3
1810951-02 21
2.2.18 Starter Dimension Drawing
•
Ref. 568025 Rev. 1
22 1810951-02
• • • N ~
•
Co) ~
-nm Ii
Control unit
I'i"'--_ •• "'._"'''il
Clrt:ll~boafd
11 -Vibrahon
11 -Commoolc.llon
11 -Huler Q;lnllQl
11 -Remolelllartt\$
ll.=== .. ",==::: .. :lI
~
- -.IJ2i-
SUM
-- - -Remote
- - --
'elremp. AI,
RBmote
- - - - -®oe-un,t--
Remote
. - - - Da-;;- - -®-Start7siOP"
..._.
~
n
en
m
:g
:0
!'<
, , ,
- -®-e«nm-:--
_ --@; Sls~~ _
-
AI 6
z
en
..
~
Emergency
-<
''''''''
11$1 o
- U'I 'm!1
'<
~
<$:G? rr-===-===;==lI s:
,,, 11 11 III en
11 Starter 11
~
Z
,
11 11
~
,, " 11 11
~c-
11
11
11
11 :I
,----- ._.----
I1
11
I1 11
11
11
r- S
6
r - -- - - -- - -- -@--
11
11
11
11 AI z
'<
..
I!:==
~
VI =",,!J
o m
,r--------@-- c s:
, r-------@-- :0
qJ
: : r------@-- m
u. ~: :: r----%- :0
m
L _ L ---' I I I I ---.f7'L Z
_ •• .::....J I
r i l l I r---___&_- o
,, 1 11 1 1 ~
II1 I 1 r----,zy--
m
11 Heating system
:: See also 1765867 for
11
~-----------------------~
,
r
I
"""'~
CS II
I
I I
..JI I11: I
I 1
uelectric healer; 1765868 I~------------------------, ~ J I1 I1
~ rr":.~':::;~-=-.::.::.::.::.::.::~- _..J : i:i

lifer steam heater 11 ,
11 11 ,
I,!;;=======c===== =.lJ
,,I L.JILS 'ilmSV6H 1111
1I ?: 11 I III
,, 11
I1 Tank
I l...---Ir---'
I Sludgell
III
I I I
, 11
11
pump 11 III
III
Inlerconnection diagram 568030
Cable list 568031
I1 I 11 I1 III
:~
L ~~~~~~=~~~~::~~~~~~~~~~~===~J: J
Optional AlIa Laval
delivery
Functional blocks
"o
:0
~
I\)
Z
Gl
VJ en
2.4 Electrical Diagrams
2.4.1 Cable List

No. Type Connection point
A
Instruction Connection point
B
Remarks
•
Power cables (currents according to order)
1 MPRXCX 3x4 Mains supply Starter Fuse 20A
1 MPRXCX 3x10 Mains supply Starter Fuse 35 A
1 MPRXCX 3x16 Mains supply Starter Fuse 50A
2 MPRXCX 2x1.5 Starter EPC50
3 MPRXCX 3x1.5 Starter Separator motor 2.5-6.3A

3 MPRXCX 3x2.5 Starter Separator motor 6.3-16A
3 MPRXCX 3x4 Starter Separator motor 16 - 20 A
3 MPRXCX 3x6 Starter Separator motor 20-25A
•
71 MPRXCX 2x1.5 Starter Separator motor
4 MPRXCX 3x1.5 Starter Feed pump 0.4 - 6.3 A

4 MPRXCX 3x2.5 Starter Feed pump 6.3-16A
72 MPRXCX 2x1.5 Starter Feed pump
Ref. 568031 Rev. 1
24 1810951-02
•
• 11
12
No.
Signal cables
Type
RFE-HF
RFE-HF
lx2xO.75
1x2xO.75
Connection point
EPe 50
EPe 50
A
Instruction Connection point
SV1
SV4
B
Remarks
13 RFE-HF 1x2xO.75 EPe50 SV5

14 RFE-HF 1x2xO.75 EPe 50 SV10
~
15 RFE~HF 1x2xO.75 EPe50 SV15

..
16 RFE-HF 1x2xO.75 EPG 50 SV16
.
17
I. :. RFE-HF
... . .
1x2xO.75
. ~
EPe 50 SSG PT1
18 RFE-HF 1x2x0.75 EPG 50 SSG PT4
I···· 2)
19 PUR-cable 4xO.34 EPG 50 SSG+EMG MT
. ..
20 RFE-HF 4x2xO.50 EPG 50 SSG+ EMG ST, (YT, SS)
. ~ . ..
21 RFE-HF 1x2xO.75 EPG50 SSG PT5
- .
22 RFE-HF 1x2xO.75 EPG50 SUM Alarm
- ~ .
23 RFE-HF 4x2xO.75 EPG50 sse TI1fTT2
~ ...
I· ~~
50 RFE-HF 4x2xO.75 EPe 50 Starter
~ . .
51 RFE-HF 4x2xO.75 EPG 50 Starter
• 52
Options (as ordered)

31
32
..
RFE-HF
_....
RFE-HF
RFE-HF
~
1x4xO.75
... "
1x4xO.75
1x4xO.75
._-
EPG50
EPG 50
EPG50
.
SSG+ EMG
~-+._-- .
Starter
. -
Rem. OP unit
Rem. Temp. al.
. - -
--
-
--
.
.. ~ I~ ~ ~
33 MPRXGX 5x1.5 EPe 50 Rem. StarVStop

~
34 RFE-HF 1x4xO.75 EPG 50 SSG+EMG Gomm. module

. ~~. . -
35 RFE-HF 1x4xO.75 Starter GS, Valve switch
- - - --- -
36 RFE-HF 1x2xO.75 EPG 50 LS, Sludge Level
- ----.
37 RFE-HF 1x2xO.75 EPG 50 SV6, Sol. Valve For pneumatic
sludge pump
- 1)
38 MPRXGX 4x1.5 EPG50 Syst. Emergency
~
.-
40 RFE-HF 4x2xO.75 EPG 50 Power unit

45 RFE-HF lx2xO.75 Starter Power unit
--_ _-- ... - -- .
41 RFE-HF 1x4xO.75 EPG 50 Steam reg. valve

44 RFE-HF 1x2xO.75 EPG50 Shut-off valve
1) This cable cannot be longer than 25 m to avoid voltage drop.

2) Cable with moulded connector included in AlIa Laval delivery.
• Ref. 568031 Rev. 1
1810951-02 25
Other equivalent and approved cables may be

used.
Cable areas are calculated with correction
factor 0.7.
Cables used are Shipboard Cables, designed
according to IEC 92-3.
•
Flame retardant according to lEC 332-3/A.
Halogen-free according to IEC 754-1
Code designations for cables obtainable
through cable producers Helkama, Finland,
and Acatel, France.
Where SSC is indicated it should be a Signal
Shielded Cable with the shield properly
connected to earth as shown in the electrical
drawings.
For other connections, an armoured cable may
be used provided the armour is connected to
earth, as shown in the electrical drawings, and
gives sufficient EMl protection. Copper wire
armouring is normally used.
26 1810951-02
•
2.4.2 Interconnection Diagram, Starter
• ,-
I
-:.-'-
'r~
If-------i-!
I
-._-- - --- - --~.- ~'---
~x~~~,~~~~~40: 480. ~575 -or 690\FAC - - - -:_~-> _: -. t-J~ 2- --if: ::i :::::: ~~':: 'o!
Select correct voltage on transformer T8
Separator motor
(~~ J-, - ! l~ j-' -----rz::--r:;
i \J s::
\ ~._<_
'S-J-l -
Se 3-3 - -<__~J\--.------:H:--+i--
("-,
L.J
3-2 --;~
j-j --'13
.Ii---'
Space heater 230 VAC I r A
! ' I ' ....
Separator motor ,-;:rITI--_71_1-i'''''' ,~-, ! i 1~71-1----fir-1ij'l
r
r.
optional 1_ - - - -7\-2~~-:!-"J;:~ --,~ - .-:1- - --,'rl iH-- ~~
+_..J . ~ 71 I 71
I : I
Contactor response, separator !

i,..., IL ~
----;------- _ -- - ---- --------- -- __ --- - -+-I----H 83..Y"f,4'j
PotentIal free contacts, max. 250 V 0.5 A U Ir -- -- - - - - - - -- ---
!
Feed pump motor

0:-:;~ ;:; ~~ --;X> -ii -.. ~ ~- -- r~ : : : it c
•
optional
'--.. . . - ' ! ' -
'Il----" '-------"
i \ ?':
~~~~~a~~ra~~t~;OVAC :~~._- ~~=~ ~:_ 3<!3~;~ -i_

-= ~ :j :: ::~~ ----6;~
optional 11- - - .J -:;:/T'l'i
i t......J Ir - - -
. , I
Contactor response, separator : i,...." IL -, I A
- - --; - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -.- -+ -I- - _ -H !L...J.-'1l~ <'.r>
Potential free contacts. max. 250 V 0.5 A I Lr ,r - - - - - - - - --
I
Systems emergency stop

(Control voltage off)
Power supply to EPC 50 (Sheet 5)

230 VAC. 50/60 Hz
• Ref. 568030 Sheet 1, Rev. 4
1810951-02 27
2.4.3 Interconnection Diagram, Starter, cont.
• = Replaces jumper in terminals

** = Internal connections
To EPG SO'-(s_h-cec-et'-Cs,,) @i-.-'-+-ri

~O-l - -
~C-:.'
5{)-3
~O-4
;'1 J.Ql
Xl-
X .
---E:O!iill
•
50-5 Xl:
.J 50-6 Xl :l.QG.1
50~ 7 - - XLLQ.7-
5H3 Xl...lQBJ
I
51-1 Xl' 1 Q
51-2 Xl" 11
51-J Xl: 111
To EPG SO '-(S_h_e_et_S,,) ~(sI'}--:---;--'+---j1 51-4 Xl:1IL
LJ
Separator emergency stop

(optional, external)
-:--1---
'"
LJ (f)
I :J,!
:rJ
-;
Sludge valve interlock switch
_l.:~~_ J:- =~;=~ ==*=- m
Ir - ;5~'} - - - ..IV"''''''
optional :rJ
Lt
•
11-- 55 - ( - - -
i
52-) --'U.cL'-L.c>'
Remote stop I
~?~-~-=-.=--=-j! , Ir-----.-
Feed pump
Remote start r - - - - - - -"I~ - - - - - -
fr
-t--I--
1,------
I~ ..IV"''''
L ~
",
~~
U :~------_w:JJ2J
Feed pump interlock

i
1_"t- -
Heater interlock
-~~i-
f --_--
-----------------------------~4JL-
Potential free contact, max. 2S0 V O.S A ',,' LJ
(Feed pump running = contact closed) 11-------
" Xl' 1')
, '0
Tripped mot~>r,"i~c_u~!'~~a.!<~~sj()etlo~~~ _ -~~- Ir------ Xl' .':0
Potential free NG contacts, max. 2S0 V O.S A I,'
U
"'
IL ______
Xl: J'loj '0
"
,,------- Xl: 140 -'"
Emergency Shut Down (ESD) signal (optional)
,I
~~:::j "
11- - - - - - - ""'-l'±l.r
---------------------------------- -:~ -
o - - - - - 'LLLC>Q
Emergency Shut Down (ESD) feedback

_L~_ :~------ -~-1
Lt -~~ - - - - - - 'fJLCI'ir~
,
-<Rr---'-t-I-+--II--"'3~-I~:g ~
~4~
11&
To EPG SO,-(s_h_e_e_t3-')
!~ ~2-4
•
Ret. S68030 Sheet 2, Rev. 4
28 1810951-02
2.4.4 Interconnection Diagram, Transmitters
• MT
Water transducer
flif·;--Jf-·,.;--{
i . ,;;
* Termination ! '4...
19.......
19-4
19
,"
.'
!l!!!..
:-J
jumper. Only at
sattbus end units.
I
i'
• •
I
,o·
L._._._._._._._.~
"
,... ,
ili~~E;l'-'f-"+' --{
Remote OP unit
L.J.+'-i-t:::=~
m
., Termination
i .
,.... za..J
jumper. Only at Jl-4
sattbus end units. i . •

~-,
i' I
Temp. sensor,
2xPT 100
~._._._._._._._.~
'---+++-[::~
~ .. x
:': r'-'-
l:i.J
., .•
IT 1 (Alarm) . 0:1:
~.
::-.1»
0-
"
-0-
IT 2 (Control) - I 0
I a.
L._._ o
oZ
~
- ..... --l
:D
or-
PT1
iF~-~ [j:::~-lf'-!l--{17 }---i-I-'-i-t::~:~ m::. e
•
L._._._._._._._._._.J z
PT4
il _ -
r'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'--'
!
i
lOmA +~la-l IH- -{18 '---i-t-:-I-£ ,..'
-~la-2!
--l
m
'lJ
L._. . . ._._._._._.j
I 1&-2
t-"""- o
PT5
c.n
b o
~
Speed sensor
(Cable included in
separator delivery)
1""--1
o » Speed transmitter
:;):=+
~ '"
"D =;"
m S'
~.
...:.
D3 co Vibration transmitter
Q ~ (Optional L
ID
"5i ".,
Separator interlock ,-;-H-1[~:; ; -
" ..
~t
5" switch -
10 optional
co
"
Q.
6' From starter (sheet 2)
52
,=
"IT LS
~"-'j
Note l
\l Level Switch x.
-L
Sludge Tank ~~-2 </-
(Optional) ._._._._._._.-._._."
•
Ref. 568030 Sheet 3, Rev. 4
1810951-02 29
2.4.5 Interconnection Diagram, Solenoid Valves
"~
og~·4l
~
•
. . 5'-
(f)~CD(l)
~~s
Signal to alarm panel. ,
Pot. free contact, opens at alarm 1
Max. 50 VAC/DC, 1.0 A
22 H-+-'-HI 2 4 1 ~
SV6 1I.ll
~
$7-1
-I
Solenoid Valve for 11-------{37 H--+-+1 -
control of
Pneumatic Sludge
Pump
$7-
i7'
(Optional)
SVl
Oil feed ~"-IJ
11-2
t1
-
:RB:I:
o
SV4
oZ
Oil outiet ~"-J I 12-
12 -
YR'?
~
-i
:0
or-
SV5
Water outiet
SV10
Water seal
~'3-J
~14-1J
113-
I 1-4-2
13 r'---,i-t-+lL 13-1
14
13-2 -
-
][I
WT
~
e
z
-i
m
-u
o
(Jl
o
•
~
~'S-'J
SV15
-: 1~2
15
Opening water -
SV16
~'5-IJ }--+--+-i1[ 16-1 vc.<
Closing water -: 16-2
16 16-2 -
~
,
;;;13
~
n
,,o
':1
o
g
;:
"~
•
Ref. 568030 Sheet 4, Rev. 4
30 1810951-02
2.4.6 Interconnection Diagram, Solenoid Valves cont.
• "f
M.CLQJ
X4 .: 7 I
X40:31
Xlli]J
:~ 38-\ - - - - - X40:101
__
'I
Systems emergency stop
(Control voltage off)
~-.:.:--= ~=~=t -'33-'--- ~ __ -'"'t} 38-2 ~- - _:"-[rLJ
r- - - - 38-3-1: \- ,- { I 'r' ::- Jf:l-J - - - - -,..,iFG I
'- ~,- - 38-4~1
I I
.~
::_ J!H
'l~X40: 1i j
I
I
I . 41'1
I
I
X,~1'2
;i 1,1
j -~
I <
I , "
! I , CD
C
,41' 1 ~
:<41'17
~
X41 I
o
oZ
From starter (sheet 2)
CD I I J:~~:~ ===1~
.-"
--I
::0
or-
<... I
•
c j-------IOEJ
3 e
u
~
,'l~-,!-:
.-. z
--I
~
m
~
"U
8 o
< c.n
f; o
• Replaces jumper in terminals
• Ref. 568030 Sheet 5, Rev. 4
1810951-02 31
2.4.7 Interconnection Diagram, Optional Equipment
r·-·-·-·-·-
•
~ ~
<
20-J ,I -X ·1 CD
20-4 l'
20-5
I cl:!!;,l §?
<D
o
51-:' I
1504 "
o
oZ
5Hi LX£Q;E
I -l
L._._. ._ :IJ
xx
~~
-Q
or-
r-----
1 e
z
-l
:I:
m m
<i "U
m
" o
~
(Jl
o
"o
Remote alarm indicatioo ,-------------,

High temp. indication
Low temp. indication
Pot. free contacts
•
Max. 50 V AC/DC, 1.0 A
Contact closes at alarm.
Remote operation
,--------------
Remote mode selected

(output 24 VAC) -~-:B-i
9m
x
Sep. status indication 'ziJ
(output 24 V AC) Ul
5
Separation StarVStop z
llil.ta ~
Jumper X71:1 to X71:3 to
avoid false alarm when not
"
o
used.
i I
L._._._._._
Data commllojcaUoo
•
Ref. 568030 Sheet 6. Rev. 4
32 1810951-02
• • • I\)
•
(f)
»
oSlo
•Cl) '"'"
CXi
'"'"
~
CD
~
Main switch
-.
CXi
:::l
, - -51----' en '"'"
(f)
T Line filter 0 m
I p
~
:n
Line phase Xi.!8 I
3
Line neutral
I
-I
I .
ID
(')
"<
6
z
(f)
I I -<
{
To I/O 0 (f)
--i
:::l m
board I I
._.
:::l ;::
ID (f)
Protective earth
I I n z
"1
_~ B I I 0 »
r
:::l
~
1'\Ae~-----------------------------~~~:~-------1 R~e_d _+-~x~t.J'-'--, ,; ~ _.
:;::kn
IIV, ~ is
z
ov",::t~::------~-----~-----~---:::~:-~--~~II- --:::~r .
III
u::a
III
(f)
-<
"1
m
;::
-1-01~ Wtilte r ~I
3 :n
m
~_III----~e-I~-I:-:----II[ :::T : :J~I

-n
,;;:;k
m
To I/O :n
m
board Z
0
m
"C1 I
I Xll9 Red --,----'--'---q;~
ij\l ·_:r---·~·_-------------------------------------_·_---
-------
r)13All Red
'mo·- &,'X~ 1-_"
X,,,,'!...l--'-''--''''''''''---'_ _EO ot~
~~-r--;::::;-------cwo
I
I fbl8AII Red /
7~V~C;':0 ?Sf mm er x'.!.!!...... ----e---L~~' - E c ) - - - - - -
~vtol1L-J~-_--~~~-{~ Red
Qil-l"'X4"-'I"-I ~~~---"
(3-1"",,,1,,"
I Red ,/
i
o'"
~
Z
Gl
(f)
2 DRAWINGS SA 8511856/861/866 SEPARATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE
2.4.9 Circuit Diagram, Power Circuits
Mains supply
- ------- - - --- -- -
------------------:~-
--'~
'-n'::'
---~--------------~/(~~======================~1l
•
1--:-1
I (it I
,L'-'r-l
112 ' _
!f' A Cl r:--EBo
Separator ~---------------~~~~
'---------------------<>-i?
( <:
N N
<I
~~N====~tl
;-:-
"-=-/~- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~~ --------;. i--c.J.-";c~;-----;
;
~t~ ~"
Space heater
(optional)
:"_C' CC-:cC:c::c:CC: 'I w
Feed pump
(optional)
/ ~ 0'---------------~:v:
~:s: G---------------~~, e.-
~;-C-~
~<J +-<r;~
===m
'- --' ~---------------~C- I' ~' ' ""'~--~
Space heater '" 1=
(optional) ~-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~:--+I~
ConI.
•
ReI. 568028 Sheet 1, Rev_ 0
34 1810951-02
•
JJ
• • N (f)
l>
~
CJ> ...•~ '"'"
0;
~
0 '"'"
en
_.
(') ~
c; 0;
.
or
ffi
I"~
r'-'-'-'-'- -.-.-.----~--.-------.-.-.---.-.- 1 _.
C
0>
0>
(f)
m
! X.41
JJ
~
!X40AC24V
AC ?4 V N I
I
X~.~'-------------------------------,
X4 () _.0 'U
l>
:D
':<
o I ~J'~_~~_~~~?v ST~~ ~ ,'T7<~-- \:~L!~~:·:-·---------'r---,-_,-~:-J .
~
112 is
z
21 22 9 109 113 119
~
(f)
START SEPARATOR 50 I ' 1-\ -I ~ <1/,---"
r ·- =-V Xi
02 n" 1 -<
~
X4S I :.1 , Xl! K20 \Xl Sill . CONTACTOR,
,- J.~ I Hil 120 m---;-n-=--v--~~-~ Li25------0~~i'"Alfi21
A2 [ SEPARATOR li e5 1 "··......' 2 ~
J m
I (Optional) - -, I/C5 3 ~ '<'"4-- ;;:
I i ~'" III (f)
~lU~~J: ~~~~LOCK: 2' ~ - - - -,'1 ~,:C:l ~3:'~

52/C SI./A I SLUDGE Xl
n X;5! XI :
ID Z
.wTO
~ ;p.. SO
2 ~ 102
_.'.'_.4~_,_] Xl r2
J I SWITCH
i (Optional)
I
!,
I
i, mj 4 ~
.
I .I, PILOT LAMP,
C~ """'33.....-:~
3!C3 ----;;J.--o::-:: "..iil
~
(f)
-i
l>
r
r'" S
'.:" AUTOM02DE~·:~J'--·'-"--""\!'~i
.-,40 ~C 24 V I =_ I
,i "ii- i
. !
I,: ~
HB
',: SEPARATOR :;~; ~~
(Remote indication) "fJ-'-'~
...
0
III
is
z
(f)
-<
.--.•.---.-----.--.-- _ _,_
~5
'i
SEPARATOR FEEDBACK
10
I
11.11
: \
•._-_.__.__._
i'-'I
_..,
><:2
.n--'<>.~~
J...........
xd l>:l
L. __ ...J
Xl i
-1~(} h"O'_, i'12'j-·-"·"_·""·'i'o-"·"i
: :
I
X45 -
;O-·---x·10~:;;
I
-.• i ~~~~n~~ VALVE INDICATION
I ....
~
ID
(f)
-i
m
;;:
:D
m
I I ~i3! ~
"m:D
FEED PUMP FEEDBACK
'·1 K~"
_
I I ,---;;--;{~~
I ~ \ :'. ~
I PILOT LAMP, FEED
i PUMP
:::I
~
m
Z
~f,
.,.--------------------~,-!<i.J
4 I 12P.
I Xl
JJ~J!
•
.\.1
-~!
135 H
44135
1\.\
X4~·I'_·-
L·-·
(1
I /,2
.
, "1'1
"m
r ID
SO SO
I
I ,.--------,,;- 1)3
,1 ·10B
I K3
ID
- ._~~~......!~ X~_.J-r-o __ ":~¥ ~_, ~CONTACTOR,FEED
1(5
~
5:---<->5 11- 105 119 130 133 134
$.H,l •
I.~~ --A1UA2--j PUMP
I!C4 \"'....... 0-
2-
":Ic
, m
1~C4 3u.--"'4
1.9 START FEED PUMP 53/( S3/A Xi XI i/C~ 5"....6~
, ~-'--'-----'-+·-'J(I7.i )~~'2i '~: i ':: I L,;~ ,."n~J'" 84 D"~
, L n'__- . _
E4
53
1/e.3
3"3'.--".34'
"43...·7
~--~
---J'--O-----
"
I 7 I iD' 61 C2
I/U ....:;.,r.. --c...:.;-
r-, ! (Remote indication) ~ ~
L~~ _._.~. ._._. ._. ._._.~._ J 83"" 84
o'"
~
Z
Cl
(f)
N
~
'"o
......
•
~
Z
Gl
n U>
irc_.
X41AC24VN
X:O AC 24 V
..
P-
0--1·-·-·~·~~~~·~~~~·~~::·~~---·-·-·' i
, r Separator fnterfock-·
III
ca
! ! Switch
~S_!_
'
! i K20
1 ~"~,'-'x~"H_·~x~,--------------------~SL
Aux. relay K20 ;
I
i
I
.
13! (Optlonal)"t
L._.. __ ._. __ .._._.. _._._._.J
;- 14 11
X45
i III
11
A1lJA2 e4
~04
12
a
•
2/03
I ~5 ~5 Z"0t24
! X45 ~I 22
I -16 1~6
L_...._._ .._._ _ ....._.._.. _
K2 K21
'G3-"-i,~,lii1
K20 Aux. relay K21
'1~
12
Cl
N412
2~"'1.>
~'-'-'-'-'-'i
i i
K2~
1 :; r----~7-r Separator interlock
~2
-
::::I
CD
i iVibratib-rii i
iiBoard i l
L xl I ~4:\
,1-,-,-·l~\()XT-t
t:..> indication ::!.
, o
I i i i
, n
i", i, !50
I i
"
i j ~f>O
J,-+',_1-
I
i ;
I
,;"c'J---------.."K21
," 21'tt,',4 L._._._._._. _
-._.
lI\"
o
I I'
i i {;
i L...._. ._J
I
i
i
114"• "
o
,
l...._._. ._._.-I
i
-~
• X019204C
2.4.12 Circuit Diagram, ESD-relay and Trip Contacts (optional)
•
1- -.- - -._.-.- - - - - - - - l
1
Xe ~l; /1:>' XI§'

1
!:::..:- ::: I
0/ 0tJ'-'
=
I~ D ~ ~
:~ ~) W 1
1-01-l,J I-
r~ iN' ......... n
:;< I
01
1 t5
19::::- -u'"
I~
):n" "'
w
',-:::' "'
~ w
"0 1
I cm !:::2- 2.- 1
OC
O.Q
1
0 .0.
- 1
._
1 ~£ 1
1_._._.-. __ ._._._._._.- _.J
•
I - - - . - -'-'-'-'-'-'-'-.-.- l
I ~ )
1
.
"
N i~
0' n-
I -
-
~ I
1 -~ I~ \ 1
1 :;~-
-:(
11".'0-S
I --
I~N
",N I
1 "- i 1
1 ~ X i i
1 g~ ! I
wc I '
I
IfBo
,
~ Q
00.
- 1
X-N::::!:
n ~
I
1
L._. __ .__ .__ . __ ._. __ ._ J
•
Ref, 568028 Sheet 4. Rev, 0
1810951-02 37
SA 851/856/861/866 SEPARATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 3 REMOTE OPERATION SYSTEMS
3 Remote Operation Systems
•
If the system is operated from a position from
which the separator is not visible, a Remote
Operation System must be installed, including
vibration sensor and frame cover interlock switch.
Connection to steering system via

PROFIBUS or MODBUS fieldbus systems.
PROFIBUS or MODBUS communication
protocol can be used to connect an EPC 50
Control Unit to a central steering system. The
EPC 50 Control Unit uses a PROFIBUS DP or
MODBUS RTU. Every node, or EPC 50 Control
Unit, on the bus has a unique address, and can
use 200 bytes for data exchange. An interface
•
board is needed to connect an EPC 50 Control
Unit to the respective fieldbus system. This is
mounted on the I/O card.
Remote fieldbus connection for EPC 50 Control
Unit is for use in those cases where the user
wants access to data and operation information
from the control cabinet, and supervision and!
or remote control from his own steering
system.
•
1810951-02 39
3 REMOTE OPERATION SYSTEMS SA 851/856/861/866 SEPARATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE
Alternative
User interface
Cable
PROFIBUS
To be arranged by
customer.
Cable for PROFIBUS

MODBUS
To be arranged by
customer.
Cable for MODBUS

•
aquired and installed aquired and installed
by customer. by customer.
Manual Hardware and software Hardware and software
instructions exist. instructions exist.
-
Board Part no. 31830-6559-1 Part no. 31830-6558-1
•
40 1810951-02
4 SPECIFICATIONS SA 851/856/861/866 SEPARATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE
4 Specifications
4.1 Cables •
Cable Identification
All cables are to be marked to simplify
identification and fault finding.
Specifications
The following specifications apply to cables
connected to and from Alfa Laval equipment.
Follow the instructions given in the cable list.
Examples of cable types that can be used:
• Steel armoured cable.
• Copper armoured cable with a separate earth

core.
,.
o
o
• Steel armoured and shielded signal cable;

pair twisted or parallel.
• Shielded signal cable; pair twisted or parallel.
42 1810951-02
SA 851/856/861/866 SEPARATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 4 SPECIFICATIONS
4.2 Cable Routing

• Recommendations
Power cables carry the power supply to motors,
heaters, etc.
Any distance between signal and power cables
reduces electrical noise transfer.
Examples of recommended routing of various
cable types.
Power Signal
• Power cables and signal cables routed on a Cables Cable
cable rack should be separated.
~~~
(@@\
• Sattbus cables should be routed away from
power cables. ~ @@
If the space is limited, cables can be routed in

tubes.
4.3 Oil, Water, Steam, and Condensate Piping

For piping to and from Alfa Laval equipment,
• see the specifications below.
Specifications
• The correct pipe size must be used in the oil

system.
• The number of bends in the oil pipes must

be minimized.
• The suction height must be as low as

possible.
• The oil feed pump must be of positive

displacement type.
• The pump must be positioned close to the

oil tank.
• The heater must be installed close to the

separation system to maintain correct feed
oil temperature.
• The recirculation line should be connected

either directly to the settling tank (HFO) or to
• •
the oil outlet line from the separator (LO).
The oil outlet line from the separator must be

connected to the system tank for lube oil, or
the service tank for fuel oil.
1810951-02 43
4.4 Ambient Temperature Limitation

Specification
Leading classification societies state in their
regulations for engine room equipment that the
maximum ambient temperature permissible is
+55 0 C. To meet this regulation, it is essential
•
that electrical and electronic components have
good ventilation, and temperature control.
•
44 1810951-02
4.5 Sludge Removal Kit (Optional Equipment)
• If you have a Sludge Removal Kit, this must be

connected to a ventilation pipe.
[MOTE]
The sludge removal pump must be set to the correct
speed - circa 60 strokes/min, otherwise the lifetime
of the diaphragm, valve balls, and air motor will be
severely shortened.
Health Risk
Oil mist and vaporized oil constituents from hot oily
sludge may be dangerous to health and must not be
inhaled.
A pipe or hose must be drawn from the flange to

the nearest oil tank ventilation pipe.
The pipe /hose must have the same diameter as
•
the flange opening.
The pipe/hose must be as straight as possible,
with a steady upward incline.
The connection to the oil tank ventilation pipe
must point upwards as shown.
[MOTE] •
Oil lank ventilation
pipe
For HFO separation, it is not recommended to make

the connection to the separator room ventilation
II
system.
For LO separation, connection to the separator room
i SA system
ventilation system should be made l!Ill¥ if the

separator room ventilation is adequate. Use the
optional connection hose (part no. 568023-80, -81, or
-82) for this purpose. This hose is designed to entrap -.
1-
-<-
5rrm
oil drops in the vent hose, and lead the oil back to the
Sludge Removal Kit tank.
•
1810951·02 45
["01'£J
Impurities gather in the Sludge Removal Kit tank.
Regularly check the tank and level switch. See
instructions below.
Proceed as follows:
•
• From the Control Panel, run the sludge pump
manually for a few seconds.
• Undo the four screws at the top of the sludge
tank and remove the sludge pump.
• If necessary, clean the level switch and the
inside of the tank using diesel oil.
• Check the seals and gaskets, and change if
necessary.
• Loosen the hose clip and check the inside of
the ventilation hose. Clean if necessary.
To avoid breakdown of the Sludge Removal
system, the sludge pump must be regularly
overhauled as follows using spare parts kit
•
1766702-81.
• Replace the diaphragms and the a-rings with
those delivered in the spare parts kit.
• Perform a 4000 hour Inspection Service.
For Service and Overhaul intervals, see "1.3
System Data" on page 2.
46
•
1810951-02
4.6 Sludge Tank
• • Sludge tank volume per separation system

should cover approximately up to 2 days
storage at a discharge interval of 2 hours (for
discharge volumes see technical data). Sludge pipe
connection
Ventilation pipe
• A manhole should be installed for inspection

and cleaning.
• The tank should be fitted with a sounding "'I"

pipe. 1I
Min. height
Sludge oudet I" , 400 mm
• The tank floor, or most of it, should have a pump connection
-----
"
I,
slope (B) of minimum 15°. I, o
• The sludge outlet pump connection should be o '""
positioned in the lowest part of the tank.
• A high level alarm switch, connected to the

sludge pump, should be installed.
• A heating coil should be used to keep the

Bowl casing drain Manhole Water drain High level
sludge warm and fluid while being pumped connection connection alarm
switch
out.
•
• Tank ventilation must follow the classification
rules for evacuation of gases. Heating
coil
-----------------~
• There should be a ventilation pipe to fresh air.
• The ventilation pipe should be straight. If this ,

L I
is not possible, any bends must be gradual. ®
• The ventilation pipe must not extend below the

tank top.
• A sludge tank with partition walls must have

ventilation pipes in all compartments, or
cutouts in the upper edge, to allow vapours to
travel through the tank.
•
1810951-02 47
The number of ventilation pipes, and their
•
minimum dimension, depend on the size and
number of separators connected to the same
tank. See table below.
Type 1 system 2 systems
SA811, SA816 1 x 050mm 1 x 050mm
SA 821, SA 826 1 x 075mm 1 x 075mm

SA 831, SA 836
SA 841, SA 846
SA 851, SA 856 1 x 0100mm 1 x 0100mm

SA 861, SA 866
SA 871, SA 876 1 x 0100mm 1 x 0125mm

SA 881, SA 886
The separation system generates almost no air

during operation. At any discharge, the
maximum volume of air produced is the same as
the bowl volume (see technical datal.
•
48 1810951-02
4.7 Sludge Piping
• Specification
• The sludge pipe from the separator to the
sludge tank should be vertical.
If a vertical pipe is not possible, the deviation (A)
from the vertical line must not exceed 30°.
::'>-
<-.>, <-",-
..•..• ~~~:c;;;
• • The sludge pipe must not extend below the

tank top.
[MOTE]
An extended sludge pipe will obstruct ventilation and
create back pressure that could cause separator
problems.
•
1810951-02 49
If more than one separator is connected to the

same sludge tank, a butterfly valve should be
installed in each sludge pipe.
[NOTE]
•
If a butterfly valve is not used, the bowl and the
operating system may be affected.
• If a butterfly valve is used, it should be

equipped with an interlocking switch
(connected to the separator starter) to prevent
the separator from being started when the
valve is not fully open.
50 1810951-02
•
5 COMMISSIONING AND INITIAL START SA 851/856/861/866 SEPARATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE
5 Commissioning and Initial Start

5.1 Completion Check List
It is essential before starting up the separation
system that all units are in good operating
•
condition and that all pipelines and control
equipment are properly connected to assure
correct operation.
Use this check list as a guide for completing the
system installation:
Breakdown hazard
Check that the power frequency is in agreement with
the machine plate. If incorrect, resulting overspeed
may cause breakdown.
1 Check that transport seals are removed from

all pipes.
2 Use flushing filters to prevent pipe work debris
from being pumped into the separation
system.
[NOTE]
•
The flushing filters must be removed after initial
flushing.
3 Check that all separators are in proper

working condition. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
4 Make sure that separators are lubricated in
accordance with instructions.
[NOTE]
Make sure that the spindle bearings are prelubricated
5 Separators are delivered without oil in the oil

sump. For information on oil filling and oil type,
see the Service Manual booklet.
52 1810951-02
•
SA 851/856/861/866 SEPARATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 5 COMMISSIONING AND INITIAL START
[tlO"fE]
• Too much, or too little oil may result in damage to

separator bearings.
Neglecting an oil change may result in damage to
separator bearings.
6 Power on.
7 With the mode selector switch in the CIP
postion. check that the separator rotation
direction corresponds with the arrow on the
frame by doing a quick start/stop (1-2
seconds.) and looking at the motor fan
rotation.
If power cables have been installed incorrectly, the

parts can unscrew.
• 8
9
Check the pump function and direction.
If a Sludge Removal Kit is used. check that the
sludge pump speed is set to circa
60 strokes/min. If necessary, adjust the
throttling valve (positioned after solenoid valve
SV 6).
•
1810951-02 53
5.2 Initial Start-up

Use this check list for initial system start up:
1
2
Check that there is oil in the feed oil tank.
Check water and air supply. See "System
Data" on page 2.
•
3 Check power supplies to the control unit and
that the voltage is in accordance with data in
"System Data" on page 2.
4 Check all parameter settings in the control
unit. See Installation Parameters in the
Parameter List booklet.
5 Check the separator.
[NOTE]
6 Always lubricate the bearings before start-up.
[NOTE]
The Control Unit is supplied with standard
8
configuration parameters. You may have to make
some changes to suit your installation.
Start the separation system as described in

the Operating Instructions booklet.
Start up step by step, checking that the
•
machine and units function properly.
9 Establish system pressures.
The delivery height pressure is the pressure in
the oil pipe work down stream from the
separation system, due to the pipe bends and
the height (head) to the cleaned oil tank. If the
cleaned oil tank is below the separation
system the delivery height pressure may be
very low. The oil paring disc pressure will have
to be greater than the delivery height pressure
for any oil to flow.
Proceed as follows:
• Ensure the valves in the oil system are in the
correct positions.
• The oil should be at separation temperature.
Cont.
•
54 1810951-02
SA 851/856/861/866 SEPARATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 5 COMMISSIONING AND INITIAL START
• The adjustment screw for the water paring
•
tube should be in the outer position. The
paring tube should be able to move freely.
• Ensure that V5 is closed.
• Fully open the back pressure regulating valve
RV4.
• The shut off valve V4 should be open.
• Open SV15 for 3 seconds to prime the
operating slide.
• Open SV16 for 15 seconds to close the bowl.
• Open SV10 for 1 minute to put water into the
bowl.
• Feed oil to the separator at the normal flow
rate by opening SV1.
• Note the pressure in the oil outlet PT4, both on
the pressure gauge and in the EPC50 display.
This pressure is P min.
• Gradually close the back pressure regulating
valve RV4. The pressure on PT4 will increase.
The water pressure (PT5) decreases slightly
as the paring tube moves inwards. The water
pressure will suddenly drop when oil passes
from the oil paring chamber to the water
•
paring chamber. Note the pressure of PT4
both on the pressure gauge and in the EPC50
display. This pressure is P max.
• Open RV4.
• Stop the oil feed to the separator and note the
pressure in the oil outlet. This is the delivery
height pressure P del.
• Stop the heater.
• Stop the separator.
• Stop the feed pump when the heater has
cooled.
•
1810951-02 55
5.2.1 Calculating Operating Pressure
•
• Calculate the normal back pressure level
during operation as follows:
Pm;n + P max
- - - - - = P normal
2
• Calculate the value for low pressure alarm

setting (Pr 11) as follows:
Pmin + Pnormal
- - - - - - = Plow press.
2
• Calculate the value for high pressure alarm

setting (Pr 10) as follows:
Pnormal + Pmax
2 = P high press.
Adjust the back pressure to P normal

Set Pr 11 to give alarm at pressure decreasing
below the Plow press. value.
Set Pr 10 to give alarm at pressure increasing
above the P hlgh press. value.
•
56 1810951-02
•
SA 851185618611866 SEPARATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 6 SHUT-DOWN AND STORAGE
6 Shut-down and Storage
• Storage before Installation

If the separation system is stored before
installation, the following safeguards must be
taken:
Storage period 1 -6 months > 6 months See

-- --
Action
--- - - --
Protect from dust, dirt, x x This chapter
water, etc.
-_. - - --- -
Protect with anti-rust x x This chapter
oil
- - - -
Inspection x x On commissioning
-- - - -
Overhaul x On commissioning
6.1 Shut·down after Use
•
Ifthe separation system is going to be shut down
for a period of time, the following safeguards
must be taken:
Shut·down 1 -6 months 6-18 > 18 See

period months months
(stand-by)
- - -- -
Action
- -- - - _.-
._~~
Remove bowl x x x Dismantling and

Assembly in the
Service Manual
--
Protect from dust, dirt, x x x This chapter
water, etc.
1- --
Protect with anti-rust x x x This chapter
oil
- - -
Inspection x x x On new start-up
Overhaul x On new start-up
•
1610951-02 57
6 SHUT-DOWN AND STORAG E SA 851/856/861/866 SEPARATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE
6.2 Protection and Storage

All system equipment, both the separator and
the ancillary equipment, must be stored indoors
at 5 - 55°C, if not delivered in water-resistant
box for outdoor storage.
•
If there is a risk for condensation of water, the
equipment must be protected by ventilation and
heating above dew point.
The following protection products are
recommended:
• Anti-rust oil (Dinitrol 112 or equivalent) with
long lasting effective treatment for external
surfaces. The oil should prevent corrosion
attacks and give a waxy surface.
• Anti-rust oil (Dinitrol 40 or equivalent) thin and
lubricating for inside protection. It gives a
lubricating transparent oil film.
• Solvent, e.g. white spirit, to remove the anti-
rust oil after the shut-down.
•
•
Moist remover to be packed together with
separator equipment.
If the storage time exceeds 12 months, the
equipment must be inspected every 6 months
and, if necessary, the protection be renewed.
•
Rubber Parts
• Gaskets. O-rings and other rubber parts
should not be stored for more than two years.
After this time, they should be replaced.
Separator
Dismantle the separator bowl and take out the
O-rings. Clean the bowl with oil and reassemble
without the O-rings. Place in a plastic bag with
silica dessicant bags and seal the plastic bag.
Grease the spindle.
•
58 1810951-02
SA 851/856/861/866 SEPARATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 6 SHUT-DOWN AND STORAGE
Valves, Pipes and Similar Equipment
•
• Components such as valves need to be
cleaned with solvent and treated with anti-rust
oil (type 112).
• Water pipes should be drained and treated
with anti-rust oil (type 112).
• Articles made of rubber or plastics (e.g. seals)
must not be treated with anti-rust oil.
6.3 Reassembly and

Start up
• Clean away the anti-rust oil with white spirit.
• Remove all silica gel bags.
• Pre-Iubricate the separator spindle bearings
• If stored for 6 months or longer, perform an
inspection service (including change of oil in
the separator sump).
• Follow all relevant instructions in the Service
• Manual and Operating Instructions.
Always lubricate the separator bearings before start-

up.
• 1810951-02 59
•
Pmnllct Nn AAl:>04-0.'l-O?1? R. AAl:>1l4-O?-O:>1?

•
Published By:
Alia Laval Tumba AB
SE-147 80 Tumba. Sweden
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00
Telefax:+46 8 530 310 40
o Alfa Laval Tumba AB 23 August 2006

This pUblication or any part there of may not be
reproduced or transmitted by any process or
means without prior written permission of
AlIa Laval Tumba AB. •
2
Contents
• 1
2
Read This First
Safety Instructions
.
.9
2.1 Warning signs in text 14
2.2 Environmental issues 15
2.3 Requirements of personnel ........................•........ 16
3 Basic Principles Of Separation 17

3.1 Separation By Gravity 17
3.2 Centrifugal Separation 18
3.3 Temperatures . 18
4 Design 19
4.1 Overview........................... . 20
4.2 The Drive Section 21
4.3 The Process Section 22
4.4 Sensors 26
4.5 Separating Function.... . 27
4.5.1 The liquid balance in the bowl 27
•
4.5.3 Discharge of sludge and water 28
4.5.4 ALCAP™ concept. 28
5 Operating Instructions 31
5.1 Before First Start.up 31
5.2 Start After Service 32
5.3 Before Normal Start 32
5.4 Start 33
5.5 Operating 36
5.5.1 Sludge discharge during operation 37
5.6 Stop 39
5.7 Emergency Stop 41
6 Service, Dismantling, Assembly 43

6.1 Periodic Maintenance 43
6.1.1 Maintenance intervals 43
6.1.2 Maintenance procedures 43
6.1.3 Tightening of screws 44
6.1.4 Service kits 44
6.1.5 Cleaning : 44
6.2 Maintenance Log 45
6.3 Dismantling 48
• 6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.5
6A
Introduction
Tools
Driving device
Actions Before Assembly
578704-02
48
48
64
83
6.4.1 Cleaning 83
•
6.4.2 Inspection for corrosion 85
6.4.3 Inspection for cracks 86
6.4.7 How to lubricate bowl parts with slide laquer 90
6.4.8 Check for galling on operating slide and bowl body 91
6.5 Assembly 92
6.5.1 Centrifugal clutch 92
6.5.6 Speed sensorr 131
6.6 Actions After Assembly 132
6.6.1 Control of machine plates and safety labels 132
6.7 Oil Change 134
6.7.2 Check oil level 135
6.7.3 Oil change procedure 135
6.8 Lifting instructions 142
6.8.1 Lifting the separator. 142
7 Fault Finding 145

7.1 Mechanical Functions 145
7.1.1 Separator vibration 145
7.1.2 Smell 146
7.1.3 Noise 146
7.1.4 Speed too low 146
7.1.5
7.1.6
7.1.7
7.1.8
7.2
Speed too high
Starting power too high
Starting power too low
Starting time too long
Separating Functions
146
147
147
147
148
•
7.2.1 Bowl opens accidentally during operation 148
7.2.2 Bowl fails to open for sludge discharge 148
7.2.3 Unsatisfactory separation result.. 148
8 Technical Reference 151

8.1 Product description 151
8.2 Technical Data 152
8.3 Connection List 153
8.4 Interface Description 155
8.4.1 Scope 155
8.4.2 References 155
8.4.3 Definitions 156
8.4.4 Goal 156
8.4.5 Description of separator modes : 157
8.4.6 Remote start 158
8.4.7 Handling of connection interfaces 158
•
8.5 Demand Specification Water 164
8.6 Drawings 165
8.6.1 Basic size drawing 165
8.6.4 Electric motor 168
578704-02
9 Installation..... . . 171
•
9.1 Introduction 171
9.2 Upon Arrival At The Storage Area 172
9.2.1 Transport . 172
9.2.2 Protection and storage of gods
........................................................................1~
9.3 Planning of Installation....... . 174

9.3.1 Important measurements . 174
9.4 Storage at out of operation................... . 177
9.5 Before start-up 177
• 578704-02
1 READ THIS FIRST SEPARATOR MANUAL
1 Read This First
• This manual is designed for operators,

maintenance personnel and service engineers
working with the Alfa Laval S 851 & S 856
separator.
If the separator has been delivered and

installed by Alfa Laval as a part ofa
processing system, this manual should be
viewed as part ofthe System Documentation.
Study carefully all instructions in any
System Documentation.
In addition to this Separator Manual a

Spare Parts Catalogue, SPC is supplied.
The Separator Manual consists of
Safety Instructions
•
Pay special attention to the safety instructions
for the separator. Accidents causing damage to
equipment and/or serious injury to persons or
personnel can result if the safety instructions
are not followed.
Basic Principles of Separation

This chapter describes the purpose of separation
and separation principles.
Design and function

This chapter contains a description of the
separator.
This chapter contains operating instructions for
the separator only.
• 7 578704-02
1 READ THIS FIRST
Service, Dismantling, Assembly

This chapter gives instructions for the
maintenance procedures. It also contains step-
by-step instructions for dismantling and
assembly of the separator for service and
repair.
•
Fault Finding
Refer to this chapter if the separator functions
abnormally.
Ifthe separator has been installed as a part of a
processing system, always refer to the trouble-
tracing instructions, in the System
Documentation.
Technical Reference
This chapter contains technical data
concerning the separator and drawings.
Installation
This chapter contains specifications and
recommendations concerning separator
installation.
•
A complete reading of this manual by personnel in
contact with the machine is essential to safety.
Do not allow personnel to clean, assemble, operate
or maintain the separator until they have read and
fully understood this manual.
Ensure that all personnel who operate and service
the separator are well-trained and knowledgeable
concerning the machine and the work to be carried
out.
•
8
•
The centrifuge includes parts that rotate at high
speed. This means that:
• Kinetic energy is high
• Great forces are generated
• Stopping time is long
Manufacturing tolerances are extremely fine.

Rotating parts are carefully balanced to reduce
undesired vibrations that can cause a breakdown.
Material properties have been considered
carefully during design to withstand stress and
fatigue.
The separator is designed and supplied for a

specific separation duty (type of liquid, rotational
•
speed, temperature, density etc.) and must not be
used for any other purpose.
Incorrect operation and maintenance can result in
unbalance due to build-up of sediment, reduction
of material strength, etc., that subsequently could
lead to serious damage and/or injury.
The following basic safety instructions therefore

apply:
• Use the separator only for the purpose

and parameter range specified by
Alfa Laval.
• Strictly follow the instructions for
installation, operation and maintenance.
• Ensure that personnel are competent and

have sufficient knowledge of maintenance
and operation, especially concerning
emergency stopping procedures.
• Use only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts
and the special tools supplied.
•
9
Disintegration hazards •
• When power cables are connected,
always check direction of motor rotation.
If incorrect, vital rotating parts could
unscrew.
• If excessive vibration occurs, stop

separator and keep bowl filled with
liquid during rundown.
• Wear on the large lock ring thread must

not exceed safety limit. <I>-mark on lock
•
ring must not pass opposite <I>-mark by
more than specified distance.
Inspect regularly for corrosion and

erosion damage. Inspect frequently if
11
•
process liquid is corrosive or erosive.
1
• ~.
10
• Entrapment hazards
• Make sure that rotating parts have come

to a complete standstill before starting
any dismantling work.
• To avoid accidental start, switch off and

lock power supply before starting any
dismantling work.
Assemble the machine completely

before start. All covers and guards must
be in place.
Electrical hazard
• • Follow local regulations for electrical

installation and earthing (grounding).
• To avoid accidental start, switch off and

lock power supply before starting any
dismantling work.
Crush hazards
• Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting

instructions.
Do not work under a hanging load.
•
11
Noise hazards •
• Use ear protection in noisy
environments.
Burn hazards
• Lubrication oil and various machine

surfaces can be hot and cause burns.
Skin irritation hazards

•
• When using chemical cleaning agents,
make sure you follow the general rules
and suppliers recommendation
regarding ventilation. personnel
protection etc.
• Use of lubricants in various situations.
•
12
• Cut hazards
• Sharp edges on bowl discs and threads

can cause cuts.
Flying objects
• Risk for accidental release of snap rings

and springs when dismantling and
assembly.
• Health hazard
• Risk for unhealthy dust when handling
e
friction blocks/pads. Use a dust mask to
make sure not to inhale any dust. I. ~\
I\. " I/
~~!
•
13
2.1 Warning signs in text

Pay attention to the safety instructions in this
manual. Below are definitions of the three grades
•
of waming signs used in the text where there is a
risk for injury to personnel.
DANGER indicates an imminently

hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING indicates a potentially

could result in death or serious injury.
•
CAUTION indicates a potentially

may result in minor or moderate injury.
[M01'£J
NOTE indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result
in property damage. •
14
• 2.2
Unpacking
Environmental issues
Packing material consists of wood, plastics,

cardboard boxes and in some cases metal straps.
Wood and cardboard boxes can be reused,
recycled or used for energy recovery.
Plastics should be recycled or burnt at a licensed
waste incineration plant.
Metal straps should be sent for material recycling.
Maintenance
During maintenance oil and wear parts in the
machine are replaced.
Oil must be taken care of in agreement with local
•
regulations.
Rubber and plastics should be burnt at a licensed
waste incineration plant. If not available they
should be disposed to a suitable licensed land fill
site.
Bearings and other metal parts should be sent to
a licensed handler for material recycling.
Seal rings and friction linings should be disposed
to a licensed land fill site. Check your local
regulations.
Worn out or defected electronic parts should be
sent to a licensed handler for material recycling.
•
15
Requirements of
personnel
Only skilled or instructed persons are allowed to
•
operate the machine, e.g. operating and
maintenance staff.
• Skilled person: A person with technical
knowledge or sufficient experience to enable
him or her to perceive risks and to avoid
hazards which electricity/mechanics can
create.
Instructed person: A person adequately
advised or supervised by a skilled person to
enable him or her to perceive risks and to
avoid hazards which electricity/mechanics
can create.
In some cases special skilled personnel may
need to be hired, like electricians and others. In
some of these cases the personnel has to be
•
certified according to local regulations with
experience of similar types of work.
•
3 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF SEPARATION SEPARATOR MANUAL
3 Basic Principles Of Separation
• The purpose of separation can be to
• free a liquid of solid particles,

• separate two mutually insoluble liquids
with different densities while removing
any solids present at the same time,
• separate and concentrate solid particles
from a liquid.
3.1 Separation By Gravity

A liquid mixture in a stationary bowl will clear
slowly as the heavy particles in the liquid
mixture sink to the bottom under the infl uence
of gravity.
A lighter liquid rises while a heavier liquid and
solids sink.
• Continuous separation and sedimentation can be

achieved in a settling tank having outlets
arranged according to the difference in density of
the liquids.
Heavier particles in the liquid mixture will settle Gravity
and form a sediment layer on the tank bottom.
Sediment layer of
heavier particles
• 17 578704-02
3.2 CENTRIFUGAL SEPARATION 3 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF SEPARATION
3.2 Centrifugal Separation

In a rapidly rotating bowl, the force of gravity
is replaced by centrifugal force, which is many
times greater.
Separation and sedimentation is continuous
•
and takes place very quickly.
The centrifugal force in the separator bowl can
achieve in a few seconds that which takes many
hours in a tank under influence of gravity.
The separation efficiency is influenced by
changes in the oil viscosity, separating
temperatures and in throughput. , I
Centrifugal force
3.3 Temperatures
For some types ofprocess liquids (e.g.
mineral oils) a high separating temperature
will normally increase the separation
•
capacity. The temperature influences oil
viscosity and density and should be kept
constant throughout the separation.
Viscosity Density difference

Viscosity is a fluids resistance against movement. Density is mass per volume unit. The greater the density
Low Viscosity facilitates separation. Viscosity can be difference between the two liquids, the easier the
reduced by heating. separation. The density difference can be increased by
heating.
Low density difference
"
tJ
t>
e High density difference.
High viscosity Low viscosity
•
18
4 Design
•
Process section
The feed inlet and outletN - - - - - - - - - ,
Electric motor
are situated at the top of I /
the separator, I The rotating bowl is driven
by the electric motor via a
The liquid is cleaned in the I I r , belt transmission,
rotating separator bowl
inside the frame hood, 1 1 ~~
I'~d(' '- - - "~I~~

1~~r" err I !, I
I
"<:::'''.-=--=--
~---------
'" .~,c~_./
11
1\\ Jll!
!
I1
11
!;' I
i~ I
Sensors - - - -r---=-, - - ~ IL I 1I ! "'
~I
r - - './' i I!J ' Drive section
-~. i] ',' )' / '
U' ' -
I I
The separator is monitored
by a speed sensor. An t:: _''::--'-1 /9 \['
1 I
fr / The rotating separator
unbalance sensor and a
interlocking switch i s , .1 'o-r" i.n
T'I ,:"~,- ,h,:;-6z:::.;('T\ll-.---- ,.;:..::.-:::---~
i'l' 1,.1"------11 '.
11 ~ ,I ,I "--'1. "'
1belt transmission With
- , bowl IS dnvenby a Ilat
•
'1
optional. I '1 11' III fnctlon coupling,

" ill d, 'i11 VII"
1,,11 1 ~'---
'f..---' I
.! ' I1 Ii !! "11\ 1,1
~ I ! IhilTl'".
: ' , L :::' • ..J,J[, Ill.
I
\'ill----=--.-r-- - - - - "'
\1 II\["/I'\!J ~
-" "
,.~_ /~
'--- "14.'
-I,
......,..:::=-:=-,-
I '\..).1 ..
\! -------====--
~
--
Sludge oultet
Frame feet
L .J Separated solids are discharged at
The separator rests preset intervals.
on vibration damping LUbrication system
frame feet.
Lubricates the bearings driven
by the flat belt transmission
•
19
4.1 OVERVIEW 4 DESIGN
4.1 Overview
The separator comprises a process section and
a drive section powered by an electric motor.
The separator frame comprises a lower body
and a frame hood. The motor is attached to the
•
frame. The frame feet dampen vibration.
The bottom part of the separator contains a flat
belt transmission, a centrifugal clutch and a
vertical spindle. The lower body also contains
an oil bath for lubrication of spindle bearings.
The frame hood contains the processing parts
of the separator; the inlets, outlets and piping.
The process liquid is cleaned in the separator
bowl. The bowl is fitted on the upper part of a
vertical spindle and rotates at high speed
inside the frame hood. The bowl also contains
the discharge mechanism which empties the
sludge during operation.
A speed sensor, and the optional unbalance
sensor and lock switch, are parts of the
equipment for monitoring the separator
functions.
.1
•
20
4 DESIGN 4.2 THE DRIVE SECTION
4.2 The Drive Section
• The separator bowl is driven by an electric

motor via a belt transmission. The belt
pulley on the motor shaft includes a
centrifugal clutch.
Flat belt
The flat belt transmission has a
ratio which increases the bowl
speed several times compared
with the motor speed.
•
To reduce bearing wear and the
transmission of bowl vibrations to The centrifugal clutch with friction
the frame and foundation. the top pads ensures a gentle start and
bearing of the bowl spindle is smooth acceleration, and at the
mounted in a spring dampened same time prevents overloading of
bearing seat. the belt and motor.
The bearings on the spindle are
lubricated by the oil spray produced
by an oil pump mounted on the
lower end of the spindle.
•
21
4.3 THE PROCESS SECTION 4 DESIGN
4.3 The Process Section

The separation process takes place inside
the rotating separator bowl. The feed and
outlet ofprocess liquid takes place in the in
and outlet unit on top of the separator
•
frame hood.
Inlet and outlet

The inlet and outlet unit consists ofthe
following parts:
A connection house for pipe connections.
A pipe with a paring disc and a paring tube is
located inside the connection house. The pipe
has channels for incoming and outgoing process
liquid.
The paring disc and paring tube pump the
cleaned oil and water respectively out of the
bowl.
•
The paring tube can move radially. During
separation it surfs on the liquid surface. It is
balanced by a spring.
Under certain operating conditions, the paring
tube radial position can be locked in place by
two adjustable screws on the connection house.
The paring disc and tube are located inside and
at the top ofthe separator bowl.
The inlet and outlet device is held together
against the frame hood by a nut on the end of
the inlet pipe.
Height adjusting rings determine the height
position of the paring disc and paring tube
relative to the bowl.
•
22
4 DESIGN 4.3 THE PROCESS SECTION
• Pipe
/spring
Uncleaned oil
M---~
Cleaned oil
1+----+
Waler
0===-+
Arm
Paring tube
Paring disc
Connection house
•
23
4.3 THE PROCESS SECTION 4 DESIGN
Separator bowl
The separator bowl, with its sludge discharge
mechanism, is built-up as follows:
The bowl body and bowl hood are held together
by a lock ring (Centrilock). Inside the bowl are
the distributor and the disc stack. The disc
•
stack is kept compressed by the bowl hood. The
discharge slide forms a separate bottom in the
bowl body.
The upper space between the bowl hood and the
top disc forms the water paring chamber and
contains the paring tube, which pumps the
separated water out ofthe bowl. The oil paring
chamber, with its paring disc, is located inside
the top of the distributor. From here the
cleaned oil is pumped out of the bowl.
The sludge space is in the bowl periphery. The
bowl is kept closed by the discharge slide,
which seals against a seal ring in the bowl
hood.
•
At fixed intervals, decided by the operator, the
discharge slide drops down to empty the bowl of
sludge.
The sludge discharge mechanism, which
controls the movement of the discharge slide, is
comprised of an operating slide and an
operating water device. Passive parts are:
nozzle and valve plugs. The operating water
cover, beneath the bowl, supplies operating
water to the discharge mechanism via the
operating water ring.
24
4 DESIGN 4.3 THE PROCESS SECTION
Water paring chamber

Bowl hood
•
Top disc
Oil paring chamber
Bowl body
Disc stack
Lock ring
Seal ring
Discharge
slide
Operating slide
Nozzle
Operating water ring
•
25
4.4 SENSORS 4 DESIGN
4.4 Sensors
The separator is equipped with a speed
sensor. As options, an unbalance sensor and
an interlocking kit can be fitted.
•
Speed sensor Monitoring kit (optional)
A speed sensor indicates the speed of the separator. The For indication of any abnormal unbalance, the separator can
correct speed Is needed to achieve the best separating be equipped with a sensor monitoring the radial position of
results and for reasons of safety. Refer to type plate for speed the bowl spindle.
particulars.
Cover interlocking kit (optional)
When the cover is closed the interlocking circuit in the control
system is closed which makes it possible to start the
separator.
Cover Interlocking switch
Unbalance sensor
•
Speed sensor
•
26
- -,
4 DESIGN 4.5 SEPARATING FUNCTION
4.5 Separating Function
• The separator separates water and solids

from the uncleaned oil. Water normally
leaves the separator through the water
outlet. During sludge discharge, solids
(sludge) and water are removed through the
discharge ports.
4.5.1 The liquid balance in the bowl

The liquid levels in the bowl depend on many
factors (bowl geometry, liquid densities, flow
rates etc.). To get a picture of how the liquids
are distributed in the bowl, imagine that the
bowl is at standstill and turned 90° (only
influenced by gravity). The bowl can now be
compared with a settling tank:
SEPARATOR BOWL TURNED 90'
• [-===~f~;:;~~ii+-'ie~~~~:
_
Unseparated oil
Separated oil
----.... Water
G
R
/ Top disc
A Distributor
V Oil/waler interface
I
T
Y I'F::::==\==:;:;;;:;:=::::;;:;:;;~'-Unseparated oil
~ Separated oil
__ Water
• SETTLING TANK
27
4 DESIGN SEPARATOR MANUAL
4.5.2 Liquid flow 4.5.4 ALCApTM concept

Unseparated oil is fed into the bowl through When the sludge space is filled up and water
the inlet pipe and travels via the distributor enters the disc stack, traces of water will •
towards the periphery of the bowl. escape with the cleaned oil. The increase of
When the oil reaches slots in the distributor, it water content in the cleaned oil is the sign of
rises through the channels formed by the disc reduced separation efficiency.
stack, where it is evenly distributed. This condition is monitored by the process
The oil is continuously cleaned as it travels control system, and water is removed from the
towards the centre of the bowl. When the bowl when minimal levels are recorded.
cleaned oil leaves the disc stack, it flows
through a number of holes in the distributor
and enters the oil paring chamber. From here it
is pumped by the oil paring disc, and leaves the
bowl through the oil outlet. Separated water,
sludge and solid particles, which are heavier
than the oil, are forced towards the periphery
of the bowl and collect in the sludge space.
The space between the bowl hood and top disc,
as well as the water paring chamber, is filled
with oil, which is distributed over the entire
circumference via the grooves in the top disc.
During normal operation, the water drain
valve in the water outlet is closed.
4.5.3 Discharge of sludge and water

•
As the sludge space fills up and water enters
the disc stack, traces of water will escape with
the cleaned oil. The increase of water content
in the cleaned oil is the sign of reduced
separation efficiency.
This condition is monitored by the process
control system, and water is removed from the
bowl when minimal levels are recorded.
The water is removed by either of two ways:
• The water drain valve opens and the water
leaves the bowl through the water outlet.
• Through the sludge ports at sludge
discharge.
Which way is decided by the process control
•
system.
28 578704-02
4 DESIGN 4.5 SEPARATING FUNCTION
• DISCHARGE OF WATER THROUGH WATER OUTLET
;:;..~.'I~~~'"='~' ~ Unseparated oil

Bowl hood -:-:
~;;;;;;;;;;;;~ Separated oil
Oil paring disc Water
Water paring tube

Water paring chamber
Oil paring chamber
Holes in distributor
1-"---Top disc
• Sludge
space
~.ll
h~~lr~
~=]f~
L--\=\r===--~-]J
Oil/water interface
Uncleaned oil
Cleaned oil
. . Water
•
29
5 Operating Instructions
•
These operating instructions describe
routine procedures to follow before and
during the start, running and stopping
sequences of the separator.
If system documentation is available,

always follow the operating instructions
therein. If there is no system
documentation, the instructions below are
to be followed.
5.1 Before First Start·up

Technical demands for connections and
limitations for the separator are listed in
•
chapter 8 Technical Reference, page 151:
• Technical data
• Connection list
• Interface description
• Basic size drawing
• Foundation drawing.
Before first start:
• Ensure the machine is installed and
assembled correctly and that feed lines and
drains have been flushed clean.
• Fill oil in the oil sump. See 6.7 Oil Change,
page 134.Quality of oil see 6.7.6
Lubricating oils, page 141.
• Make sure that the bearings on the spindle
are pre-lubricated.
• Check the direction of rotation by doing a
quick start/stop. The motor fan should
•
rotate clockwise.
31
5.2 START AFTER SERVICE 5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
5.2 Start After Service

Pay special attention to any unusual sounds or
vibrations when starting the separator after a
service. Different fault symptoms are listed in
chapter 7 Fault Fincling, page 145.
•
5.3 Before Normal Start
To achieve the best separation results, the
bowl should be in a clean condition.
1 Check...
~ ... that all couplings and connections are

securely tightened to prevent leakages.
Leaking hot liquid can cause burns.
... that the lock nut is fully tightened.

Do not forget the washer.
•
... the direction of rotation by doing a quick
starVstop. The motor fan should rotate
clockwise.
... that all frame hood bolts

as well as the clutch cover
are fully tightened
... the oil level and top up if

necessary. The separator should be level and at
standstill when oil is filled.
•
32
5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 5.4 START
5.4 Start
• 1 Start of separator,
a Open the water

supply valve,
b Start the separator by pushing

the start button at the starter
unit.
• 2 Check the separator for vibration,
Normal vibration
Vibration may occur during start
up when passing critical speed.
Excessive vibration This is normal and should pass
If vibration increases, or without danger.
continues at full speed, keep
bowl filled and stop the
separator.
The cause of the vibration must
be determined and corrected
before starting again!
Excessive vibration may be due
to incorrect assembly or
insufficient cleaning of the bowl.
•
33
5.4 START 5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
3 Ensure that the separator is at full speed (after about 190 - 210 seconds).
•
The time by full speed can be checked by
studying the ammeter
! Current increases during

start...
...10 decrease to a stable

,\
,,
value when full speed has
::-: ... .. been reached.
4 Perform a sludge discharge.

•
a Add opening water until a
discharge sound is heard
(3,0 seconds).
b Wail 15 seconds.
c Add closing water for 15

seconds,
•
34
5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 5.4 START
• 5 Turn on the oil feed.
[NOTE]
Before turning on the feed
make sure that the oil has the
correct temperature.
•
35
5.5 OPERATING 5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
5.5 Operating
1 Checkpoints during operation: •

a Check all connections for leakage.
b Check that the feed has correct flow and

temperature.
c Check the back pressure.
d Check that the starter ammeter reading

is the normal low and steady value.
•
e Check for abnormal vibrations
and sounds.
Disintegration hazard Buming hazard

Do not discharge a vibrating separator. Lubricating oil and various machine
Vibration can increase il solidified surfaces can be hot and cause burns.
slUdge is only partially discharged.
•
·
"
o
o
36
5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 5.5 OPERATING
5.5.1 Sludge discharge during
• 1
operation
Turn off the oi I feed.
a Turn off oil feed
b Wait 5 seconds.
• 2 Perform a sludge discharge.

(3,0 seconds).
b Wait 15 seconds.

seconds.
•
37
5.5 OPERATING 5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
•
3 Turn on the oil feed.
Before turning on the feed,

make sure that the oil has the
correct temperature.
•
38
5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 5.6 STOP
5.6 Stop
• 1 Turn off the oil feed.
a Turn off oil feed
b Wait 5 seconds.
• 2 Perform a sludge discharge.

(3,0 seconds).
b Wait 15 seconds.

seconds.
•
39
5.6 STOP 5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
•
3 Fill the bowl up with water and stop the separator.
[NOTE]
Keep the bowl filled during run-down to
minimize the vibrations.
4 Wait until the separator has stopped (after about 30 minutes).
Check rotation of motor fan.

•
40
5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 5.7 EMERGENCY STOP
5.7 Emergency Stop
• 1 If the separator vibrates excessively...
... push the emergency stop button.
[NOTE]
Keep the bowl filled during run-down to
minimize the vibrations.
• 2 Evacuate the room.
Never discharge a vibrating
separator.
Entrapment hazard
Make sure that rotating parts have
Disintegration hazard come to a complete standstill before
starting any dismantling work.
•
After an emergency stop, the cause of the fault must be
identified.
If all parts have been checked and the cause not found,
contact Alfa Laval for advice before restarting the separator.
41
SEPARATOR MANUAL 6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY
6 Service, Dismantling, Assembly
• 6.1 Periodic Maintenance

Periodic (preventive) maintenance reduces
the risk of unexpected stoppages and
6.1.2 Maintenance procedures
At each Inspection and/or Overhaul, take a
copy of the maintenance log and use it to make
breakdowns. Follow the maintenance log in notes during the service.
this chapter in order to facilitate the An inspection and overhaul should be carried
periodic maintenance. out as follows:
1 Dismantle the parts as described in 6,3
6.1.1 Maintenance intervals Dismantling, page 48.
The following directions for periodic Place the separator parts on clean, soft
maintenance give a brief description of parts to surfaces such as pallets,
be cleaned, checked and renewed at different 2 Inspect and clean the dismantled separator
maintenance intervals, parts according to the maintenance log and
The maintenance log for each maintenance description in 6.4 Actions Before Assembly,
interval on page 45 gives a detailed list of page 83,
actions to be performed. 3 Fit all the parts delivered in the service kit
while assembling the separator as
described in chapter 6,5 Assembly, page
•
Insp~tion . . 92,
An Inspection consists of an overhaul of the
4 When the separator is assembled, make
separator bowl, inlet/outlet and operating
final checks described in 6,6 Actions After
water device every 6 months or 4000 operating
Assembly, page 132,
hours.
Seals in bowl and gaskets in inlet/outlet device
are renewed.
Overhaul~ Disintegration Hazards

Separator parts that are either missing, worn
An Overhaul consists of an overhaul ofthe beyond their safe limits or incorrectly assembled,
complete separator (including separator bowl, may cause severe damage or fatal injury.
inlet/outlet and operating device) every 18
months or 12000 operating hours. Seals,
bearings, friction blocks and flat belt in the
separator are renewed.
Oil change Bum and Corrode Hazards

Escaping hot and/or corroding process material,
The oil should be changed every 4000 hours, or
which can be hazardous, may still remain in the
at least once every year if the total number of separator after stop.
•
operating hours is less than 4000 hours Iyear.
578704-02 43
6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY SEPARATOR MANUAL
The use of service symbols in the 6.1.4 Service kits

dismantling/assembly instructions
A Commissioning kit is included in the delivery
Parts that have to be renewed from the service
which contain various O-rings that might •
kits (see below) are marked lit and/or ~ in
needs to be changed when assembly for the
the assembly instructions,
first time.
Special service kits are available for Inspection
Example: and Overhaul.
a Fit the G-ring lit . For other services, a Support kit is available.
When dismantling and assembling between Spare parts not included in the Support kit
the service periods, some procedures do not have to be ordered separately.
have to be carried out. These procedures are
Note that the parts for Inspection are included
marked lit and/or ~ .
in the Overhaul kit.
Example:
The contents of the kits are described in the
5 Renew the valve plugs on the operating Spare Parts Catalogue.
slide lit '
All symbols used in the instructions refer to
activities mentioned in the maintenance logs. Always use Alfa Laval genuine parts as otherwise
the warranty may become invalid.
Alia Lavaltakes no responsibility for the safe
6.1.3 Tightening of screws operation of the equipment if non-genuine spare
parts are used.
•
Tightening all screws with the correct torque
value is important.
These figures apply unless otherwise stated:
Torque
Metric Stainless steel Carbon steel
Use of imitation spare parts may cause severe
thread
Nm kpm Ib.1t Nm kpm Ib.1t damage.
M4 1,7 0,17 1,2 2,25 0,25 1,8

6.1.5 Cleaning
M5 3,4 0,34 2,5 4,9 0,49 3,6
CIP (Cleaning In Place)
M6 7 0,7 5 8 0,8 5,9
To prolong the intervals between manual
M8 17 1,7 13 20 2 14,7 cleaning of the separator the use of CIP
together with repeated discharges can be used.
M10 33 3,4 24 39 3,9 28,7
Some CIP liquids can be corrosive to brass- and
M12 57 5,8 42 68 6,9 50 aluminium alloy parts which are included in
the separator.
M16 140 14 100 155 15,8 114
M20 270 28 200 325 33 239
•
M24 470 48 340 570 58 420
Use only Alfa Laval recommended CIP liquids.
The figures apply to lubricated screws
tightened with a torque wrench.
44 578704-02
6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY 6.2 MAINTENANCE LOG
6.2 Maintenance Log
• Name of ship/plant:
Separator: S 851 & S 856

Local identification:
Manufacture NoJYear:
Total running hours: Product No.: 881204-03-0212 & 881204-02-0212
Date: Signature:
C
0 ';
;:
U
Gl
Cl.
"..
.c
Gl
.lli
U
Gl
CIl > .c
.5 0 U
Part
in and outlet device
• ~ Action Page Note
- All parts x x Clean 83

-- --_. ----- -_.- ... -.:;~" .. ~._- -- ..-
:~ni!rts- ~-=_ = x x Che"!'forcorrosion _ __ ~=~" G ~ '85 , ~ __. _ , _
- All parts x x Check for cracks 86
- 1=:.,...,-::-"'"-.,----- -- .' - - - - ---- '
'Co~~.;ctjrig h';';-~ing X". X ,. Checldorerosiondamages, 87
X X
-
, Ren~W O~rings for hoses
~------ ~ --:::..~~;::...- •." - - -1- ----'---·~'-'-~---I
•
- Frame hood X X RenewO-nng 125
X Control measure of paring disc height 126
X Check height adjusting rings 126
X Renew the spring 127
Bowl
- All parts x x Clean 83
,All parts x x -.- ChEicl\-fur~;;~"'sion - --- - ..- .- --as- --
-_. -- - ----'.=_. --'-'-~ -'- - --~'~--I
- All parts x x Check for cracks 86
-----1·---,.--·, -.....-•• --.---.--1
: All parts=·,. ---·-·----7 -x- -: the&i~"ei~siondamages' ·87 '
I~-'-:-:-~' .,,-- - . -...-.......-
' ... --= ----I-·----'--'·~~--'--I
- Bowl body x x Check for impact marks and corrosion 112
x x Renew rectangular ring 113
x x Renew O-rings 114,117
x x Renew holder screws and washers 113
- Operating slide,. x x Renew rectangular ring . 113
.. x; 'Reh"",v,~lvef'lugs .' If:;;':. 112
...• ..,., ....d...._•••... ~.--'--_.. ••.d.•...:......." ', ... _ _ 1'--__........_.0:,·•.. '''- 1
. Discharge slide x x Renew rectangular ring 117
-In and ollllet pipe ;:;- -x"'~ R-enew'OCrings -1-2-0-
~ ~_I
•x ---
__ • ~~~~"';'~~lash
'x _'0.. ' sealing . .__ 1"-
• 120 1, \
- Paring tube x x Renew O-rings and bearings 120
1..--,.,---.,----.,...,.,·--1··-- - - --
:,122 '
• - Operating water ring x x Renew seal ring and screws

122
114
45
6.2 MAINTENANCE LOG 6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY
•
c
0
:;:: :;
...5 ..
U l'Il
Gl .c .lli
U
lL Gl Gl
> .c
0 ()
Part I:. El» Action Page Note
Frame
- Frame feet Renew frame feet (including washers 88 Has to be ordered
~-;-::-;:;; -- ------ ,,-- --

- Drain and oil filling holes x x
and screws)
~-------. .
Renew washers
_-_
.... .. _._--- _
111
separately
._-" ~-- ---~ _.-

• Oil pin x x Renew Q-ring 111
Driving device
- All parts x Clean 83
-------- ,-_ .. _---_._._-_. ---- .'- -_._--- -'--'- - - - - - - ---
- All parts x Check for corrosion 85
_.- - ,,--_.- --, - ---.-- -, ",,-- ---- -,---,-- , - - ,--.--
• All parts x Check for cracks 86
- - -- -"-'-
-_
~-"'.-
• Bottom bearing housing x Renew O-ring 99

._----------- -_.- ---- ,._-- - -- - ..
• Labyrinth ring holder x Renew labyrinth ring 100

x Renew O-ring 100
--- ---_ --_._. - - - , - - -
.. - -'--,-------
• Top bearing housing x Renew springs 103
-------------- - ... ---.- ----- -
- Flat bell x Renew flat belt 107
- , - ._- -- _._----.--- ----,"--,_.- .-- -- ._- ,-----
•
- Bowl spindle x Pre-Iubricate and renew ball bearing 102
x Pre-Iubricate and renew self-aligning
roller bearing 104
x Lubricate the spindle 112
x Measure the radial wobble
-~-- -_._-
110
- Lubricating oil orffice x Renew O-ring 105
- - - - - - - - - - .. - -_._._" -- - ,------ -----.. -----''' .•- - .',-.' --.._---_.
- Neck bearing cover x Renew O-ring 109
- , ' . ' . ' , - _.• _--,,---- -, -,-_.- - - --_. .- •... _---- - --- ----- -- ---
- Deflector ring x Renew O-ring 109
-----------I-:-c=--I--- - - ------ ---
- Water inlet pipe x Renew O-ring 110
-_..._._---_._--_._- •. -- _ ____ • _ , ... __ "'_' • , _ . _ _ .o_~ _
- Operating water cover x Renew seal ring and O-ring 110

-----, -_. -- ----
• Fan x Renew the O-ring 106
Coupling
• All parts x Clean 83
_.- -,---- -' - --- ---_.".._------ --'-_._---
_.~ ~,- - ,.'_. ---,,~, --'.'--- -
- All parts x Check for corrosion 85
.. - --- - ---- ---- - -"--
- All parts
- Coupling hub
~----'-
x
----- --,- .,-- _- Check
..
for cracks
x
---~--
.. _-----------~,--,-
Renew single row ball bearings

,,-,,-
_ 86
-
..
92
- ---,_ ..
x Renew snap rings 92
- -,--'---'~-' ---_. - - - . ---- --,---
- Friction blocks x Renew friction pads (if they are worn) 92
or clean the pads if they are dirty
•
Lubricate if nipples are filled, See sign
on motor
46
6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY 6,2 MAINTENANCE LOG
•
c
o
:;::
g .lli
..
ll.
.5
Cl
41
.c
()
Part Action Page Note
....
:;Machine plate Check attachment and legibilitY;' ,
~_::";;~ ....-_ - - I"""""'II""""I.?A,! ,."._-'--~ : __ -- ~,",;:'- 'C_ '~I""''''''c,:" .1--..-" . ' ._1 ._ _- '
- Power supply frequency x Check attachment and legibility

--,,' .. , - - -
- Lifting instructions " ",,'·I·~:.I. x', Ch""k'?'ttachm"nt;nd le~ibilitY-:-2:':",. ';>L
_",-=--',_, __' " . " ... _'. , __ ." '_C""""'I"""':'~" ....__ .. ,
- Safety labels x Check attachment and legibility 132
~N~~ Plate _ . o x' C~~k~~~~;:';e~t-~nd legibilitY>; -, ;~32= =- -.
- Representative label x Check attachment and legibility 132
•
47
6.3 DISMANTLING 6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY
6.3 Dismantling
6.3.1 Introduction
The frame hood and heavy bowl parts must
be lifted by means ofa hoist. Position the
•
hoist exactly above the bowl centre. Use a
lifting sling and lifting hooks with safety
catches.
The parts must be handled carefully. Don't

place parts directly on the floor, but on a
clean rubber mat, fibreboard or a suitable
pallet.
[M01'£J
For safety reasons, it is essential that all personnel
who work with the separator read this manual
thoroughly and completely.
Do not allow personnel to clean, assemble, operate
or maintain the separator until they have read and
fUlly understood this manual.
Ensure that all personnel who operate and service
the separator are well-trained and knowledgeable
concerning the separator and the work to be
carried out.
•
6.3.2 Tools
Special tools from the tool kit must be used
for dismantling and assembly, as well as
Standard tools (not included). The special
tools are specified in the Spare Parts Catalogue
and are illustrated at the beginning of each
dismantling section.
Entrapment hazard
To avoid accidental start, switch off and lock-out
power supply before starting any dismantling work.
Make sure that machine has come to a complete
•
(takes about 40 minutes from switch 011).
48
6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY 6.3 DISMANTLING
Standard Tools
• 3
4
5
7
9 11
8
~
1 Screwdriver
2 Torque wrench (capacity 0-200 Nm)
3 Drift (04 mm)
• 4 Dial indicator with magnetic base

5 Spanner for clutch
6 Heating equipment for bearings
7 Sliding calliper
8 Hammers (standard and soft-faced)
9 Pliers for internal snap rings
10 Pliers for external snap rings
11 T-handle with extension rod. sockets
(13.16, 17, 18, 19, 27, 30 mm)
12 Spanners (various sizes)
13 Adjustable spanner
14 Shackle
•
49
6.3.3 Frame hood

~LOCknut
~washer
I
.-------
(~
.------- Connecting
houSing
Spring
•
/' / Screw
j// Arm
ryv _
~-;I /
lillY~
1@J,'
~~, '~ Screws

[?--~.
1 Hook spanner (lock nut)
J . ;ir
/, '//
~ ;r--
Frame hood
~ARN'NG . -O-ring
I
"',.w
~ ........----- Height adjusting
Entrapment hazard ~ ........----- nngs
To avoid accidental start, switch 011 and lock-out the ~ Support ring
Make sure that machine has come to a complete

(after about 40 minutes from switch 011).
1 Removing the connecting housing.
a Remove the lock nut using the

hook spanner. [NO"fEJ
~
Remove connections before
starting dismantling.
The nut must not be b Press the pipe down to loosen

removed before the the connecting housing.
separator has stopped.
Remove the washer

c Remove the connecting housing
[NO"fEJ
Right hand thread.
•
50
• 2 Removing the spring and arm.
a Remove the spring

from the pin on the
hood.
b Remove the screw

from the arm.
c Remove the arm

together with the
spring.
\\ ,. \,
\
\
\-------=-=--~c_-___:_-c_--c_c_-,___-c_~,___-,___
d Turn the paring tube so that the frame hood can be -'I
•
removed upwards. '
.1
( NOTE]
To avoid the paring tube from being damaged

and preventing the inlet pipe from sticking to
the frame hood when lifting the hood, always
turn the paring tube towards the pipe before
lifting.
Paring tube
\.// "-'- )
~-'--'-~--'----'-----------------------
3 Removing the frame hood.
a Remove the screws holding

the frame hood. c Lift off the frame
hood.
t
b Loosen the hood

Do not place
by bending with
the hood
•
a screwdriver in upside down.
all grooves in the
hood.
51
6.3.4 Bowl
•
"""'c:::::==~=:::::~ Lock ring
Bowl hood
Paring tube
Splash sealing
Bowl disc
(without caulks)
_________ Bowl discs
•
Bowl body
Rectangular ring
1 Compressing tool (lock ring)

2 Lifting eyes
3 Spanner for nut (nut/discharge slide)
~~I!!i~~--Rectangular
4 Puller (discharge slide)
5 Lifting tool (distributor, spindle)
6 Puller (Bowl body) ~ ~ ring
7 Screw (lock ring) (MS)
~r:~~~~;;;Z:-
•
O-ring
8 Hexagon head key "~ Holder
9 Chisel (seal ring) ~Nozzle
10 Pin (distributormfting tool) 3~~CD>~:S~8"---- Operating water ring
"" ~screws
Screws & washers Seal ring
52
6 SERVICE. DISMANTLING. ASSEMBLY 6.3 DISMANTLING
• 1 Removing the lock ring
a Fit the compressing tool.
b Fit the clamps and the c Compress the disc stack by

screws to stop. aiternately tightening the inner
screws on the compressing
[II01'£J tool to a maximum of 60 Nm.
Be sure not to
cover the threaded
holes.
Screw
Clamp
co =::X=;~
;'d Fit the dismantling screws
to the bowl body and
press out the lock ring by
tightening the screws
)
successively according to
the numbering on the
• illustration (1-6). Start with

the screw nearest the iock
ring end (1).
The iock ring can be
removed when it has
passed the edge of the
groove.
,,--
e Remove the lock ring
from the groove.
[II01'£J
• ~/\~
\- f Remove the dismantling screws.
53
•
2 Removing the bowl hood.
a Remove the compressing

screws.
b Loosen the screws
on the clamp tool.
Remove the tool.
Remove the lock
ring.
[N01'EJ
t t The bowl hood must be pulled off
straight up, in order not to get stuck.
Recommendation: Take
measurements with a calliper around
the bowl, between the upper edge of
the bowl body and the bowl hood, to
check that the bowl hood is being
pulled off straight up.
[N01'EJ c Fit the compressing tool and the

puller screws.
See removing the Pull the bowl hood off by
bowl hood with screwing the screws alternately
•
optional hydraulic
tool (if purchased) (max. 1/2 turn) and gradually
on next page. increase the momentum evenly
until the bowl hood come loose.
t
d Remove the clamps
i and attach lifting eyes
to the compressing
tool and lift off the
bowl hood.
Crush hazard
The top disc can adhere to the bowl .........
hood when lifting. Be careful not to

..... _------.
accidentally drop it.
54
• 3 Removing the bowl hood using the optional hydraulic tool.
[NOTE]
First remove the lock ring
a Fit the larger stud
bolt into the in- and
outlet pipe (must rest
on the cap nut).
Hydraulic oil inlet
according to instructions a -b, b Fit the nut and the

on previous page.
washer. Make sure
that the nut is above
the pipe.
Holder with nuts +:lM
d Fit the hydraulic

piston onto the bolt.
c Fit the stud bolts into
the compressing tool
(equal length).
e Fit the holder and fasten
with nuts. Make sure that
the holder is in a level
position (the bowl hood
must be pulled off straight
•
up).
f Attach the hose from the hand pump

to the hydraulic oil inlet. [NOTE]
The bowl hood must be pulled
Ease off the bowl hood by pumping
off straight up, in order not to
the handle on the pump. get stuck.
t
9 Remove the hydraulic tool
and clamps. Fit lifting eyes
and lift off the bowl hood
using slings.
.'t] ~.}
•
C",sh hazard , .
The top disc can adhere to the bowl . ' '
___ .--~ 1'-
hood when lifting. Be careful not to .. ---
accidentally drop it. (f, r
55
•
4 Removing the seal ring.
b Turn the bowl hood upside down

and remove the seal ring by
a Place the bowl hood on a support carefully knock pieces of the seal
and tap out a piece of the seal ring ring out of the groove, using the
using a drift in the holes. special tool: chisel.
[NOTE]
It is very important not to
damage the bottom of the
groovel
Seal ring
Risk for eye injury from flying seal ring parts

or from splashing fluid
The seal ring breaks when removed from the bowl
hood and may cause trapped fluid to splash. Wear
safety goggles.
•
5 Removing the inlet/outlet pipe and top disc.
a Lift out the in- and outlet pipe together with the top disc.
Crush hazard
The distributor and disc stack can adhere to the
top disc. Separate them from the top disc so that
they do not accidentally drop.
,.,
•
56
• 6 Removing the paring tube.
a Remove the top disc from

the inlet and outlet pipe.
[NOTE]
To avoid damaging Ihe paring
IUbe, lurn illowards Ihe
cenlre of Ihe pipe.
~
Remove the splash sealing.
.."" / b
~
•
c Lift up and remove the
paring tube.
Turn the paring tube

upwards.
[NOTE]
If Ihe paring lube sllcks, use a drift
10 carefully lap il out from Ihe pipe.
Be careful nollo damage Ihe
paring lube.
•
57
6.3 DISMANTLING 6 SERVICE. DISMANTLING. ASSEMBLY
•
7 Removing the disc stack and distributor.
® a Assemble the lifting tool with the pin.

c Carefully lift off the
disc stack assembly.
8.o
~OE t
b Fit the assembled tool into the
distributor and loosen the disc stack
using a spanner or wrench.
Cut hazard
Sharp edges on the separator
discs may cause cuts
,
,
.,..'
..- .. ......'
" -'~
/
....
8 Removing the nut
a To prevent the bowl body from rotating

when removing the nut; b Use the spanner
Fit one of the clamps (see page 53) to for nut to remove
the bowl body and one of the screws the nut.
for the frame hood in the frame. Fasten
a sling between the clamp and the
screw around the bowl body.
Sling
Screw
/
\
, -----~~--
•........
".
Clamp Nut
....
...•.
58
• 9 Removing the discharge slide.
;!
i I
u 'i b Ease off the discharge slide
by turning the central screw.
[N01'£J
If discharge slide Is
difficult to remove,
tap lightly on outside
edge with a soft
faced hammer.
• t
'.~-_._-
Ring on tool
Puller rod
Discharge slide
Bowl body __-L.==::..;;.;,

"'--'~
c Lift out the discharge slide.
CnIsh hazard
The ring on the lifting tool must be pushed
down against the discharge slide,
otherwise the discharge slide may come
loose from the tool.
•
59
10 Removing the cap nut.
a Remove the cap nut

•
Left-hand threadl
/
..... . ~..........•....
/
......
.........
..,----.
•
11 Removing the bowl body
a Fit the lifting tool to the bowl body.
t t
b Raise the bowl body off the spindle taper
by turning the lifting eye clock-wise.
c Lift off the bowl body
•
60
• 12 Turn the bowl body upside down.
Cnash hazard
Support the bowl body when turning to prevent it from rolling.
•
13 Removing the holder.
Remove and discard the screws and washers.

New screws and washers are included in the
Inspection kit.
b Lift off the holder.
If the ring sticks, use two MS

screws in threaded holes to raise
the operating slide holder up and
away from the bowl body.
•
61
6.3 DISMANTLING 6 SERVICE. DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY
•
14 Removing the operating slide.
a Lift off the operating slide.
("O~EJ
If Ihe ring slicks, use two M8 screws in
Ihreaded holes 10 raise Ihe operaling
slide holder up and away from Ihe bowl
body.
15 Removing the valve plugs from the operating slide.
a Remove the valve plugs using

a drift.
'"
_____ Drift
~ju.,l
.....
•
62
• 16 Removing the operating water ring.

a Remove and discard the screws.
New screws are included in the Inspection kit.
b Lift off the ring.
\
\
[[NOTE]
If the ring sticks, use two MS
screws in threaded holes to raise
the operating slide holder up and
away from the bowl body.
\. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - '
•
63
6.3.5 Driving device
•
1 Puller (spindle pulley, 4 Lifting tool
ball bearing). (spindle assembiy)
2 Tool (bearing housing). 5 Drift (bottom bearing).
3 Cover puller 6 Sleeve (ball bearing in
(neck bearing cover). top bearing seal
7 Pin spanner (oil fan).
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ Seal ring
-~
Air deflector
Operating water cover
i V Spindle pulley
•
~~
=
= _----Fan ~.
Self-aligning roller
bearing
@::l
~~~_ _- - - Snap ring
~ Lubrication 011 orifice
Bowl spindle
~
o O-ring
011 pump
~ ~ ~Labyrinth ring holder
I O-ring
~ Ball bearing ~ Labyrinth ring
~ ~ Top bearing seat ~ Wing insert

~ . Springs
C!> O-ring
~~ Top bearing housing

I
1""=1---- Bottom bearing
~~
~
holder
Composilesprings
•
/screw
~~~ Plugs
~- Cl::>
""@
_ _- - - - O-ring
I
f:ij Strainer
64
• 1 Empty the oil sump.
Unscrew the oil plug and

empty the oil sump.
2 Removing the clutch cover.
a Remove the screws.
•
b Remove the clutch cover.
•
65
3 Loosen the flat belt, by tilting the motor.
a Loosen. but do not remove, the screws holding

the motor. Start with the two screws at the bottom.
Do not loosen more than shown in the illustration.
Motor
Separator frame
•
Nut
Screw
b Loosen the two upper screws a little bit more so

that the motor can be tilted. Do not loosen more
than shown in the illustration.
c Remove the flat belt from the motor pulley.

~Crush hazard
The motor will come off if the screws are
•
unscrewed.
•
66
• 4 Removing the operating water cover.
a Remove the screws.
b Lift off the operating water cover.
[IIO"l£J
If the cover sticks, fit two M12
screws to the threaded holes
and tighten.
',·------1";:'.1- - - - 4
• 5 Removing the neck bearing cover and deflector ring.
d Lift off the neck bearing cover

together with the deflector ring.
b Fasten the tool to

c Ease off the the cover.
cover by
tightening
the SCrew. l
• ,-
Cover ~ "',"'=O'~
Frame
67
•
6 Prepare for removal of spindle assembly.
[NOTE]
a To facilitate later removal of
plugs, loosen (do not remove)
the plugs on the bearing
housing.
\\ b Remove the screws
\[NOTE]
\ If the cover sticks, fit two M1 0
screws to the threaded holes
u and tighten.
•
"
•
68
• 7 Lifting the spindle assembly from the frame.
a Fit the lifting tool to the spindle end.
b Slowly raise and lift out the spindle

assembly.
Crush hazard
Do not rotate the spindle assembly
during lifting. The spindle assembly
may otherwise come loose from the
lifting tool.
'._4
• ~
",::::.,:..,=-'* .~~l . /
[M01'£J
Take care not to
damage the oil pump.
'------.- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1
[M01'£J
•
Protect the inside of the frame
by covering the hole.
69
•
8 Place the spindle assembly upside down on a support.
Make a support
-1
-190 mm
_J
-~-1--.L -3.0 mm
1- 170 mm I
.~-~.
free space
9 Removing the air deflector. •

ft I
Remove the screws and the air
deflector.
I
•
o
70
• 10 Removing the fan.
a Turn the spindle assembly the right way up.
b Place a spanner (or similar) on

the spindle pulley key-grip. as
holder-up.
c Fit the pin spanner and
remove the fan.
[NOTE] ~-'-,;ic'-+---- Key-grip

Left-hand threadl
• 11 Removing the bottom bearing assembly.

a Turn the spindle assembly up-side down and
remove the oil pump by using spanners.
~/
Puller tool
b Pull off the belt pUlley and the

self-aligning roller bearing using
the puller tool.
[NOTE]
Always discard a used
bearing.
~t
• I
\~-1
!
'----I
U
/~
i J
El
• Lubrication oil orifice
Compressed air
c Cover the the oil Orifice and blow compressed
air through the bottom hole of the oil pump and
slowly ease out the lubrication oil orifice.
71
12 Removing the top bearing housing.

a Turn the spindle
assembly over.
Composite
springs
b Remove the plugs
and the composite
springs
•
Plug
c Carefuliy remove the spindle
from the top bearing seat.
d Collect the [NOTE]

axial springs.
Be careful not to damage
the vibration indicator.
•
72
• 13 Removing the ball bearing.
a Remove the snap ring.
Risk for eye injury from flying snap ring

Use the correct pliers for dismantling of snap ring to
avoid accidental release.
b Fit the cap nut on the spindle to

protect the threads.
c Use the puller tool to remove the . .

top bearing seat from the spindle.
["O'f£J
Do not damage threads on
spindle.
• Take care not to damage the

vibration indicator when
separating the top bearing
seat from the spindle.
• Vibration indicator
Piece of wood to
protect the spindle
threads.
n
d Place the top bearing seat on a support to
protect the vibration indicator.
Always discard
used bearings.
Remove the bearing. Use a drift in the two

holes.
• r
73
14 Removing the labyrinth ring holder,
---- -- -,-..
•
!,
.!
.. -: " If the holder sticks, fit two screws M8
..
•
", §/
'l~; . to the threaded holes and tighten.
•
74
• 15 Removing the bottom bearing holder.
c====iC3
'" =
I a Fit the tool into the bottom bearing holder and attach the
~t, extension rod and T-handle.
T-handle
Extension rod
Socket
•
b Loosen the bottom bearing
holder by turning it counter
clockwise.
Remove it by hand.
•
c Remove the strainer.
•
75
6.3.6 Centrifugal clutch
..
,,"CO","", 137
~
~/
I
~ Snap rings
.
Ball bearings
•
i
'.'~
Belt pulley
Coupling
hub
Entrapment hazard ttc::=r~'--- Parallel pin

To avoid accidental start, switch off and lock-out I
~ffiIDU
•~
•
------- Friction blocks
Make sure that machine has come to a complete 'l.--.J ILJLj.J (3=60 Hz)
standstill before starting any dismantling work I
(takes about 40 minutes from switch 011). CS.: D~cover
<s: : >1 - Snap ring
[flO"(£]
50 Hz = 5 Friction blocks
The illustration shows 60 Hz
1 2
-C =?
•
1 Mounting /dismantling tool (centrifugal clutch).
2 Mounting /dismantling tool (ball bearing).
76
• 1 Removing the clutch cover.
a Loosen and remove the screws.

,.:~f~~./\~;-:-_·_· __·-
t~;;:
-------..
b Remove the clutch cover.
2 Loosen the flat belt, by tilting the motor.
• a Loosen, but do not remove, the screws holding

the motor. Start with the two screws at the bottom.
Do not loosen more than shown in the illustration.
Motor
Nut
Separator frame
Screw
b Loosen the two upper screws a little bit more so

that the motor can be tilted. Do not loosen more
than shown in the illustration.
• c Remove the flat belt from the motor pulley.

Crush hazard
The motor will come off if the screws are
unscrewed.
77
•
3 Removing the motor.
a Disconnect the electrical cabies.
Electrical hazard
" the cables are not disconnected during lifting procedures,
they may become damaged.
b Rt a sling to the c Tense the lifting sling to support the motor and
motor using a remove the screws. Lift the motor while supported.
.'
shackle on the upper
part.
Weight of motor with
coupling: approx.
~ .
115 kg.
Cnlsh hazard
" not supported, the motor with coupling
will drop when removing the screws.
d Lower the motor onto a suitable pallet. •

4 Removing the friction blocks.
a Remove the snap ring, cover

and friction blocks.
Inhalation hazard
When handling friction
blocks/pads wear a
mask to avoid inhalation
of dust.
Do not use compressed
air to remove dust.
Remove dust using
vacuum or a damp cloth.
60 Hz = 3 Friction blocks •
78
• 5 Checking the condition of the friction blocks ~ .
If the blocks are worn:

Fit new friction blocks.
[NOTE]
Inhalation hazard Replace all blocks, even if only one is
When handling friction worn.
blocks/pads wear a
mask to avoid inhalation
of dust, a Clean the pins of coupling hub and apply a thin
Do not use compressed
film of lUbricating paste to the pins.
air to remove dust.
Remove dust using
vacuum or a damp cloth.
[NOTE]
Make sure that there is no oil on the pads.
[NOTE]
Be sure that the pins on the back of the
• blocks project into the grooves in the

clutch hub.
b If only friction block service is to be done,

proceed to "Assembly of friction blocks" on page
95
•
79
Complete dismantling of centrifugal clutch
6 Removing the coupling from the motor.
a Remove the screw, spring washer and washer.

•
Attach a socket with extension

rod and handle to the screw.
Place a piece of wood according
to the illustration. Push the
handle to start the rotor moving,
when the handle hits the piece of
wood, the weight and movement
of the rotor loosens the screw.
Repeat until screw is loose.
~~~ Piece of wood
b Check that the brass plug is mounted

on the puller tool.
•
Fit the tool to the friction clutch.
Puller tool
c Ease off the friction coupling.
Flat areas for spanner.
Crush hazard
The centrifugal clutch is heavy and
[NOTE] can fall, causIng injury, when
See dismantling with optional

hydraulic puller tool (if purchased) on
next page,
loosened from the motor shaft.
•
80
• 7 Removing the coupling from the motor using the optional hydraulic tool.
[NO'fEJ
First remove the screw, spring washer
and washer according to instructions
a -b, on previous page.
a Fit the sleeve to Ihe

stud bolt.
b Fit the holder to the
coupling nave. e Fit nut and sleeve to the
Fit Ihe stud bolt with
sleeve to the motor stud bolt as shown.
shaft.
f Fit hydraulic cylinder as
shown.
Hydraulic oil inlet
'Ii==="==<] 1
1 =
•
11----"
Motor shaft
I'------------ill 9 Fit the plate and fasten with
screws through plate and
holder.
Coupling nave
Holder
Sleeve
e Attach the hose from the hand pump to the hydraulic oil inlet.
Ease off the friction coupling by pumping the handle on the

pump until stop.
Release pressure on the hand pump and adjust the nut on the
stud bolt.
Repeat until coupling is loose.
Crush hazard
The centrifugal clutch is heavy and can fall, causing
•
injury, when loosened from the motor shaft.
81
8 Dismantling of the coupling assembly.
•
a Remove the snap rings.
b Drive out the coupling hub.
Wooden support
Support
•
I
--..1 c Turn the coupling the other way round and
o I
drive out the ball bearings using the
mounting tool.
[NOTE]
Always discard used bearings.
82
6 SERVICE. DISMANTLING. ASSEMBLY 6.4 ACTIONS BEFORE ASSEMBLY
6.4 Actions Before
• Assembly
6.4.1 Cleaning ID ~
Clean the separator parts according to the
diagram below. Afterwards, protect all cleaned
carbon steel parts against corrosion by oiling
Part Procedure Cleaning agents
Frame and The external cleaning of the frame and motor should be Water and de-greasing agent.
motor restricted to brushing. sponging or wiping while the motor is
running or still is hot.
~~~;~l~+]
- Electrical hazard
Never wash down a separator with a direct water
stream.
Never play a water jet on the motor. Totally
•
enclosed motors can be damaged by direct hosing
to the same extent as open motors, reSUlting in
short-circuit and internal corrosion.
Clean the inside of the frame w~h a clean cloth and remove
visible particles.
•
83
6.4 ACTIONS BEFORE ASSEMBLY 6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY
•
Part Procedure Cleaning agents
Bowl Cleaning of bowl discs A chemical cleaning agent must

InleVoutlet Handle the bowl discs carefully in order to avoid damage to dissolve the deposits quickly without
the surfaces during cleaning allacking the material of the separator
parts.
1 Remove the bowl discs from the distributor and place them
individually in the cleaning agent. Fuel oil sludge mainly consists of
complex organic substances such as
2 Allow the discs to remain in the cleaning agent until the asphaltenes. The most important
deposils have been dissolved. This will normally take property of a cleaning liquid for the
between two and four hours. removal of fuel oil sludge is the ability to
3 Lastly, clean the discs with a soft brush. dissolve these asphaltenes.
----.
Cleaning of holder for operating slide, operating water
~h:f"\1f'ON
-
ring and operating slide with nozzle.
Use 10% acetic acid solution to dissolve lime deposits. The
acid should be heated to 80 ·C. Cut hazard
Clean the nozzle on the operating slide using a soft iron wire Sharp edges on the separator
or a similar object. discs may cause cuts.
Driving device Use a sponge or a soft brush and clean the oil orrfice, bearing While spirit, cleaning-grade kerosene
holder and oil pump thoroughly. or diesel oil.
Centrifugal Use a sponge or a soft brush. While spirit, cleaning-grade kerosene
•
clutch or diesel oil.
Bell pUlley Use a a steel brush. Solvent
•
84
6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY 6.4 ACTIONS BEFORE ASSEMBLY
6.4.2 Inspection for corrosion.
• m.
Inspect the separator parts for corrosion,
Evidence of corrosion attacks should be looked
for and rectified each time the separator is
dismantled,
Max.0,2mm
suspect that the depth of the corrosion damage
exceeds 0,2 mm for bowl body and bowl hood (0,5
for other parts) or if cracks have been tound, Do not
continue to use the separator until it has been
Inspected and given clearance for operation by Alia
Laval.
Material Type of corrosive Appearance Measure
•
environment
Non·stainless steel Water or dampness Rust II damage exceeds 0,5 mm, contact
and cast iron parts AlIa Lava!.
Stainless steel Chlorides or acidic Acidic solutions cause general Polish dark-coloured spots and
solutions corrosion. other corrosion marks with a fine
grain emery cloth. This may prevent
Chloride corrosion begins as small
dark spots that can be difficuR to further damage.
detect, and goes on to local damage If damage exceeds 0,5 mm (0,2 mm
such as pitting, grooves or cracks. for bowl body and bowl hood)
contact Alla Lava!.
Other metal parts "Aggressive" Possible corrosion damage can be II damage exceeds 0,5 mm, contact
environment in the form 01 pits and/or cracks. Alla Lava!.
Pits and spots forming a line may indicate cracks
beneath the surface.
All forms of cracks are a potential danger and are
totally unacceptable.
Replace any part where corrosion can be
•
suspected of affecting its strength or function.
85
6.4 ACTIONS BEFORE ASSEMBLY 6 SERVICE. DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY
6.4.3 Inspection for cracks. D

Check the separator parts for cracks. It is
particularly important to inspect for cracks in
rotating parts, and especially the pillars
between the sludge ports in the bowl wall.
•
All forms of cracks are potentially dangerous as they
reduce the strength and functional ability of
components.
Always replace a part if cracks are present.
Cracks can occur from cyclic material stresses

and corrosion. Keeping the separator and its
parts clean and free from deposits will help to
prevent corrosion attacks.
Always contact your AlIa Laval representative il you
suspect that the depth 01 the damage exceeds 0,2
mm lor bowl body and bowl hood (0,5 for olher
•
parts).
Do not continue to use the separator until it has
been inspected and given clearance for operation by
Alfa Laval.
•
86
SEPARATOR MANUAL 6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY
6.4.4 Inspection for erosion la D
•
Erosion may occur when particles
suspended in the process liquid slide along
or strike against a surface.
Erosion is characterised by:

Surfaces particularly sUbjected to erosion are:
1 Burnished traces in the
material.
2 Dents and pits having a
granular and shiny surface.
The sealing edge of the

discharge siide.
f - - - - - - Paring disc and paring tube
Bowl body and holder
Pillars between the

sludge ports In the
bowl wall
• The sealing edge of the discharge

slide for the seal ring in the bowl
hood
1 Inspect the bowl and inleVoutlet parts for 2 Replace parts if erosion is suspected,
erosion damages.
[lIafE ]
suspect that the depth of the damage exceeds 0,2 Disintegration hazard
mm for bowl body and bowl hood (0,5 for other Erosion damage weakens parts by reducing the
parts). Do not continue to use the separator until it thickness of the material.
has been inspected and cleared for operation by Pay special attention to the pillars between the
AIfa Laval. sludge porls in the bowl wall.
Replace parls if erosion is suspected of affecting
strength or function.
• 578704-02 87
6.4 ACTIONS BEFORE ASSEMBLY 6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY
6.4.5 Exchange of frame feet

The frame feet have to be changed
occasionally due to rubber deterioration
from age.
When replacing the frame feet, the separator

•
must be lifted. Follow 6.8.1 Lifting the
separator, page 142.
[NOTE]
Discard the old frame feel, screws and washers.
a Loosen the bolts and prepare to remove

the separator frame
t
b Lift the separator, See "Lifting the separator" on
page 142.
c Remove the existing frame feet.

•
d Fit the new feet, screws and washers. Tightening
torque: 160 Nm.
e Place the separator in its original position and

fasten the mounting bolts.
•
88
6 SERVICE. DISMANTLING. ASSEMBLY 6.4 ACTIONS BEFORE ASSEMBLY
6.4.6 LUbrication of bowl parts
• a Apply a thin layer of Molykote 1000. or equivalent

lubrication. on all the following contact surfaces. Apply
0321 on the operating slide and the bowl body. guide pin
and bowl hood.
o = Molykote 1000
o = D321R + Molykote 1000
Bowl hood
(apply 0321)
• Bowl body
(also apply 0321 on guide pin)
Discharge slide
Operating slide
\ \
\
(apply 0321)
Screw
Holder
• Operating water ring

~
Nut
89
6.4 ACTIONS BEFORE ASSEMBLY 6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING. ASSEMBLY
6.4.7 How to lubricate bowl parts

with slide laquer
1
•
[MarE]
This Instruction Is also valid for
the operating slide and the holder.
•
a Carefully clean the contact surfaces (1) on bowl body
and bowl hood.
b Apply Molykote 0321 R on surfaces.
c Air-cure for 15 minutes.
d Use a smooth fibre brush to polish to an even and

homogenous contact film.
e Apply a second layer slide laquer.
f Air-cure for 15 minutes.
9 Polish the film to a shiny surface, the film should look

like well-polished leather when properly done.
h Rnish the treatment by lubricating the contact surfaces

with Alfa Laval lubricating paste or Molykote 1000
paste. Use a well cleaned brush and rub it into the
surface, do not leave any excessive paste.
•
90
6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY 6.4 ACTIONS BEFORE ASSEMBLY
6.4.8 Check for galling on operating
• slide and bowl body
~---
If any friction marks are found on the guide surfaces (1) \V

of operating slide and bowl body, proceed as follows:
a Clean the surface thoroughly with a degreasing

agent, i.e. white spirit.
This is important!
[NOTE]
b Using an emery cloth (e.g. No. 320) to smooth the To avoid the risk of galling, the
metal edges. guiding surface of the operating
slide should be primed with a slide
lacquer at every inspection
•
c Finish by polishing the damaged spots with polishing service.
paper (e.g No. 600).
d Apply Molykote D321R on surfaces.
e Air-cure for 15 minutes.
f Polish to an even, homogenous surface.
9 Apply a second layer.
h Air-cure for 15 minutes.
Polish to a shiny surface, the surface should look like

well-polished leather when properly done.
j Finish the treatment by lubricating the guiding surfaces

with Alfa Laval lubricating paste or Molykote 1000
paste. Use a well cleaned brush. Rub it into the
surface, do not leave any excessive paste.
•
91
6.5 ASSEMBLY 6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY
6.5 Assembly
6.5.1 Centrifugal clutch
1 Assembly of the coupling.

•
a Slip the belt pUlley over the coupling hub and place them on a firm and level
foundation.
Disintegration Hazard
If the belt pulley must be renewed, check that the new pulley has the
correct diameter, An incorrect pulley will cause the separator bowl to
run at either an excessive or insufficient speed.
d=253,5 mm 50 Hz
d=211 mm 60 Hz [NOTE]
Remove rustlrom the
belt pUlley using a steel
brush.
•
b Apply a thin film of oil onto the
external and internal surfaces of the
ball bearings ~ .
Mounting tool
c Press the ball bearings down one at a time into the coupling
hUb, preferably using a hydraulic press. Place the spacing
ring between them.
Never re-fit used ball bearings.

The ball bearings must not be heated as they are
packed with grease and sealed with plastic
membranes.
~ d Fit the snap rings ~ .
•
92
6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY 6.5 ASSEMBLY
• 2 Fitting the coupling to the motor.
a Clean the motor shaft and apply a

thin oil film.
[I&01'£J
Make sure that the
b Apply lubricating paste to the tool
key Is in place on the
motor shaft, threads (keep lubricated).
~
.,./ c Remove the brass plug.
d Fasten the sleeve of the tool to the

motor shaft with the same screw that
•
normally holds the centrifugal clutch
to the motor.
[I&OT£J e Use a spanner to turn the nut on the

tool. This will press the centrifugal
See mounting with optional hydraulic
puller tool (if purchased) on next clutch on to the shaft. Remove the
page, tool.
f Install and tighten the

washer, spring washer and
screw.
Attach a socket with extension rod and handle to the screw.

Place a piece of wood according to the illustration. Push
the handle to start the rotor moving. when the handle hits
the piece 01 wood, the weight and movement of the rotor
tightens the screw.
Repeat until screw is fastened.
• ~fWOOd
93
6.5 ASSEMBLY 6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING , ASSEMBLY
3 Fitting the coupling to the motor with optional hydraulic tool.
a Clean the motor shaft and

apply a thin oil film. [NO'(£J
Make sure that the
key is in place on the
•
motor shaft.
b Fit the sleeve to the

c Screw the holder to
stud bolt. the coupling nave,
Fit the stud bolt with d Fit hydraulic cylinder as

sleeve to the motor Hydraulic oil inlet.
shown.
shaft.
\ e Fit the sleeve and
secure with the nut.
/
Motor shaft f Attach the hose from the hand pump to the
•
hydraulic oil inlet.
Fit the friction coupling by pumping the
handle on the pump until stop.
Sleeve Hydraulic Release pressure on the hand pump and
cylinder
adjust the nut on the stud bolt.
Repeat procedure until coupling is

mounted. Note! The pressure on the hand
pump should not exceed 200 bar.
9 Remove the hydraulic tool.
h Install and tighten the

washer, spring washer and
screw.
Attach a socket with extension rod and

handle to the screw. Place a piece of
wood according to the illustration.
Push the handle to start the rotor

moving, when the handle hits the piece
of wood, the weight and movement of
•
Piece of wood the rotor tightens the screw.
Repeat until screw is fastened.
94
Assembly of friction blocks
• 4 Fitting the friction blocks.
Guide pin
a Fit the friction blocks onto the

guide pins
•
[MO'fE] [MO'fE]
Be sure that the pins on the 50 Hz = 5 Friction blocks
back of the blocks project into 60 Hz = 3 Friction blocks
the grooves in the clutch hub.
b Place the cover in position and secure it with

the snap ring.
Cover
•
95
5 Fitting the motor.
a Fit a lifting sling to the motor.

Use a shackle from the
separator lifting tool.
Weight of motor with
•
coupling: approx. 115 kg.
b Lower the motor (while

supported) on to the
separator frame. Crush hazard
It will set on the ledge. " not supported, the motor with
coupling may drop when lifted.
c Fit the screws.

Do not tighten until the
belt has been mounted.
d Connect the electrical cables.
•
[MOTE]
If carrying out change of friction blocks only,
continue with steps 6 to 7.
If carrying out a complete machine assembly,
continue with the driving device instructions on
page 99.
•
96
• 6 Fitting the flat belt.
[NO'f£J
Clean the inside of the frame before fitting
the flat belt, and make sure that there is no
oil on the belt.
a Lift up the belt to the middle (centre) of the

spindle pulley.
[NO'f£J
For correct position,
centre the belt on the
spindle pulley camber.
Clearance
• b Fit the flat belt to the motor belt pulley.
c Tighten the two upper screws.
d Tighten alt motor attachment screws.
Do not turn the spindle until the

motor is tightened properly to the
frame.
•
97
6.5 ASSEMBLY 6 SERVICE. DISMANTLING. ASSEMBLY
7 Fitting the clutch cover.
,,(
•
b Tighten the screws.
~;;=~~.==~--=:::::::====~~~~
a Fit the clutch-cover.
•
98
6 SERVICE. DISMANTLING. ASSEMBLY 6.5 ASSEMBLY
6.5.2 Driving device
• 1 Fitting the bottom bearing holder.
a Fit the wing insert. O-rings

and strainer. [NO'(£J
Clean the strainer before fitting.
c b Secure the wing insert

with the screw secured d Thread the bottom bearing
holder into the frame and fit
c To secure the bottom " with Locfite 222
the tool into the bottom
bearing holder into the ~~ bearing housing.
frame. apply Loctite .. .,,/
222 on the surfaces
directly above the
upper O-ring.
•
Tool
Bottom bearing holder
- ..,', --
e Tighten the holder to a torque of 200 Nm.
•
99
2 Fitting the labyrinth ring holder.
rr=::r::;-;~ ~I~ . J 11
•
"-
a Lubricate and fit the
O-ring ~ .
b Lubricate and fit the

labyrinth ring ~ .
c Fit and seal the holder with Loctite 222. Fit

and tighten the screws.
•
i i i\..,-'·····'7.
'" i, ....•.
~~/ "{L. .--" - .,- .-'
._-~.
'--- ----- .-;:<~~>/
•
100
• 3 Fitting the ball bearing to the top bearing seat
a Heal the top bearing seat in oil to

+80°C above room temperature
(max.125 "C).
l:.
b Fit the ball bearing.
Bum hazard
[MOTE]
Use protective Always fit a new bearing.
gloves when Pre-Iubricate before fitting.
handling any heated
parts.
Drop some frame oil onto the bearing.
• c Fit the snap ring.
Risk for eye injury from flying snap ring

Use the correct pliers for assembly of snap ring to
avoid accidental release,
•
101
4 Fitting the top bearing seat with bearing to the spindle,
'1
~fr
11 •
a Heat the top bearing seat
together with the bearing in oil to
+80'C above room temperature
(max.125 ·C).
b Wipe off the spindle

Puller
~
Sleeve
~d.ll~
l .
I
\
~'
er
and fit the top bearing
seat to the spindle
n~.
using the sleeve and
puller.
[tlO1'E]
Make sure to fit the bearing seat
correctly or it might get stuck!
•
102
• 5 Fitting the top bearing housing.
a Fit the axial springs ~ to the top

bearing housing.
Axial springs
b Carefully lower the bowl spindle.
Make sure that the springs enter the
recesses on the top bearing seat.
__I
• l",,-
""
c Lubricate the threads with oil before

assembly.
" I
"I d Fit the composite springs ~ and
plugs to the top bearing housing.
Do not tighten the plugs.
Make sure that the springs enter the
recesses in the top bearing seat.
The plugs should be tightened when
the spindle assembly is mounted into
•
the frame.
103
•
6 Fitting the spindle pulley.
a Turn the spindle assembly

upside down.
b Wipe off the spindle puliey c Rt the spindle pulley

seat on the spindle and nave firmly on the bowl
bore in the spindle pulley with spindle.
a dry cloth.
CNOTE]
At least 1mm free space between
support and spindle assembly to
protect the bearing.
Mount the cap nut to protect the

threads and support the spindle.
7 Fitting the self-aligning roller bearing E:. .
a Lower the bearing

•
onto the spindle
CNOTE] and press down

onto the spindle
pulley using the
Always fit a new bearing.
Pra-Iubricate before fitting. special drift tool.
•
104
• 8 Fitting the oil pump.
a Fit O-ring ~ onto lubrication oil orifice. Spread oil

tilm on O-ring.
c Lubricate all threads betore
I
assembly.
b Push lubrication oil orifice into oil pump. Be sure to
line up tabs on orifice with slots in pump.
d Fit the oil pump, tightening
torque 200 Nm.
[NOTE]
Clean the oil pump and make
sure that the bottom hole is not
clogged and that all parts have
room temperature before
mounting,
•
105
•
9 Fitting the fan
a Turn the spindle assembly up-side down.
(NO'1'£J
Ensure that the spindle is seated against
the inner ring of the ball bearing.
b Apply a thin layer of oil and fit the

/ O-rings~ into the fan.
~g
c:gs> ( NO'1'£ J
Make sure that the bearing
is pre lubricated before
fitting the fan.
c Place a spanner (or similar) on the

spindle pUlley key-grip, as holder-up and
Key-grip
fit the fan. Tighten firmly, by hand, with
the pin spanner.
•
10 Fitting the air deflector.
a Turn the spindle assembly up-side

down and fit the air deflector.
•
106
• 11 Lowering the spindle assembly into the frame.

a Turn the assembly and remove the cap nut from the spindle.
Fit the lifting tool to the spindle assembly and lift it.
Crush hazard
Do not rotate the spindle assembly during lifting. The spindle
assembly may otherwise come loose from the lifting tool.
[NO"(£)
Check that the hole at the bottom of the oil pump is clean before
lowering the assembly down.
r:.
b Position the flat belt so •
that the spindle assembly can
• Check the bottom hole.

pass through when lowering.
See note below.
c Carefully lower the spindle assembly and position

the bolt holes over the threaded frame holes.
Make sure that the bottom bearing, enters the
bottom bearing holder correctly. Do not use force.
Cut hazard
Do not put fingers between the frame and air
deflector while lowering the assembly.
d Fit and tighten the screws.
[NOTE)
Check the direction arrows on the belt and the
machine plate for correct position.
• e Tighten the plugs firmly.

Make sure that the belt does not get smudged
with oil or grease during handling.
107
•
12 Fitting the flat belt.
[ tlO1'£J
Clean Ihe inside of Ihe frame before filling
Ihe flal bell, and make sure Ihallhe bell is
clean.
a Lift up the bell to Ihe middle (centre) of the

spindle pulley.
[tlO1'£J
For correct position,
cenlre Ihe bell on Ihe
spindle pUlley camber.
Clearance
b Fit the flat belt 10 the motor belt pulley.
c Tighlen the two upper screws.

•
d Tighlen all motor attachment screws.
[tlO1'EJ
Do nol turn the spindle unlillhe
motor is tightened properly 10 Ihe
frame.
•
108
• 13 Fitting the neck bearing cover and deflector ring.
a Apply a thin layer of oil and fit the

O-rings and the seal rings ~
Deflector ring
~
b Fit the neck bearing cover. C:~-'J
["o'(£J c::>
c::>
Neck bearing cover
The guide pin on the cover should enter one of
the two holes in the bearing housing.
• c Push the deflector ring

down until it stops.
•
109
•
14 Fitting the operating water cove"
O-ring
~!.-/
a Lubricate with oil and fit the seal
ring and O-ring D into the
operating water cover.
Renew the O-ring D

b Fit the operating water cover. Fit and
tighten the screws.
[NOTE]
The water pipe in the frame should
enter the hole in the cover.
15 Measuring the radial wobble of the bowl spindle,
a Fit a dial indicator in a support

and fasten it in position as
illustrated. Use the flat belt to [NOTE]
turn the spindle.
Permissible radial wobble: max. 0,04
mm. If the spindle wobble exceeds
this value, contact an Alfa Lava)
representative.
Max.O,04mm
•
110
6 SERVICE. DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY 6.5 ASSEMBLY
• 16 Fitting the clutch cover.
I
b Tighten the screws.
=~"~~--<:~=,=~~0
a Fit the clutch cover.
• 17 Fill oil in the oil sump.
[NOTE]
The separator should be level and at
a Remove the oil pin, plug and washer. standstill when oil is filled.
b Fit new washer ~ and refit the drain

plug.
c Fill with new oil until oil flows out from

the filler hole.
For correct oil volume see
"Lubricating oil volume" on page 152.
[NOTE]
For grade and quality of oil see
6.7.6 Lubricating oils, page 141
d Fit new O-ring. onto the oil pin.
• e Refit the plug with new washer ~
f Fit the oil pin.
111
6.5.3 Bowl
1 Check for impact marks and corrosion in bowl
body nave and on spindle taper ~ ~ ,
a Remove any impact marks using

•
a scraper and/or a whetstone.
Impact marks may cause the separator to
vibrate while running.
b Rust can be removed by using a

fine-grain emery cloth (e.g. No. 320).
c Finish with polishing paper (e.g. No. 600).
•
d Lubricate to prevent further corrosion.
2 Fitting new valve plugs on the operating slide m. .

b Carefully tap in new valve plugs, using a
clean, soft-faced hammer.
[MOTE]
Make sure that the plugs are fined as
described in the Illustration,
112
• 3 Fitting the operating slide.
a Apply a thin layer of silicone grease and fit the

rectangular ring on the operating slide and the
rectangular ring and O-ring on the bowl body.
.~
b Fit the operating slide.
["01'£J
The gUide pin in the bowl body
should enter the hole in the
operating slide (this hole is
marked with a drill mark).
Nozzle secured with Loctite 222
Alignment hole
Operating slide
C/ VI Guide pin
• 4 Fitting the operating slide holder.
a Fit the holder over the

b Apply a thin layer of molykote grease and
operating slide.
•
fit and tighten new screws and washers
lj tl
0 l!l .~ toa torque of 30Nm±2Nm.
0
C
fJ
• It is very important not to refit used screws

and washers. Always fit new ones included
in the Inspection kill
113
5 Fitting the operating water ring.
a Rt the ring and screws la D .

[NOTE]
•
It is very important not to refit used screws.
Always fit new ones included in the
Inspection kill
b Apply a thin layer ot silicone grease

and fit the O-ring la D
/'
I "~ , c Rtthe operating water ring.
~
oy/
~c:/)~~
;;/ f· \~::
\
[NOTE]
The drilled assembly mark on the water ring should
face the corresponding mark on the bowl body.
•
v \/1
d Grease. fit and tighten the screws to a torque of

30Nm±2Nm.
•
114
• 6 Lifting the bowl body onto the spindle taper.
a Put a drop of oil on the spindle taper.
b Wipe off the spindle taper and

nave bore with a dry cloth.
c Turn the bowl body over.
Cnlsh hazard
Support the bowl body when turning to
prevent it from rolling.
• d Fit the lifting

tool and lift the
bowl body.
e Carefully lower the bowt body

onto the spindle taper.
I
••
• f Remove the lifting tool.
115
•
7 Fitting and tightening the cap nut.
a To prevent the bowl body from rotating

when fitting the cap nut: Fit one of the
clamps (see page 53) to the bowl body b Apply a thin layer of
and one of the screws for the frame molykote grease. Fit and
hood in the frame. Fasten a sling tighten the cap nut to a
between the clamp and the screw torque of 50 Nm.
around the bowl body.
[NOTE]
Left-hand threadI
•
/
, .
----_.....
-- - ------- Cap nut
•
116
• 8 Fitting the discharge slide.
Apply a thin layer of silicone grease and

fit the rectangular ring ~ 3
•
b Apply a thin layer of silicone grease
and fit the O-ring m. 3
• ,
c Fit the lifting tool and
lower the discharge
"
""""~"
o -"- -------------
slide into the bowl. Crush hazard

The ring on the lifting tool must be
pushed home against the discharge
d Remove the lifting tool. slide, otherwise it may come loose
from the tool,
e Fit the nut.
f Fit the spanner for nut and

tighten the nut with a torque
wrench to a torque of min.
200Nm.
• g Remove the spanner for nut.
117
•
9 Assembly of the disc stack.
a Fit the discs one by one onto the distributor.

The distributor has a guide rib for the correct
positioning of the bowl discs. Always end with
the disc without caulks.
The number of discs may have to be increased

to adjust the disc stack pressure. Always check
before operating the separator. See 16 Checking
the disc stack pressure " page 124,
Cut hazard
Sharp edges on the bowl discs may cause
cuts.
Guide rib on distributor
•
118
• 10 Fitting the disc stack assembly to the bowl body.
a Fit the lifting tool into the

distributor.
b Lower the disc stack into the bowl.
[NO~£J Guide pin on bowl
•
body
The guide pin on the bowl body should face

the drill mark on the distributor.
The guide ribs inside the distributor then

enter the recesses on the bowl body nave.
•, ------ Guide ribs inside the distributor.
Recesses on the bowl body nave.
•
119
6.5 ASSEMBLY 6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING. ASSEMBLY
•
11 Assembling the paring tube m. .
a Apply a thin layer of silicone grease to the

a-rings. Fit the a-rings I» D bearings
.. D to the paring tube.
12 Mounting the paring tube and fitting the inlet and outlet pipe.
b Apply a thin layer of silicone grease
a Insert the
paring tube
and mount the splash sealing m.
to the inlet :~
,,
and outlet
pipe. ,
,,,
c Apply a thin layer of
l/
____
,, silicone grease and fit ____
the a-rings m. D '-....- d Carefully lower the inlet and outlet
pipe assembly into the top of the
distributor.
,,
,,
,,
,
•
o
o
120
• 13 Fitting the top disc.
a Move the paring tube

to the centre.
bLower th.e top disc.
The guide rib on the

.distributor should enter
one of the two larger
recesses on the top disc.
(NOTE]
To avoid damaging
the paring tUbe, turn
it towards the centre
of the pipe.
• /
.........
- -- ------ - ---
•
121
14 Fitting the bowl hood.
a Apply a thin layer of silicone grease and fit the

O-ring. ~
•
~- ~
'~-----~'
C.-_~
'" b Fit the seal ring. ~ Press
the ring down evenly until bulges
appear.
. c CarefUlly tap down the bulges crosswise with a soft

rubber mallet, until the ring is completely fitted.
•
d Fit the compressing tool and attach
lifting eyes. Lower the bowl hood so that
its recess fils into the guide pin in the
~ bowl body.
/
'~ \\\\
~'~~~\\
, Guide pin on bowl body
"\;V/
e Remove the compressing tool.
\\)}4 •
122
6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY 6.S ASSEMBLY
• 15 Fitting the lock ring.
a Place the lock ring on the bowl hood

with its guide pin close to the
corresponding hole in the bowl
body. --~.~
[tlO1'£J \1
I
Make sure that the groove in
the bowl body which retains
the lock ring is clean.
~~.
o
~-'---- o 1
'
b Fit the complete compressing
/
/1,11 "'f'
Y
tool and compress the disc stack

by alternately turning the screws
a maximum of 40 Nm at a time
[tlO1'£]
•
until the lock ring fits into the
bowl body. The lock ring is Check that the lock ring is
correctly fitted when the lock ring correctly positioned all way
ends are facing each other. around!
For correct disc stack pressure

see page 124
/!
c Release the
pressure on the
[tlO1'£J compressing
tool and
remove it.
Never remove
any material Lock ring
from the lock
ring. A
hazardous
Bowl hood
situation could
result.
•
Bowl body
Before compressing Lock ring In position
123
16 Checking the disc stack pressure lit .

a Remove bowl hood, top disc and inlet and ouliet pipe.
•
... b Add one disc to the disc stack.
c Refit the disc without caulks, the top disc

and bowl hood.
d Fit the lock ring and fully compress
the disc stack with the compressing
tool.
[IIO,-£J
Do not use more power than 40
[IIO,-£J Nmlscrew at a time, alternately.
Always refit the disc

without caulks on top
ofthe disc stackl
•
e If the lock ring enters the groove,
repeat a-d until the lock ring does
not enter the groove.
9 Assemble the bowl with

inlet and outlet pipe.
f Dismanlie the bowl and remove
one disc to get the correct disc
stack pressure.
,I
124
6.5.4 In and outlet device
• 1 Fitting the frame hood
___9-__
I» ~ .
a Turn the paring tube so that the frame hood can

[NOTE]
r~~ pass the paring tube.
~
Paring tube. Make sure that the frame
~
b Apply a thin layer of silicone grease and hood is mounted in its
correct position
lit the O-ring onto the frame hood
according to the piping
I»~ arrangement.
/~~
~-:;~ Lower the frame hood.
d Fit and tighten the

screws.
• [NOTE]
-------
Make sure to lit the frame hood
groove and the projection of the
pipe.
•
125
•
2 Control measurement of paring disc height ~ .
a Remove the guide screw (A).
b Measure the distance D

through the screw hole.
Assemble the correct
0 Quantity height
number of height adjusting
mm adjusting rings
rings (8) according to the
table.
33 ± a,s 5
32 ± a,s 4
31 ± a,s 3
30 ± a,s 2
c Refit the guide screw (A) 29 ±O,5 1
Support ring
Frame hood
Guide screw
•
~~j
LLLISJ __ ----------C-
Bowl hood
Distributor
Paring disc
A/fa Laval ret 567992, rev. 0
•
126
• 3 Fitting the spring rl:t and arm.
a Fit the spring on the arm

and fit the arm to the top
of the paring tube end
with the screw.
Arm
b Fit the spring to the pin

on the frame hood and
make sure that it is
properly attached on
both ends.
•
127
4 Fitting the connection housing.
a Fit the connection housing over

the inleVoullet pipe.
•
[NOTE]
Make sure that the screw, on top of
the frame hood, enters the guide
hole atlhe underside of the
connecting housing,
b Fit the washer and the lock
nut using the hook spanner.
•
128
6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY 6,5 ASSEMBLY
6.5.5 Unbalance sensor (optional)
• 1 Fitting the unbalance sensor holder,
,I
a Remove the cover.
,I
• Sensor arm
;{.
Frame
ScrewMB
M10
b Fit the O-ring on the holder,
Fit the screw into the holder and
mount the holder into the
separator frame.
'-~JIIl--,------J Sensor
Y holder
O-ring
" removing the sensor holder;

use a Ml0 screw as a puller.
[NOTE]
See next page for fitting and
correct adjustment of the sensor.
•
129
6.S ASSEMBLY 6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY
2 Adjusting the unbalance sensor
a Fit the sensor into the holder. Do not forget the nut.
b Adjust the sensor so that a value of 1,5 appears on the display.

•
11
!i ! ==p
l~ I J/
'--r-.---,-~ I u
Nut
Sensor
,i J~.:5J /"' I-- + = brown or red
r- J = black or white ~24VDC

11
uT .~.
.. ~ ~-
_J f-OV = blue
•
',- --,----'
c When correct distance is achieved tighten the nut Adjustment value for the sensor is; 12 mA ± 1mA.
For more details see 8.3 Connection List. page 153 and
against the holder. 752 Unbalance sensor (optional)., page 160.
Fit the cover (see previous page).
•
130
6.5.6 Speed sensorr
• 1 Adjusting the speed sensor
a Adjust the speed sensor. Distance A = 102 ± 0, 1 mm.
b Fit the sensor to the frame, see 4.4 Sensors, page 26.
Elt - - I1
"
1
[NOTE]
If the sensor does not work
properly, check the distance
between the sensor and the
spindle belt pulley.
Adjust the sensor to achieve
•
measure (B) shown below.
Spindle belt pulley
(NOTE]
The distance (B) between the
sensor and the spindle belt
pulley must be 2,5 ± 0,5 mm
•
131
6.6 ACTIONS AFTER ASSEMBLY 6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY
6.6 Actions After

Assembly
6.6.1 Control of machine plates and

safety labels ~
•
A"a Laval rei 561498 rev. 3
1 Check that the following signs are attached,
Machine plate
.~.
l!......, L
-- =-
• • Space for label indicating representative.
•
Safety label.
::.-"""'~ .......... _... ,
Lifting instructions
Space for o 0
additional iabel as
specified.
-I
o o
50Hz
Oil type plate
60Hz
Indicating direction of rotation of horizontal driving device.
c
132
6 SERVICE. DISMANTLING. ASSEMBLY 6.6 ACTIONS AFTER ASSEMBLY
• 2 Check legibility. Following texts should be read on the labels.
•
Separator
Manufacturing serial No. I Year
Product No.
-= In and outlet device
=
Bowl
• •
Machine bottom part
Max. speed (bowl)
Direction of rotation (bowl)

Speed motor shaft
El. current frequency
Recommended motor power
Max. density of feed
Max. density of sediment
Max. density of operating liquid
Process temperature min./max.
• WARNING
Read the instruction manuals before installation, operation and maintenance.
Consider inspection intervals.
Failure to strictly follow instructions can lead to fatal injury.
If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator and keep bowl filled with liquid
during rundown.
Out of balance vibration will become worse ~ bowl is not full.
Separator must stop rotating before any dismantling work is started.
Read instruction manual before lifting.
!!...--- ~----
~~---- ~._
!:!.._--- ~-::.':.-
~---- ~:::-.=--
•
!!.. .._ 2.. _
r!.. __. ~:.-::.::.-=__
!:.._---
133
6.7 OIL CHANGE 6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY
6.7 Oil Change

The separator should be level and at
standstill when oil is filled or the oil level is
checked.
•
6.7.1 Lubricating oil
Do not mix different oil brands.
Always use clean vessels when handling lubricating oil.
Great attention must be paid not to contaminate the lubricating oil. Of
particular importance is to avoid mixing of different types of oil. Even a
few drops of motor oil mixed into a synthetic oil may result in severe
foaming.
Any presence of black deposits in a mineral type oil is an indication that
the oil base has deteriorated seriously or that some of the oil additives
have precipitated. Always investigate why black deposits occurs.
If changing from one oil brand to another it is recommended to do this
in connection with an overhaul of the separator. Clean the gear housing
and the spindle parts thoroughly and remove all deposits before filling
the new oil.
[N01"E]
Always clean and dry parts (also tools) before lubricants are applied.
•
Check the oil level before start. Top up when necessary.
Oil volume = see "Technical Data".
It is of utmost importance to use the lubricants recommended in our
documentation.
This does not exclude, however, the use of other brands, provided they
have equivalently high quality properties as the brands recommended.
The use of oilbrands and other lubricants than recommended, is done
on the exclusive responsibility of the user or oil supplier.
Applying, handling and storing of lubricants

Always be sure to follow lubricants manufacturer's instructions.
•
134
6 SERVICE. DISMANTLING. ASSEMBLY 6.7 OIL CHANGE
6.7.2 Check oil level
• 1 Remove the oil pin and make sure that the oil
level is above the lower end of the pin.
6.7.3 Oil change procedure

1 Remove the oil pin, plug and washer.
2 Place a vessel under the drain plug
3 Remove the drain plug.
Oii fill
Bum hazard
The lUbricating oil and various machine surfaces can
be sufficiently hot to cause burns.
4 Collect the oil in the vessel.
•
5 Fit and tighten the drain plug.
Min.
6 Fill with new oil until oil flows out of oil filler
hole.
[MOTE] I
\_--------~
See 6.7.6 Lubricating oils, page 141.
[MOTE]
7 Fit the washer and the oil filling plug. Tighten
For Inspection service procedures; See
the plug.
"Fill oil in the oil sump." on page 111.
S Fit the oil pin.
•
135
6.7.4 Lubrication chart

A/fa Laval rei 567329-01, rev. 2
•
Electric motor (6)
Buffers (3)
~~~[;;~~~fl--- Plug thread (7)
Bowl spindle and bearings (1)

Friction clutch bearings (5)
Lubricating points Type of lubricant Interval

1 The oil bath. Bowl spindle bearings See 6.7.1 Lubricating oil, page 134 Oil change:
•
are lubricated by oil mist from the oil Volume: B.2 Technical Data, page 152 1. Continous operation: 4000 hours
bath. Ambient temperature 0 to +SsoC
2. Seasonal operation:
before every operating period
3. Short periods operation:
12 months even if total numbers of
operating hours is less than stated
above
2 Bowl spindle taper. Lubricating oil, only a few drops for At assembling
rust protection.
3 Bowl: Sliding contact surfaces, thread Pastes specified in 6.7.5 At assembling.
of lock nut and cap nut. Recommended lubricants, page 137
4 Rubber seal rings. Grease as specified in 6.7.5 At assembling
Recommended lubricants, page 137
5 Friction clutch bearings. The bearings are pre-Iubricated with No need for extra lubrication.
grease.
6 Electric motor. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. Follow the manufacture~s instructions.
7 Plug thread Lubricating oil. At assembly.

(neck bearing assembly)
[II01'£J
Check and pre lubricate new spindle bearings and
•
those that have been out of service for one month or
longer. Check the oil level before start.
If not otherwise specified, follow the suppliers Top up when necessary.
instructions abou1 applying, handling and storing of Do not overfill.
lubricants.
136
6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY 6.7 OIL CHANGE
6.7.5 Recommended lubricants

• Alfa Laval ref. 553217-01 rev. 10
[ tlO'f£]
The data in below tables is based on supplier
information in regards to lubrication properties.
Trade names and designations might vary from
country to country, contact your local supplier lor
more information.
Brands with Alia Laval article numbers are

approved and recommended for use.
Pastes for non-food applications:
Manufacturer Designation Alfa Laval No
Fuchs Lubritech Gleitmo 805K

Gleitmo 705
J
Dow Coming Molykote 1000 (Paste) 537086-02(1000 g)
Molykote 1000 (Paste) 537086-03 (100 g)
• Reeol
Kluber
Molykote G-rapid plus (Paste)
Dry Moly Paste

MT-LM
Wollracoat C (Paste)
537086-04 (50 g)
Bonded coatings:
J11-~
Fuchs Lubritech Gleitmo 900 (Varnish or spray)
Dow Coming Molykote 0321 R (Spray) 535586-01 (400 ml)

Molykote 0321 R (Varnish) 535586-02 (60 ml)
Molykote 0321 R (Paste) 535586-80 (25 ml)
•
137
Pastes for hygienic applications

(NSF registered H1 is prefered):
Manufacturer
Fuchs Lubritech
Designation
Gleitmo 805
Hygienic Comment
DVGW (K1W) approval for

drinking water
Alfa Laval No
•
(TZ'N pru!zeugnis)
Geralyn 2 NSF Registered H1 561764-01 (50 g)

(3 sep 2004)
Bremer & Legui!.

Fuchs Lubritech
Rivolla F.L.A NSF Registered H1
(15 Feb 2003)
German §5 Absalz 1 LMBG
approved
J
Dow Coming Molykote TP 42
Molykote D
Molykote P1900 NSF Registered H1

(7 Jan 2004)
KIOber KIOberpaste 46 MR 401 White; contains no lead.

cadmium, nickel, sulphur nor
halogens.
•
KIOberpaste UH1 96-402 NSF Registered H1
(25 Feb 2004)
Reeol Foodlube Multi Paste NSF Registered H1

(13 Apr 2001)
•
138
Silicone grease for rubber rings:
• Manufacturer
Dow Coming
Designation
Molykote 111
(Compound)
Follows according. to
Manufacturer
Alfa Laval No
Conform to the FDA regulations (21 539474-02 (100 g)

CFR 178.3570) for occasional food
contact. Certified: National Wafer
Molykote 111 539474-03 (25 g)
(Compound) Council UK and WRC, UK.
Certified: food industry as per
Chemical Testing Laboratory Dr,
Bchm, Munich.
Molykote Foodslip SR Former USDA HI approved. 569415-01 (50 g)
grease
Fuchs Lubritech Chemplex 750 DVGW approved according to the
i
German KTW-recomendations for
drinking water.
Bremer & Leguil Rivolta NSF Registered HI
F.LG MD2 (15 Feb 2003)
Kluber Unisilkon L 250 L Complies with German
Environmental Agency on hygiene
requirements for tap water.
Certified by DVGW-KTW, WRC,
AS4020, ACS.
•
Paraiiq GTE 703 NSF Registered HI (25 Feb 2004)
Complies with LMBG and the
European standard EN 1672,
part2.
Bel-Ray No-Tax Silicone valve NSF Registered HI
seal (19 June 2002)
MMCC ALC0220 NSF Registered HI
(25 March 2002)
Rocol Foodlube Hi-Temp NSF Registered HI
(18 April 2001 )
•
139
6.7 OIL CHANGE 6 SERVICE. DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY
Greases for ball and roller bearings:
Always follow the specific recommendation for

lubrication as advised by the manufacturer.
•
BP Energrease MP-MG2
Energrease LS2
Energrease LS-EP2
Castrol APS2
Spheerol EPL 2
Chevron Texaco Chevron Dura-Lith Grease EP2

Texaco Multifak AFB 2
Dow Coming Molykole G-01 01

Molykole Multilub
ExxonMobil Beacon EP2

Unirex N2
•
Mobilith SHC 460
Mobilux EP2
Fuchs Lubrijech Lagermeister EP2
OB/Kuwait Petroleum Rembrandl EP2
Shell Alvania EP 2
Albida EP2
SKF LGEP2
LGMT2
Tolal Multis EP2
•
140
6.7.6 Lubricating oils
• Alfa LavaJ ref. 567330-02, rev. 2
Paraffinic mineral lubricating oil,

category (I80-L-) HM 100.
Viscosity grade (180-3448/3104) VG 100.
The oil shall follow the requirements in one of
the standards below.
Standard Designation
DIN 51524 part 2 or 3' (German standard) DIN 51524-HLP or HVLP' 100
ISO 11158 (International standard) ISO-L-HM or HV' 100
Viscosity index (ISO 2909) VI>95
The following is the list of recommended oil

brands. Trade names and designations might
vary from country to country. Please contact
your local oil supplier for more information.
Manufacturer Designation
Ana Laval 567335-01 1 litre
567335-02 4 litres
•
BP Bartran 100
Bartran HV 1DO'
Gastrol Hyspin AWS 100
Hyspin AWH(-M) 100'
GhevronTexaco I FAMM Hydraulic oil AW 100 (H2)
Rando HO 100 (H2)
Rando HDZ 100 (H2)"
Rykon Premium 100 (H2)"
ExxonMobil NutoH 100
Univis N 100'
Mobil DTE 27
Mobil DTE 18M'
Q8IKuwait Petroleum Haydn 100
SheD Tellus Oil 100
Tellus Oil S 100
Tellus Oil T 100'
Statoil HydraWay HMA 100
Total Azolla ZS 100
Lubmarine Visga 100'
* These oils should be used at cold start, i.e. when the ambient temperature is
below 20 °C.
• The list of recommended oil brands is not complete. Other oil brands may be
used as long as the follow the above standards and have equivalent high quality
as the brands recommended. The use of other lubricants than recommended is
done on the exclusive responsibility of the user or oil supplier.
141
6.8 LIFTING INSTRUCTIONS 6 SERVICE. DISMANTLING. ASSEMBLY
6.8 Lifting instructions

Alfa LavaJ ref. 562694, rev. 1
6.8.1 Lifting the separator

•
Weight to lift 480 kg
Sling length: Min. 750 mm
Fasten all four bolts. Tightening

torque 35 - 45 Nm
•
1 Remove the inlet and outlet device, the
frame hood and the bowl according to the
instructions in 6.3 Dismantling, page 48.
[NOTE]
Never lift or transport the separator with the bowl
still inside.
2 Disconnect all connections.

3 Fit the lifting tool (not included in set of tools).
All four bolts on the lifting tool must be
4
fastened to the frame.
Unscrew the foundation bolts.
•
142
6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY 6.8 LIFTING INSTRUCTIONS
5 Use two lifting slings to lift the separator.
• 6
7
Total length of each loop: minimum 1,5
metres.
Unscrew the foundation bolts.
When lifting and moving the separator, follow
normal safety precautions for lifting large
heavy objects.
Crush hazards
A falling separator can cause accidents resulting
in serious injury and damage.
Never lift the separator by any other method than
described in this manual.
[NOTE]
When lifting parts without weight specifications,
always use lifting straps with the capacity of at
•
least 500 kg.
6.8.2 Lifting the bowl

Weight to lift 109 kg
When lifting and moving an assembled
bowl, always follow these instructions.
1 Fit the lifting tool with lifting eyes to the bowl

assembly.
2 Check that the lock ring is mounted correctly
before lifting the complete bowl.
Tightening torque 35 - 45 Nm
3 Lift the bowl using a sling with the proper
rating.
[NOTE]
I
Never try to lift the bowl while it is still in the frame. I Lock ring
The bowl body is fastened to the frame with the 1
cap nut. ~'
•
Make sure that
lock ring is fitted.
143
SEPARATOR MANUAL 7 FAULT FINDING
7 Fault Finding
• These fault finding instructions are for the

separator only.
If a fault occurs, study the System

Documentation fault finding section (if
applicable).
7.1 Mechanical Functions
7.1.1 Separator vibration
If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator and
[NOTEJ
keep bowl filled with liquid during rundown. Some vibration is normal during the starting and
•
The cause of Ihe vibration must be identified and stopping sequences when Ihe separator passes
corrected before the separator is restarted. through ils critical speed.
Cause Corrective action

Bowl out of balance due to: Dismantle the separator and check the assembly
- poor cleaning and cleaning.
- incorrect assembly
- incorrect disc stack compression
- bowl assembled with parts from other separators
Uneven sludge deposits in the sludge space. Dismantle and clean the separator bowl.
Height position of paring disc is incorrect. Stop the separator, measure, and if necessary,
adjust the height.
Bowl spindle bent. Renew the bowl spindle.
Bearing(s) damaged or worn. Renew all bearings.
The frame feet are worn out. Renew the frame feet.
Spindle top bearing spring broken. Renew all springs.
• 57B704-02 145
7.1 MECHANICAL FUNCTIONS 7 FAULT FINDING
7.1.2 Smell
Cause
Normal OCcurrence during start while the friction
blocks are slipping.
Oil level in oil sump too low.

Corrective action
None.
If smell continues when separator is at full speed,
stop the separator and replace friction blocks.
Check oil level and add oil if necessary.
•
7.1.3 Noise
Height position of paring disc is incorrect. Stop the separator, measure and adjust the height.
7.1.4 Speed too low

Friction blocks are oily or worn. Clean or renew friction blocks.
Bowl is not closed or leaking. Dismantle the bowl and check.
Motor failure. Repair the motor.
•
Bearing(s) damaged. Renew all bearings.
Incorrect transmission parts (60 Hz be~ pulley for
I \it1' AJl
tl
1tlG
JJ
'" Stop and change the belt transmission to
suit the power supply frequency.
7.1.5 Speed too high

Incorrect transmission parts (50 Hz belt pulley for
Stop and change the belt transmission to

suit the power supply frequency.
•
146
7 FAULT FINDING 7.1 MECHANICAL FUNCTIONS
7.1.6 Starting power too high
• Cause
Incorrect transmission parts (60 Hz belt pUlley tor
Corrective action
Slop and change Ihe belllransmission 10

suillhe power supply frequency.
Wrong direction of rotation. Change eleclrical phase connections to the motor.
7.1.7 Starting power too low

Incorrect transmission parts (50 Hz bell pulley for
• Slop and change Ihe belllransmission 10

suillhe power supply frequency.
Friction blocks are oily or worn. Clean or renew friction blocks.

Motor failure. Repair the motor.
7.1.8 Starting time too long

Friction blocks are oily or worn. Renew or clean friction blocks.
Height position of paring disc is incorrect. Stop, check and adjust the height.
Molor failure. Repair the motor.
•
147
7.2 SEPARATING FUNCTIONS 7 FAULT FINDING
7.2 Separating Functions
7.2.1 Bowl opens accidentally

during operation
•
Strainer in the operating water supply is clogged. Clean the strainer.
No water in the operating water system. Check the operating water system and make sure
the valve(s) are open.
Hoses between the supply valves and separator are Correct.
incorrectly frtted.
Nozzle in operating slide clogged. Clean the nozzle.
Rectangular ring in discharge slide is defective. Renew the rectangular ring.
Valve plugs are defective. Renew all plugs.
Supply valve for opening water is leaking. Rectify the leak.
7.2.2 Bowl fails to open for sludge

discharge
•
Strainer in the operating water supply is clogged. Clean the strainer.
Water flow too low. Check the water flow
Hoses between the supply valves and separator are Correct.
incorrectly fitted.
Nozzle in operating slide missing. Fit the nozzle.
Rectangular ring in the operating slide or bowl body Renew the rectangular rings.
is defective.
7.2.3 Unsatisfactory separation

result
Incorrect separation temperature. Adjust.
Throughput too high. Adjust.
Disc stack is clogged. Clean disc stack.
Sludge space in bowl is filled. Clean and reduce the time between sludge
discharges.
Bowl speed too low. Examine the motor and power transmission including
the belt transmission (clutch).
Bowl rotates i wrong direction Check the electrical connections to the motor.
•
148
7 FAULT FINDING 7.2 SEPARATING FUNCTIONS
7.2.4 Bowl fails to close
• Cause
Nozzle in operating slide clogged.
Hoses reversed.
Rectangular ring in discharge slide is defective
Corrective action
Clean nozzle.
Adjust.
Renew rectangular ring.
Valve plugs in operating slide missing or defective. Renew valve plugs.
No water. Turn on water supply.
•
149
8 Technical Reference
•
8.1 Product description
A/fa Lava/ ret. 574872, rev. 2 & 574871, rev. 2
t: NOTE]
The separator is a component operating in an
integrated system including a monitoring system.
If the technical data in the system description does
not agree with the technical data in this instruction
manual, the data in the system description is the
valid one.
Product number: 881204-03-02/2 & 881204-02-02/2

Separator type: S 851 & S 856
Application: Cleaning of fuel oil and lube oil.
• Technical design: Intended for marine and land installations.

Total discharge.
Centrilock® lock ring.
Designed in accordance with standards:
98/37/EC Directive of the European Parliament and Council relating to

machinery.
89/336/EEC EMC and amendments related to said directive
EN 12547 Centrifuges - Common safety requirements.
Operational limits:
Feed temperature: O°C to 100°C
Ambient temperature 5°C to 55°C
Discharge intervals: min. 2 minutes max. 4 hours.
Maximum allowed density of operating liquid:
1000 kg/m 3 .
Viscosity max. 700 eSt at 50°C.
Not to be used for liquids with flashpoint below
•
60°C.
Risk for corrosion and erosion have to be
investigated in each case.
Remote restart allowed under certain conditions.
see Interface description.
151
8.2 TECHNICAL DATA 8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE
8.2 Technical Data

Alfa Lava! ref. 562937 rev. 5
Subject
General technical data:
Motor power
Value
12,5
Unit
kW
•
Gear ratio 253,5/96 50Hz
Gear ratio 211/96 60Hz
Alarm levels for vibration monitor,
connection 752, 1sI/2nd 0,3/0,45 mmls
Bowl max. inner diameter 332 mm
Discharge interval, min.lmax. 21240 minutes
Max. density of operating liquid, max. 1000 kg/m"
Max. density of feed/sediment 1100/2019 kg/m"
Feed temperature, min.lmax. 0/100 °C
Max. running time without flow,
- empty bowl 60 minutes
- filled bowl 60 minutes
Bowl body material AL 111 2377-02
Operating data:
Bowl speed, synchronous
Motor speed synchronous
Max. power consumption
Power consumption
Starting time, min.lmax.
7922/7913
3000/3600
19
3,8/11,1
2/2,2
rlmin 50Hz/60Hz
rlmin 50Hz/60Hz
kW (at starting up) (50Hz/60 Hz)
kW (idling/at max. capacity)
minutes
•
Stopping time min.lmax. 35140 minutes
Stopping time without brake, average 38 minutes
Sound power 9,1 Bel(A)
Sound pressure 76 dB(A)
Vibrations. separator in use 9,1 mmlsec
Volume and capacity data:
Max. hydraulic capacity, bowl 18,5 m"1h
Bowl liquid volume 7,9 litres
Fixed discharge volume 7,1 litres
Sludge volume, efficienl/total 1,13/3,1 I~res
Lubricating oil volume 4,3 litres

Weight information:
Motor drive 115 kg
Bowl 109 kg
•
Separator total 623 kg
152
8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE 8.3 CONNECTION LIST
•
8.3 Connection List
Alfa l..;wal ref. 562716 rev. 1
No. Description Requirementsllimits
201 Inlet for process liquid
• Allowed temperature Min. 0 "C, max. 100 "C
• Max allowed density See "Technical Data" on page 152
• Allowed flow Max 12,5 m3/h
206 Inlet for conditioning and displacement liquid
• Instantaneous flow 5,5 litres/minute
220 Outlet for light phase, clarified liquid
• Counter pressure 0- 250 kPa
221 Outlet for heavy phase No counter pressure.
222 Outlet for solid phase
• Small discharge
• Large discharge Total discharge
• Discharge frequency Max 24 discharge/h.
• 375 Inlet for discharge and make-up liquid

The outlet from the cyclone must always be
arranged to prevent the cyclone from being
filled up with sludge. Solids are discharged
by gravity.
• Quality requirements See page 164.
• Max density Max. 1000 kgim3
• Pressure min. 150 kPa

Make-up liquid
• Flow (momentary) 2,8 litres/minute
• Consumption 1,7 litre/hour
• Interval 5 minutes
• Time 3 seconds
Discharge liquid
• Flow 11 litres/minute
• Consumption 0,55 litre/discharge
• Time 3 seconds
Closing liquid
• Flow 2,8 litres/minute
• Consumption 0,7 litre/discharge
• •
•
•
Time
Start up closing liquid
Flow
Time
15 seconds
11 litres/minute
5 seconds
153
8.3 CONNECTION LIST 8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE
•
462 Drain of frame top section, lower
701 Motor for separator

Allowed frequency variation: ±5%
(momentarily during 5 seconds) ±10%
740 Speed sensor for bowl spindle See page 159.
• Type Inductive promixly switch
• Supply voltage, nominal 8V
• With sensor activated (near metal) Less or equal to 1 mA.
• With sensor not activated (far from metal) More or equal to 3 mA.
• Number of pulses per revolution 1
752 Position transducer for bearing holder See page 160.
• Type Inductive analogue sensor
• Supply voltage 18 to 30 V DC
• Operation range (mild steel) 0,5 to 2,5 mm
• Output voltage within sensing range 4t020mA
• Load reSistance, R L 400 Ohm
760 Cover interlocking switch
• Type Mechanical limit switch
•
Switch rating, resistive load max. 3 A (at 48 V DC)
1 A (at 220 VAC)
•
154
8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE 8.4 INTERFACE DESCRIPTION
8.4 Interface Description
• Alfa Lava'ref. 564834 rev. 2
8.4.1 Scope
This document gives information, requirements,

and recommendations about operational
procedures and signal processing for safe and
reliable operation of the separator. It is intended
to be used for designing auxiliary equipment and
control systems for the separator.
8.4.2 References
This Interface Description is one complementary
document to the separator. Other such documents
that contain necessary information and are referred
to here are:
• Interconnection Diagram
• Connection List
•
• Technical Data
Standards referred to are:

• EN 418 Safety of machinery - Emergency stop
equipment, functional aspects - Principles of
design
• EN 1037 Safety of machinery - Prevention of

unexpected start-up
• EN 954-1 Safety of machinery - Safety related

parts of control systems - Part 1 General principles
for design.
•
155
8.4 INTERFACE DESCRIPTION 8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE
8.4.3 Definitions
For the purpose of this document, the following
definitions apply:
• Synchronous speed: The speed the machine
will attain when it is driven by a three phase
•
squirrel-cage inducflon motor and there is no
slip in the motor and the drive system.
• Full speed: The synchronous speed minus
normal slip.
8.4.4 Goal
To eliminate situations that can cause harm,
i.e. injury, damage to health or property and
unsatisfactory process result are e.g.:
Situation Effect
-
Unbalance caused by uneven sediment Too high stress on bowl and bearing
accumulation in the bowl. system which might cause harm.
•
Too high bowl speed. Too high stress on bowl which might
cause harm.
Access to moving parts. Can cause injury to person who

accidentally touches these parts.
Insufficient cleaning of separator. Unsatisfactory product quality.
Bowl leakage. Product losses.
Information and instructions given in this

document aim at preventing these situations.
Control and supervision can be more or less
comprehensive depending on the type of used
control equipment. When a simple control unit
is used it would be impossible or too expensive
to include many of the functions specified here
while these functions could be included at
nearly no extra cost when a more advanced
control unit is used. For this reasons functions
that are indispensable or needed for safety
reasons to protect the machine and/or
personnel are denoted with shall while other
•
functions are denoted with should.
156
8.4.5 Description of separator
• modes
For control purposes the operation of the
separator should be divided into different
modes.
The normally used modes are described below
but other modes might exist.
It is assumed that:
o The separator is correctly assembled.
o All connections are made according to
Connection List. Interconnection Diagram
and Interface Description.
o The separator control system is activated.
If above conditions are not fulfilled the
separator will be in SERVICE mode.
Stand still means:

o The power to the separator motor is off
• 0 The bowl is not rotating.
Starting means:
o The power to the separator motor is on.
o The bowl is rotating and accelerating
Running means:
o The power to the separator motor is on.
o The bowl is rotating at full speed.
o RUNNING is a collective denomination for a
number of sub modes which e.g. can be:
- STAND BY Separator is in a waiting mode
and not producing.
- PRODUCTION: Separator is fed with
product and producing.
- CLEANING: Separator is fed with cleaning
• liquids with the intention to clean the

separator.
157
Stopping means:
o
o
The power to the separator motor is off.
The bowl is rotating and decelerating.

STOPPING is a collective denomination for a
number of sub modes which e.g. can be:
•
- NORMAL STOP: A manually or
automatically initiated stop.
- SAFETY STOP: An automatically initiated
stop at too high vibrations.
- EMERGENCY STOP: A manually initiated
stop at emergency situations. This stop
will be in effect until it is manually reset.
8.4.6 Remote start

This machine may be started from a remote
location under the following conditions;
o First start after any kind of service or manual
cleaning must be supervised locally in order
o
to ensure that no mistakes has been made
during assembly.
The unbalance sensor is mandatory for
remote start.
•
o The installation must include equipment to
prevent unintentional start-up from remote
location when the machine is disassembled.
o The installation must include equipment to
prevent unintentional start of process flow
from remote location when the machine is
not properly connected to the piping.
8.4.7 Handling of connection

interfaces
Electrical connections
701 Separator motor.
The separator is equipped with a 3-phase DOL
- (direct on line) started motor. The separator
can also be started by a ym starter, but then
the time in Y-position must be maximized to 5
seconds.
•
158
There shall be an emergency stop circuit
• designed according to EN 418 and a power

isolation device according to EN 1037.
There shall be a start button close to the
separator that shall be used for first start after
assembly of the separator.
There should be a counter to count number of
running hours.
There should be a current transformer to give
an analogue signal to the control unit about the
motor current.
740 Speed sensor

A proximity sensor of inductive type according
to DIN 19234 (Namur) standard is giving a
number of pulses per revolution ofthe bowl (see
Connection List).
Signal processing in STARTING:
•
• The separator should be stopped
automatically according to NORMAL STOP
procedure and an alarm should be given
when the accumulated time for acceleration
is longer than the maximum time specified in
Technical Data. An abnormal start time
indicates some malfunction of the separator
equipment and should be investigated.
• If the speed exceeds "Bowl speed,
synchronous" in Technical Data with more
than 5% the separator shall be stopped
automatically by NORMAL STOP and a high
speed alarm shall be given.
• The speed monitoring system shall be
checked continuously (e.g by checking that
pulses are coming). In case of failure
indication the separator shall be stopped
automatically by NORMAL STOP with a timer
controlled stop sequence and an alarm for
speed monitoring system failure shall be
given.
•
• The acceleration should be supervised to
ensure that a certain speed (e.g 250r/min.)
has been reached within a certain time (e.g
30 seconds).
159
Signal processing in RUNNING:
•
• If the speed exceeds "Bowl speed, synchronous" in
Technical Data with more than 5% for a period longer
than 1 minute or momentarily during maximum 5
seconds more than 10% the separator shall be
stopped automatically by NORMAL STOP and a high
speed alarm shall be given.
• If the speed falls more than 10% below the

synchronous speed for a period longer than 1 minute
or 15% during more than 5 seconds a low speed
alarm should be given. Low speed indicates some
malfunction of the separator equipment and shall be
investigated.
• The speed monitoring system shall be checked
continuously (e.g. by checking that pulses are
coming). In case of a failure indication an alarm for
speed monitoring system failure shall be given. If
there is a risk of too high speed the separator shall be
stopped by NORMAL STOP.
• The speed drop during DISCHARGE. compared to
the measured speed immediately before, should be
•
between 3-8% which will indicate a proper discharge.
Signal processing in STOPPING:
• STAND STILL shall be indicated when no pulses are
detected within 30 seconds.
• Stopping the separator when alarm for speed
monitoring system failure is active, shall cause a timer
controlled stop. (See "Stop time" in Technical Data.)
752 Unbalance sensor (optional).

For indication of any abnormal unbalance and to be able
to perform appropriate countermeasures, the separator
has been equipped with a vibration velocity transducer
on the separator frame. The signal from the transducer
shall be monitored and two alarm levels according to
the vibration alarm levels in Technical Data should be
set.
The vibration level shall be high for 3 seconds to
generate an alarm. The first level is only used to
generate an alarm while the second level shall stop the
•
machine.
The vibration monitor shall include self check function
to be performed at least at initiation of STARTING.
160
If vibrations exceed the second alarm level the
• separator shall be stopped the quickest way

possible and it shall not been restarted until
the reasons for the unbalance have been found
and measures to remove them have been taken.
Signal processing in STARTING:
If vibrations exceed the second alarm level the
separator shall be stopped automatically by
SAFETY STOP.
If the self check system triggers, an alarm shall
be given and an automatic stop by NORMAL
STOP shall be initiated.
Signal processing in RUNNING:
• If vibrations exceed the first alarm level an
alarm should be given. Vibrations of this
magnitude will reduce the expected life time
of the bearings and should therefore be
eliminated.
• If vibrations exceed the second alarm level
•
the separator shall be stopped automatically
by SAFETY STOP
• If the self check system triggers, an alarm
shall be given.
Signal processing in STOPPING:
• If the self check system triggers, an alarm
shall be given.
Signal processing in NORMAL STOP:
• If vibrations exceed the second level the
system shall turn over automatically to
SAFETY STOP
•
161
760 Cover interlocking switch (optional)
•
The separator is equipped with a interlocking switch to
detect if the cover is mounted.
Signal processing in STAND STILL:

• The circuit is closed when the cover of the separator
is mounted.
• The interlocking switch should be connected in such
a way that starting of the motor is prevented when the
separator cover is not mounted.
Signal processing in STARTING, RUNNING and

CLEANING:
• If the circuit is broken the separator should be
stopped automatically by NORMAL STOP This is to
minimise the risk of having access to moving parts.
Fluid connections
•
Complementary information is given in the document
Connection List.
201 Inlet
Processing in STAND STILL:
• Shall be closed.
Processing in STARTING:
• Should be closed. Bowl will be open and empty or
closed and filled depending on if start is done from
STAND STILL or STOPPING.
Processing in RUNNING:
• Could be closed or open.
Processing in CLEANING:
• A sequence of cleaning liquids should be fed to the
separator. The flow rate should be as high as possible
and preferably not less than the production flow rate.
Processing in NORMAL STOP or EMERGENCY STOP:
• Could be closed or open but the bowl should be filled
•
unless the stop is initiated in STARTING.
Processing in SAFETY STOP:
162
• Could be closed or open but the bowl shall be

filled unless the stop is initiated in STARTING.
• 206 Inlet for conditioning and displacement liquid

• According to process
220, 221 and 222 Outlets

Processing in STAND STILL:
• Could be closed or open.
Processing in other modes:

• Shall be open.
375 Inlet for discharge and make-up liquid

Processing in all modes:
• It is recommendable to supervise the supply
pressure. If pressure is too low (see Connection
List), start should be interlocked and if it happens
in PRODUCTION or CLEANING turn over to
STAND BY should take place.
• Signal processing in STARTING:

• Below 85 % of synchronous bowl speed no water
supply may be made.
• When coming from PRODUCTION a discharge

shall be initiated to remove sediments from bowl to
avoid problems due to solidification, see
Connection List.
Signal processing in PRODUCTION:

• Automatic discharges shall be initiated by timer or
ALCAP system.
Signal processing in CLEANING:
• Automatic discharges shall be initiated by timer or
CIP-control system.
Signal processing in NORMAL STOP:
• Discharges should not be made.
Signal processing in SAFETY STOP and
EMERGENCY STOP:
• • Discharges should not be made.
163
8.5 DEMAND SPECIFICATION WATER 8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE
8.5 Demand Specification

Water
Alfa Laval ret 574487 rov. 0
Poor quality ofthe operating water may with time cause erosion,
corrosion and! or operating problems. The water shall be treated
•
to meet certain demands.
The following requirements are of fundamental importance:
1 Turbidity-free water, solids content <0,001% by volume.

Max. particle size 50 ~m.
Deposits shall not be allowed to form in certain areas in the system.
2 Total hardness less than 180 mg CaC03 per litre, which corresponds
to 10 °dH or 12,5 °E. Hard water may with time form deposits in the
operating mechanism. The precipitation rate is accelerated with
increased operating temperature and low discharge frequency.
These effects become more severe the harder the water is.
3 Chloride content max. 100 ppm NaCI (equivalent to 60 mg Cl/I).
•
Chloride ions contribute to corrosion on surfaces in contact with the
operating water.Corrosion is a process that is accelerated by
increased separating temperature, low pH, and high chloride ion
concentration.
4 6,5 < pH < 9
Bicarbonate content (HC03) min. 70mg HC03 per litre, which
corresponds to 3,2 °dKH.
[NO~£J
Alfa Laval accepts no liability for consequences
arising from unsatisfactorily purified operating
water supplied by the customer.
•
164
8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE 8.6 DRAWINGS
8.6 Drawings
• 8.6.1 Basic size drawing

AIta Laval ref. 562820 rev. 3
1081 "39
1001 1036
. ,
E-
';5; / / '~5/
A
353
•
352 76'
36 36
28
~I
llVT~T 130
175.5
95.5
la
28 I~
~
~~~
52 109
61
~ I=L~ I G 1/ 17
-a ~
ISD-C J/4
1<7
100
Connection house. with connections 201, 220 and 221, turnable in 60 0 steps all around.
All connections to be installed non-loaded and flexible
All dimensions are nominal. Reservation for individual deviations due to tolerances.
Data for connection. see 8.3 Connection List. page 153.
A Tightening torque 160 Nm.

B Maximum horizontal displacement at the inlet and outlet
connections during operation ± 5 mm.
•
C Maximum vertical displacement at the sludge connection
during operation ± 2 mm.
D 2 holes M10. depth 30
E M10 depth 30
F 038. depth 55
G 022, depth 45
165
8.6 DRAWINGS 8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE
8.6.2 Foundation drawing

Alfa Laval ref. 562822 rev. 0
-~ f-·
2200
-'_·--·--1- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - , l
•
I '
I ,
I
I 800
I
I F
I
I, 1800: - -----:
,I l- I
I :
,I I
I
I
t -' __ J
I
I:! 15 I
: 300_m in.L_J
, I J_L _
I
I-~~-t-·
' + ~
415 I ,I
I i
(It)
------
-------_. ..
I
A ~ K
i ~G B L
~~/-~
146 I 608
_ _J
~I
292
I
B c
H
VV M
•
l-----"5""55::--_J
A Centre of separator bowl.

B Holes for foundation bolts (8x).
e Centre of motor.
D Min. Iitting capacity required during service: 300 kg.
E Max. height of largest component incl. Iitting tool.
F Service side.
G Foundation bolts.
H Installation according to stated foundation force.
I Recommended free floor space for unloading when
doing service.
.. No fixed installation within this area.
K Centre of gravity (complete machine).
L Vertical force not exceeding 16 kN/foot.
M Horizontal force not exceeding 16 kN/foot.
•
166
8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE 8.6 DRAWINGS
8.6.3 Interconnection diagram

• Alfa Lava'ret. 561786 rev. 5
Interlocking switch (frame top part)
Unbalance sensor (position trans.

"
for bearing holder).
Speed sensor (bowl speed).
Junction box
• •" ~ ~ ~ ~
•" ,
,g+
_ . _ . _ - - ~ - , - _ .
Wiring without
junction box
N
Wiring of connector "X": Wire colour codes:
~
J
----I
! Sy-l RD=A
BU=B
BK=Black
BN=Brown
Q
9 '-J 9 GN=C
YW=D
WT=E
BU=Blue
RD=Red
GN=Green
BK=F PU=Purple
BN=G YW=Yellow
PU=H WT =White
Demand specification wire

Approval: UL 1007/1569
CSA TA-64 Items showed in this document are not included in all
Area acc. to AWG 18 separators. See product specification.
•
167
8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE SEPARATOR MANUAL
8.6.4 Electric motor
•
Alfa Lava! ret. 562581 rev. 7
Knockout openings 2xM40 + M16 for

210 cable glands on both sides.
2xRI8 5
1575 R93 310 4 holes M12x24R5
...,"- 1345
t 1 110 89 84 210
I IMI6x36 L.__......+.,f-./_..::C::a::s;:ted lifting lugs
20 15
/465 85
Open The motor bearings are
210',14
/"
Note: Drain holes with
0
108 +02
254·,14 permanently lubricated
with grease Kluber
2875 310 Asonic HQ or
closable plugs to be
equivalent or better.
positioned at lowest 5025
point for IM2111
mounting position.
Closed
Manufacturer
Manuf. drawing
ABB Motors
Cat. BA/Marine mot.lGB 96-10

Type of mounting Degree of
protection
•
Standards IEC 34·series, 72, 79 and 85 IEC 34-7 IEC 34-5
Size 160MA
Type M3AA 160 MA

0 IM 2111 IP 55
Weight 73 kg
NOTE! Cast iron bearing shield in N-end
Poles 2
Insulation class F Rated output (kW) valid for temp_ rise max.
900 .
Bearings D-end 6309-2Z1C3
Cast iron bearing shield at N-end.
N-end 6209-2Z1C3 The motors can be provided with space heaters
Method of cooling IC 411 (IEC 34-6) for nov or 220V, 25W as option.
Spec. Totally enclosed three-phase
motor for marine service
Motor with feet and small flange.
For complete information about motor variants, please
External earthing: according to variant code 067 contact your Alfa Laval representative.
168 578704-02
•
9 Installation
•
9.1 Introduction
These installation specifications are valid
for the S 851 & S 856 separator.
The installation instructions are specifications,

which are compulsory requirements.
Any specific requirements from classification
societies or other local authorities must be
followed.
[NOTE]
If the specifications are not followed, Alfa Laval can
not be held responsible for any malfunctions related
to the installation.
•
171
9.2 UPON ARRIVAL AT THE STORAGE AREA 9 INSTALLATION
9.2 Upon Arrival At The

Storage Area
Ensure that the separator delivered is
suitable for the application.
•
9.2.1 Transport
a When lilting the separator. make sure that tools and

lifting devices are fastened securely. See chapter
6.8.1 Lifting the separator, page 142.
Crush hazards
Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting
instructions.
b When lifting the bowl see 6.8.2 Liiting the bowl, page
•
143.
c During transport of the separator. the in-

and outlet device. frame hood and bowl
must always be removed.
•
172
9 INSTALLATION 9.2 UPON ARRIVAL AT THE STORAGE AREA
9.2.2 Protection and storage of gods
• a The separator must be stored indoors at 5 -

55°C, if not delivered in a water-resistant
box, designated for outdoor storage.
The following protection products are b If there is a risk for water condensation, the
recommended: equipment must stand well ventilated and at
1 Anti-rust oil (Dinitrol 112 or equivalent) with long a temperature above dew point.
•
lasting effective treatment for external surfaces.
The oil should prevent corrosion attacks and
leaves a waxy surface.
2 Anti-rust oil (Dinitrol 40 or equivalent) is a thin
lubricant for inside protection. It gives a
lubricating transparent oil film.
3 Solvent, e.g. white spirit, to remove the anti-rust c If the storage time exceeds 12 months, the
oil after the storage period. equipment must be inspected every 6
4 Moist remover to be packed together with the months and, if necessary, the protection be
separator equipment. renewed.
•
173
9.3 PLANNING OF INSTALLATION 9 INSTALLATION
9.3 Planning of
Installation
9.3.1 Important measurements

•
I~
r - f·-·-·-·-·-·-·l"---·-·-·-·_·_--·-·-·-·-·--·-·-·-·-·-·---'---'-----------------1
i
; ,i
i i
i j
i
;
i
!
.;
i
i
;
i
.
1
i
i
i 1
i !
T
!j , -------------------E I
I I {I
i
i
:
I
:111
~--- -~~-~---.~ :1
,i "
l'
:!
•
i I
i
i
:
I
:1
IJ
i : :!
i :
i
I1
i
L~ ------------------[------J-:, i
i i
j --'I
J__ :..._0_._._._._._. . ._._._._. 0 ._._._._._. . .1
Important measurements are:

minimum lifting height for lifting bowl parts
shortest distance between driving motor and wall
space for control and operation
free passage for dismantling and assembly
space for maintenance work
space on floor for machine parts during maintenance
work
For more detailed information, see 8.6.1 Basic size drawing,

page 165 and 8.6.2 Foundation drawing, page 166.
•
174
9 INSTALLATION 9.3 PLANNING OF INSTALLATION
9.3.2 Maintenance service
•
o
~ ~p!
• A work bench should be installed in the separator room.
Hot water, compressed air and diesel oil should be available

near the work bench to make maintenance work easier.
An overhead hoist with capacity of 300 kg is required for

transport of bowl parts to the working bench. Lifting point should
be above the centre of the separator.
[N01'£J
When two or more separators are installed, the
lifting height should be increased to enable bowl
parts from one separator to be lifted and moved over
an adjoining separator.
See 8.6.2 Foundation drawing, page 166
•
175
9.3 PLANNING OF INSTALLATION 9 INSTALLATION
9.3.3 Connections to surrounding

equipment
Local safety regulations

If the local safety regulations prescribe that the
installation has to be inspected and approved by
SAFETY
REGULATIONS
•
responsible authorities before the plant is put
into service, consult with such authorities before
installing the equipment and have the projected
plant design approved by them.
Service media -------

Ensure that all service media (electric power, ~
t::: v L
operating and safety liquids etc.) required for the
separator have the correct quality and capacity. SEPARATOR
SERVICE
MANUAL
•
Sludge discharge tank
If the sediment from the separator is discharged
,if IT
~L ........_1. ..
into a tank, this tank must be sufficiently
ventilated. The connection between the
separator and the tank must be of the size and ..
-_ ... _._-- ... -_. - _. -- ._-_. _._. --- ---_._ .
configuration specified.
Ifthe solids are discharged from the separator ,= '=
bowl casing into a closed system, ensure that
this system cannot be overfilled or closed in such
c;:
a way that the solids cannot leave the bowl
casing. This could cause a hazardous situation.
~](~
•
176
9 INSTALLATION 9.4 STORAGE AT OUT OF OPERATION
9.4 Storage at out of

• operation
If the separator is out of operation for more
than 1 month:
1 Lift out the bowl.
2 Protect the spindle taper from corrosion by
lubricating it with oil.
3 Keep the separator and bowl well stored, dry
and protected from mechanical damage.
For details see 9.2.2 Protection and storage of
gods, page 173
9.5 Before start-up

If the separator has been out of operation for:
1 months or longer
• Pre-Iubricate the spindle bearings.
• 6 months or longer
• Perform an Inspection seNice. and make
sure to pre-Iubricate the spindle bearings.
• Change the oil before starting.
18 months or longer
• Perform an Overhaul service ~ and make
sure to pre-Iubricate the spindle bearings.
• Change the oil before starting.
•
177
,
PA Purifier System
Service Manual
• Printed
Book No.
May 2005
577190-02 Rev. 1
•
•
Published By:
AIfa Laval Tumba AB
SE-147 80 Tumba. Sweden
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00
Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40
@ A1fa Laval Tumba AB 30 May 2005

This publication or any part there of may not be reproduced or
transmitted by any process or means without prior written
permission of Alfa Laval Tumba AB.
•
Contents
• 1 Change of Circuit Board

1.1 Circuit Board Temperatures
5
.7
•
1810900-02
PA 605 PURIFIER SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL I CHANGE OF CIRCUIT BOARD
1 Change of Circuit Board
• If a circuit board has to be changed, proceed as

follows:
Note down the run time (days only) as shown in
the function list of the EPC 50.
Change the board according to the instructions
below.
Go to parameter Fa 90, and insert the run time.
OP-Board
• Switch power off.
• Remove the snap-in transparent cover.
• Disconnect the two cable plugs (do not
remove the cables from the plugs).
• Disconnect the flatcable connector at the top.
• Unscrew the five hexagon nuts.
• • Mount the new board, and connect in reverse

order.
I/O-Board
• Switch power off.
If there is no optional board installed:
• Disconnect all the cable plugs on the large
board (do not remove the cables from the
plugs).
• Unscrew the hexagon nuts. Take care to note
where the special nuts for optional board(s)
are located.
• Mount the new board, and connect in reverse
order.
• 5
577190-02
1 CHANGE OF CIRCUIT BOARD PA 605 PURIFIER SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL
If one or more optional board is installed:

•
•
•
Switch power off.
Disconnect the cable plug(s) on the optional
plug(s)).
Disconnect the flatcable connector at the top.

•
• Unscrew the three hexagon nuts.
• Note the position of the board and remove the

board.
• Disconnect all the cable plugs on the large

plugs).
• Unscrew the hexagon nuts. Take care to note

where the special nuts for optional board(s)
are located.
• Mount the new board in the same position as

the old, and connect in reverse order.
•
6 577190-02
PA 605 PURIFIER SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL 1 CHANGE OF CIRCUIT BOARD
1.1 Circuit Board
• Temperatures
Circuit board temperature information can be
read as follows:
• Set Pr 7 = 2.
• Push' +' and '-' at the same time ('Stands!'
now shows on the display).
• Push '-'
The actual temperature, max. temperature, and
the number of times the temperature has been
above 70°C for the transducer scrolls across the
display.
• For further circuit board temperatures, push
the '-' button.
• To leave the list push the' +' and the '-' buttons
at the same time.
• Reset Pr 7 = O.
•
577190-02 7
•
•
•
Spare parts catalogue, Reservdelskatalog, Ersatzleilkatalog, Catalogue de pieces de rechange, Varaosalueltelo,
Catalogue de plezas de recamblo, KaTaIlOr 3anaCHblX 'laCTel1, Catalogo parti di ricambio, Reservedelskatalog,
Catalogo de pecas sobressalentes, KQTQAOYOcr QVTaAAQKTlKWV, Reserveonderdelen-eatalogus
ProolJr.t Nn RR1 ?O4-O.'l-O?1?

•
•
AIfa Laval Tumba AB
Separator Manuals, dept PPDM
SE-147 80 Tumba, Sweden
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00
Telefax: +46 8 530 31040
Printed in Sweden, 05-02
o Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2005
•
This publication or any part thereof may not be
reproduced or transmitted by any process or
means without prior written permission of
Alfa Laval Tumba AB.
3
1 Read this first
1 Read this first
•
===
===
-==
-
M
L- -==-__-==-- -'I
~ The name plate - the guide for finding the correct spare part numbers.
L:::.:.....J See also Warnings in chapter "1.1 General information" on page 7.
r-;;J Maskinskylten - en guide till det ratta reservdelsnumret.
L.::..J
•
Se aven Varningar i kapitel "1.1 Allman information" pa sidan 8.
(d;l Das Typenschild - ein Hinweis zur korrekten Ersatzteilnummer.
L..::J Siehe auch Warnhinweise in Kapitel "1.1 AlIgemeine Informationen" auf Seite 9.
If:I La plaque de la machine - un guide pour trouver le numero de piece de rechange correct.
~ Voir a ce propos les mises en garde du chapitre "1.1 Informations generales" en page 1O.
r;;t La placa-marca de la maquina - guia del numero correcto del repuesto. Consulte tambien las
L.::...J Advertencias del capitulo "1.1 Informaci6n General" en la pagina 11.
~ <!>j,1pMeHHaA Ta6Jlj,14Ka MaWj,1Hbl - yKasaTeJlb npaBj,1JlHoro HOMepa sanacHo~ 4aCTj,1.
L:.J CM. TaK)I(e npeAynpe)l(AeHj,1A B maBe "1.1 06111j,1e CBeAeHj,1A" Ha CTpaHj,1l..le 12.
~ La targhetta della macchina - guida al corretto numero dei ricambi.

~ Vedere anche le Awertenze nel capitolo "1.1 Informazioni generali" a pagina 13.
rptl
A placa do fabricante da maquina - um guia do numero correto das partes sobressalentes.
~ Consultar tambem os Avisos no capitulo "Informa<;:iio Geral 1.1" da pagina 14.
r-J:I Konekilpi - opastin oikeaan varaosanumeroon.

~ Katso my6s kappaleessa 1.1 sivulla 15 olevaa kohtaa "Yleiset tiedot ".
~ H TlLvaK(5a TI]<; IJl]xavile; dVaL 0 o51]y6e; TOU OWOTOU aVTaAAaKnKou. L\.e:lu: £n(OI]e; ne;
~ npo£l50noLT;O£le; TOU K£<paAa(ou "1.1 fENIKEL nAHPO<l>OPIEr", OTI] O£A(5a 16.
I:jI Het gegevensplaatje - een wegwijzer naar het juiste onderdeelnummer.

~ Zie ook Waarschuwingen in hoofdstuk "1.1 Algemene informatie", op blz. 17.
• 'd:I Typeskiltet - en guide til det rette reservedelsnummer.

~ Se ogsii under Advarsler i kapitel "1.1 Generelle oplysninger" pa side 18.
5
1 Read this first
1.1 General information
• Safeguard your commitment to quality by always using genuine

Alfa Laval spare parts.
Remember, Alfa Laval cannot accept responsibility for the failure of a
separator equipped with non-original spare parts. We guarantee the
quality and reliability of our products.
Lh WARNINGS
When changing certain parts in the separator bowl assembly, the

vibration level may increase. This can result in shorter life time of
components like rolling bearings and gears. If severe unbalance
occurs, the rotating bowl assembly can come into contact with the
•
frame causing damage to equipment and injuries to personnel.
It is strongly recommended that the exchange of parts is
supervised by an Alfa Laval service engineer. Alfa Laval
assumes no liability for damage to property or injury to personnel
resulting from unauthorized installation of those parts.
Lh WARNINGC
Certain bowl parts carry milling marks from the balancing of the
complete separator bowl. These parts must not be replaced
without rebalancing the complete bowl. The rebalancing should
be made by an Alfa Laval service shop.
•
7
5851
Folj ditt kvalitetstankande genom att endast anvanda Alfa Laval

originalreservdelar.
Kom ihag att Alfa Laval inte tar nagot ansvar for fel pa en separator
•
som innehaller icke-originaldelar. Vi garanterar kvaliteten och
driftsakerheten hos vara egna produkter.
6 VARNINGB
Om vissa delar i separatorkulan byts ut, kan vibrationsnivan

komma att oka. Detta kan i sin tur leda till forkortad livslangd pa
t.ex. lager och vaxlar. Om kraftiga vibrationer uppstar, kan den
roterande kulan komma att sla i stativets delar, vilket kan medfora
allvarlig maskin- och personskada. Det ar darfor av stor vikt att
utbyte av kulans delar overvakas av en serviceingenjor fran
•
Alfa Lava/. Alfa Laval tar inget ansvar for maskin- eller
personskador som kan uppkomma pa grund av att delar bytts ut
av icke auktoriserad personal.
6 VARNINGC
Vissa av separatorkulans delar har urfrasta spar som resultat av

balansering av hela kulan. Dessa delar kan inte bytas ut utan att
en ombalansering av kulan gors. For att basta resultat ska
uppnas, ska den kompletta kulan sandas till en Alfa Laval
serviceverkstad for ombalansering.
•
8
1 Read this first
• (B
Sichern Sie sich Ihren Anspruch aUf Qualitat durch ausschlieBliche
Verwendung von original Alfa Laval Ersatzteilen.
Beachten Sie bitle, daB Alfa Laval keine Verantwortung fOr den Ausfall
eines Separators Obernimmt, der mit Nicht-Originalteilen ausgestatlet
ist. Wir garantieren fOr die Qualitat und Zuverlassigkeit unserer
Produkte.
~ WARNUNGB
Durch den Austausch bestimmter Teile in der Separatortrommel-

Baugruppe, kann ihr Schwingungspegel steigen. Dies kann zu
einer kOrzeren Lebensdauer von Teilen, wie z.6. Walzlagern und
Getrieben, fOhren. Bei einer schweren Unwucht kann die
rotierende Trommelbaugruppe in Kontakt mit dem Gestell kom-
men, was zu 6eschadigungen der AusrOstung oder Personenver-
•
letzungen fOhren kann. Es wird dringend empfohlen, den
Austausch von einem Alfa Laval Service-Ingenieur beauf-
sichtigen zu lassen. Alfa Laval Obernimmt keine Haftung fOr
eine Geratebeschiidigung oder Personenverletzung aufgrund
einer ungenehmigten Montage dieser Teile.
~ WARNUNGC
Bestimmte Trommelteile haben Frasmarken vom Auswuchten der

kompletlen Separatortrommel. Diese Teile dOrfen nicht ohne eine
Neuauswuchtung der kompletlen Trommel ausgetauscht werden.
Die Neuauswuchtung sollte in einer Alfa Laval Service-werkstatl
erfolgen.
•
9
5851
Respectez votre engagement de qualite en utilisant toujours des

pieces de rechange d'origine Alia Laval.
Attention, Alia Laval decline toute responsabilite en cas de panne d'un
•
separateur equipe de pieces de rechange qui ne sont pas d'origine.
Nous garantissons la qualite et la liabilite de nos produits.
~ AVERTISSEMENT B
Le remplacement de certaines pieces du bol du separateur

risque d'augmenter le niveau de vibrations, et donc de reduire la
duree de vie des composants tels que les paliers a roulements et
les engrenages. En cas de desequilibre trap important, le bol en
rotation risque d'entrer en contact avec des pieces du bati,
provoquant ainsi des deteriorations de I'equipement et des
a
•
blessures du personnel. Nous vous incitons lortement laire
realiser le remplacement sous la surveillance d'un technicien
de maintenance AlIa Laval. Alia Laval n'assume aucune
responsabilite en cas de deterioration du materiel ou de blessure
du personnel resultant d'une installation non approuvee de ces
pieces.
~ AVERTISSEMENT C
Certaines pieces du bol presentent des marques de reperage

effectuees lors de I'equilibrage du bol du separateur. 11 ne laut pas
remplacer ces pieces sans avoir au prealable procede un a
nouvel equilibrage de I'ensemble du bol. Cet equilibrage doit etre
realise dans un atelier de reparation Alia Laval.
•
10
1 Read this first
• B
Proteja su compromiso con la calidad utilizando siempre repuestos
originales AlIa Lavai.
Recuerde que AlIa Laval no acepta ninguna responsabilidad por el
lallo de una separadora equipada con repuestos no originales.
AlIa Laval garantiza la calidad y la fiabilidad de sus productos.
~ ADVERTENCIA B
Cuando se cambian ciertas piezas del conjunto del rotor de la

separadora, puede que se produzca un aumento del nivel de
vibraciones, 10 que puede provocar un desgaste de algunos com-
ponentes, como los rodamientos de rodillos y los engranajes. Si
se produce un desequilibrado importante, el conjunto del rotor en
movimiento puede rozar con el bastidor, causando serios danos
•
al equipo y al personal. Se recomienda encarecidamente que el
cambio sea supervisado por un tecnico de mantenimiento de
Alfa Laval. Alfa Laval no se hace responsable de los danos
materiales 0 danos personales provocados por la instalaci6n no
autorizada de esas piezas.
~ ADVERTENCIA C
Algunas piezas del rotor lIevan marcas estampadas para el

equilibrado del rotor completo de la separadora. Siempre que se
cambien estas piezas se debe equilibrar de nuevo todo el rotor,
operaci6n que debe ser realizada por un experto de un centro de
servicio AlIa Lavai.
•
11
5851
AnA 06eCne4eHl-tA Ka4eCTBa pa60Tbl Bawero 060pY,QOBaHl-tA

l-tCnOnbayi1Te TOnbKO nO.Qnl-tHHble aanaCHble ,QeTanl-t KOMnaHl-tl-t
AlIa Lava!.
•
nOMHl-tTe: KOMnaHl-tA AlIa Laval He HeceT OTBeTCTBeHHOCTb aa
HapyweHl-tA pa60Tbl cenapaTopa, Ha KOTOpOM yCTaHoBneHbl He
nO.Qnl-tHHble aanaCHble ,QeTanl-t. Mbl rapaHTl-tpyeM Ka4eCTBO l-t
Ha,Qe)l(HOCTb Hawei1 npO,QyKlll-tl-t.
nPEAynPE>K,QEHl1E B
B cnY4ae aaMeHbl HeKOTopblX 4acTei1 yCTpoi1cTBa 6apa6aHa

cenapaTopa MO)l(eT nOBbICl-tTbCA ypoBeHb Bl-t6palll-tl-t.8TO MO)l(eT
npl-tBeCTl-t K COKpal!1eHl-t1O cpOKa cn~6bl KOMnOHeHTOB, TaKl-tX
KaK nO,QWl-tnHl-tKl-t l-t npl-tBO,Q. B cnyYae aHa4l-tTenbHOro
,Ql-tC6anaHca, yCTpOi1CTBO Bpal!1alOl!1erOCA 6apa6aHa MO>KeT
BOi1Tl-t B KOHTaKT co CTaHl-tHoi1, 4TO npl-tBe,QeT K cepbeaHoMy
•
nOBpe>K,QeHl-t1O 060pY,QOBaHl-tA l-t TpaBMaM 06CnY>Kl-tBalOl!1erO
nepCOHana. HacToATenbHo peKOMeH,QyeTcA, 4T06bl aaMeHa
6blna npOKOHTponMpOBaHa MHlKeHepOM no 06cnYlKMBaHMIO
KOMnaHMM AlIa Laval. KOMnaHl-tA AlIa Laval He HeceT Hl-tKaKoi1
OTBeTCTBeHHOCTl-t aa nOBpe)l(,QeHl-tA co6CTBeHHOCTl-t l-tnl-t
TpaBMbl nepCOHana B peaynbTaTe HepaapeweHHoi1 yCTaHOBKl-t
3Tl-tX ,QeTanei1.
nPEAynPE>KAEHl1E C
Ha HeKoTopblX 4aCTAX 6apa6aHa nOCTaBneHbl OTMeTKl-t nocne

6anaHCl-tpOBKl-t 6apa6aHa cenapaTopa nonHOCTblO. 8Tl-t 4aCTl-t
He MOryT 6blTb aaMeHeHbl 6ea nOBTopHoi1 6anaHCl-tpOBKl-t Bcero
yCTpoi1CTBa 6apa6aHa cenapaTopa. nOBTopHaA 6anaHCl-tpOBKa
,QomKHa 6blTb npOl-taBe,QeHa B peMOHTHOM lleHTpe AlIa Lava!.
•
12
1 Read this first
• 0
Salvaguardate la qualita del vostro separatore utilizzando sempre
ricambi originali Alia Lava!.
Ricordate che la Alia Laval non accetta alcuna responsabilita in caso

di diletti al separatore dovuti all'utilizzo di ricambi non originali. La
Alia Laval garantisce la qualita e I'affidabilita esclusivamente dei
propri prodotti.
Lh AVVERTENZA B
In seguito alia sostituzione di alcune parti del tamburo del separa-

tore, illivello di vibrazioni pub aumentare. Questo pub comportare
la riduzione della vita utile di componenti quali cuscinetti a rulli ed
ingranaggi. In caso di elevato spostamento, il tamburo pUb
entrare a contatto con le parti del telaio provocando seri danni
all'attrezzatura e lesioni alle persone. Si raccomanda caldamente
•
di lar controllare la sostituzione da un tecnico di assistenza
AlIa Lava!. La Alia Laval non assume alcuna responsabilita per
danni alle cose 0 lesioni al personale dovuti all'installazione non
autorizzata delle suddette parti.
Lh AVVERTENZA C
Alcune parti del tamburo dipendono dal bilanciamento comples-

sivo del tamburo del separatore. Le suddette parti non possono
essere sostituite senza procedere ad un nuovo bilanciamento.
Per ottenere i migliori risultati, rivolgersi ad un centro assistenza
Alia Laval per il ribilanciamento dell'intero gruppo.
•
13
5851
Preserve 0 seu compromisso com a qualidade utilizando sempre

peyas originais AlIa Lava!.
Nao se esqueya de que a AlIa Laval nao assume quaisquer

•
responsabilidades pela avaria dum separador que nao esteja
equipado com peyas originais. Por isso, asseguramos a garantia da
qualidade e liabilidade dos nossos produtos.
6 AVISOB
Ao mudar determinadas peyas no conjunto do rotor da separa-

dora, podera provocar um aumento da vibrayao. Tal podera origi-
nar a reduyiio do tempo de durayao dos componentes, tais como
rolamentos de roletes e engrenagens. Caso se verilique um
desequilfbrio acentuado, 0 conjunto do rotor girat6rio podera
entrar em contacto com a estrutura, vindo a provocar danos no
•
equipamento e lerimentos pessoais. Recomenda-se vivamente
que a sUbstituiyao de peyas seja vistoriada por um tecncico de
servic;:o da Alfa Lava!. A AlIa Laval nao assume qualquer
responsabilidade por danos em bens ou lerimentos pessoais
resultantes da instalayiio nao autorizada daquelas peyas.
6 AVISOC
Determinadas partes do rotor contem marcas de atrito do bal-

anceamento do rotor do separador completo. Estas peyas nao
devem ser substitufdas sem reequilibrar 0 rotor completo.
o reequilibro deve ser executado por uma centro de assistencia
AlIa Lava!.
•
14
1 Read this first
• 0
Varmista kiiyttiimiesi tuotteiden laatu kiiyttiimiillii aina aitoja ja
alkuperiiisiii Alia Laval -varaosia.
Muista, ettei Alia Laval voi vastata sellaisen separaattorin
toimintahiiiri6stii, jossa on kiiytetty muita kuin alkuperiiisiii varaosia.
Me takaamme omien tuotteidemme laadun ja luotettavuuden.
& VAROITUSB
Kun separaattorin kuula-asennelman tiettyjii osia vaihdetaan, sen

tiiriniin taso voi kasvaa. Tiimii voi johtaa joidenkin osien, kuten
vierintiilaakereiden ja hammasvaihteiden, kiiytt6iiin Iyhenemi-
seen. Jos asennelma joutuu pahasti epiitasapainoon, py6rivii
kuula-asennelma voi koskettaa runkoa ja aiheuttaa laite- ja henki-
16vahinkoja. Suosittelemme, ettii Alfa Lavalin huoltoinsinoori
•
valvoo vaihtoa. Alia Laval ei ota vastuuta omaisuudelle tai henki-
16kunnalle aiheutuneista vahingoista, mikiili ne johtuvat niiiden
osien viiiirin suoritetusta asennuksesta.
& VAROITUSC
Tietyissii kuulan osissa on merkinniit koko separaattorikuulan

tasapainotuksesta. Niiitii osia ei saa vaihtaa ilman, ettii koko
kuula tasapainotetaan. Tasapainotus on annettava Alia Laval -
korjaamon hoidettavaksi.
•
15
5851
L':.laCJ<paA1CJTE TT] otCJ~EUCJ!i CJae; yLa nOLOTT]Ta xpT]CJL~OnOLWVme;

naVTOTE yv!iCJLa aVTai\i\aKTLKa Alfa Lava!.
Lae; unEv8u~1~ou~E OTL T] Alfa Laval liEV avai\a~l3avEl EU8livT] yLa

•
TT] l3i\al3T] lilQXWpLCJT!ipa nou liEV Eivm E!;oni\LCJ~tvoe; ~E aU8EVTLKa
aVTai\i\aKTLKa. Eyyuw~aCJTE TT]V nOLOTT]Ta Km TT]V a!;lonLCJTla TWV
npo"iovTwv ~ae;.
npOI:OXH B
OTav aAi\a~ETE OplCJ~tva E!;apT!i~aTa CJTO CJuerTT]~a TOU

TU~navou TOU lilaxwplerT!ipa, T] CJTa8~T] Kpaliaer~wv ~nopEi va
au1;T]8Ei. AUTO ~nopEi va tXEl CJav anoTti\Eer~a ~LKPOTEPT]
liuipKEla ~w!ie; TWV E!;apTT]~aTwV, onwe; poui\E~av Km
ypava~La. LE nEpinTWCJfJ CJol3ap!ie; tMEL41T]e; ~uyoerTa8~LerT]<;,
TO nEplerTpE<pO~EVO CJUcrTT]~a TOU Tu~navou ~nopEi va ti\8El
•
erE Ena<p!i ~E TO ni\aiCJLO, npOKaAWVTae; ~T]~Lte; erTo ~T]xaVT]~a
Km TpaU~aTLer~o TOU npOCJWnLKOU. Ol onolEcrl>!inon:
aAAayEe; E!;apTT]~ciTWV npEnEl va YlVOVTal uno TllV
&nijli\&IjIll ~l1xaVlKOU Tile; Alfa Lava!. H Alfa LavalliEV <ptPEL
Ka~~ia Eu8uvT] YlQ ui\lKte; ~T]~Lte; !i YlQ TpaU~aTLer~o TOU
npocrWnLKOU i\oywTono8tTT]CJT]<; aUTWV TWV E!;apTT]~CITWV ano
~T] E1;oUerLOlioTT]~tvaaTo~a.
npOI:OXH C
Opler~tva E!;apT!i~aTa TOU Tu~navou <ptpouv iXVT]

<PPE~apier~aTOe; ana TT] ~uyoCJTa8~lerT] Oi\OKi\T]POU TOU
CJlJCJT!i~aToe; TOU Tu~navou TOU lilaxwpLerT!ipa. AUTO Ta
E1;apTJi~aTa liEV nptnEl va aVTLKamerTa80Uv xwpie; va
!;avaYlvEl ~uyoerTo8~LCJfJ OAOKi\T]POU TOU erUCJT!i~aTOC; TOU
Tu~novou TOU lilaxwpLCJT!ipa. H Enava~uyoerTo8~lerT] nptnEl
va yiVEL erE KonOLO ano Ta EnLerKEUaerTLKO KtvTpa TT]e;
Alfa Lava!.
•
16
1 Read this first
• Doe geen concessies aan kwaliteit en gebruik altijd originele

Alia Laval-reserveonderdelen.
Wij wijzen u erop, dat Alia Laval geen veranlwoordelijkheid kan
aanvaarden voor delecten aan een separator die is uitgerust met niet-
originele reserveonderdelen. Wij garanderen de kwaliteit en de
betrouwbaarheid van onze producten.
~ WAARSCHUWING B
Als er bepaalde onderdelen van de separatortrommel worden

vervangen, kan het trillingsniveau veranderen. Dit kan leiden tot
een verkorte levensduur van onderdelen als rollagers en tandwie-
len. Als er sprake is van een ernstige mate van onbalans, kan de
roterende trommel in contact komen met het Irame, wat kan lei-
den tot ernstige schade aan goederen 01 tot persoonlijk letsel.
•
Het is dan ook ten sterkste aan te raden om onderdelen te laten
vervangen onder supervisie van een onderhoudstechnicus
van Alfa Laval. Alia Laval aanvaardt geen enkele aansprakelijk-
heid voor schade aan goederen 01 persoonlijk letsel als gevolg
van onoordeelkundige installatie van die onderdelen.
~ WAARSCHUWING C
Op bepaalde onderdelen van de trammel zitten Ireesmarkeringen

van het uitbalanceren van de gehele separatortrommel. Deze
anderdelen mogen niet worden vervangen zonder dat de gehele
trommel opnieuw wordt uitgebalanceerd. Het opnieuw uitbal-
anceren moet gebeuren in een onderhoudswerkplaats van
Alia Laval.
•
17
5851
Beskyt din investering i kvalitet ved altid at anvende originale

reservedele fra Alfa Laval.
Husk at Alfa Laval piltager sig intet ansvar for fejl i separatorer, der er
•
udslyret med uoriginale reservedele. Vi indestilr for vore produkters
kvalitet og driftssikkerhed.
~ ADVARSELB
Ved udskiftning af visse dele i separatorkuglen, kan vibrations-

niveauet blive fOr0get. Delte kan forkorte levetiden for komponen-
ter som kuglelejer og tandhjul. I tilfrelde af kraftige vibrationer kan
den roterende separatorkugle komme i kontakt med rammedele,
hvilket kan medfore alvorlig beskadigelse af udslyr og person-
skade. Det anbefales pil det kraftigste, at udskiftningen sker
under tilsyn at en servicetekniker tra Alta Lava!. Alfa Laval
piltager sig intet ansvar for ting- eller personskade som folge af
ikke-autoriseret montering af disse dele.
•
~ ADVARSELC
Visse kugledele er forsynet med mrerker fra afbalanceringen af

den samlede separatorkugle. Ved udskiftning af disse dele skal
der foretages en ny afbalancering af den samlede kugleenhed.
Afbalanceringen bar foretages af et Alfa Laval-servicecenter.
•
18
1 Read this first
1.2 Translation list
•
Oversiittningslista
Ubersetzungsliste
Liste de traduction
Lista de traducciones
G G G 0 G
Part no. Reservdelsnummer Teil-Nr. Numero de piece Plaza No.
QIy Antal Anzahl Quantite Cantidad

-
Description Benamning Bezelchnung Denomination Descripcion
Notes Anmarkningar Anmerkungen Remarques Notas
Machine type Maskinlyp Maschinentyp Type de machine Tipo de maquina
Product no. Produktnr Produktnummer Numero de produit Numero de producto
•
Machine unit Maskinblocksbenamning Bezeichnung des Denomination de partis Descrlpci6n de secci6n
description Maschinenblocks de machine de la maquina
Machine unit no. Maskinblocksnr Maschinenblock Nr. Partle de machine ne No. de secci6n de
maquina
Subassembly Undergruppsbenamning Bezeichung der Denomination de Descripcion de

description Untergruppe sous-ensemble subconjunto
Subassembty no. Undergruppsnr Untergruppe Nr. N9 de sous-ensemble Numero de subconjunto
Seepage Se sidan Siehs Seite Voir page Vease la pagina
Fig. reI. Figurha.nvisning Bildhinweise Ref. de fig. Referenc!a de figura
Product name Produktnamn Produktnama Nom du produit Nombre del producto
EXchange necessitates Utbyte nOdvandlggor Austausch eriordert Le remplacement Et raembia rsquiers 81

rebalanclng of bowl ombalansering av kulan Wiederauswuchtung der n~cessite le reequilibrado del rotor
Trammel reequilibrage du 001
see separate spare Se saparat Siehs separate Voir Iiste separee des Vease la Iista de plazas
parts list reservdelslista Ersatzteilliste pieces de rechange separada
Not delivered as spare Levereras ej som Nicht als Ersatzteil Non Iivre comme piece No se entrega como
part reservdel geliefert de rechange pieza de recambio
•
19
5851
Translation list
CnOBapb nepeBAa
Lista traduzioni
Lista para traduc;:ao
Kaannosluttelo •
G G GJ 0 0
Part no. .QeTanb NI! Nr. parte Numero de peca Varaosanumero
Qly Kon-ao Quantita Quantidade Lukumaara

...
Description Ha~MeHOBIDn1e Descrizlone Oescricao Nimitys
Notes npYlMeLIaH~R Note Notas Huomautuksia
Machine type MawHHa THna Tipo macchlna Tlpo de maquina Konetyyppi
Product no. Apnu<yn N!! Nr.produUo No. do produto Tuotteen no
Machine unit
description
Machine unit no.
Subassembly
HaHMBHOBaHHB 6noK8
MaWYlHbI
6noK M8WHHbI N2
HaHM9HoBaJU19 rpynnbl
Descrlzione unita
macchina
Nr. unita macchina
Descrizlone sottogruppo
Descricao
maquina
eta unktade da
Numero de unidade da
maquina
Descriao do subconjunto
Koneenosan nlrnitys
Koneenosan no
Alaryhman nimitys
•
description
Subassembly no. rpynna N!i! Nr. sottogruppo Numero de subconjunto Alaryhman no
See page CM. CTpaHliILtY Vedi pagina Vease la pagina Ks sivu
Fig. ref. CCblflKa Ha 3CKIiI3 Rn. fig. Referencia de figura Kuvavllte
Product name HalilMeHoeaHlile Name prodotto Nombre del producto Tuotteen nimi
apnll<yna
Exchange necessitates 3aMeHa Tpe6yeT La sostituzione comporta El racmblo requlers el Vaihdettaessa kuula
rebalancing of bowl 6anaHclilpoBKIiI6apa6aHa la iequilibratura del reequilibrado del rotor tasapalnoitettava
tamburo uudelleen
See separate spare CM.oTAenbHblM Vedllista separata delle V~se la Ilsta de plezas Katso erillista
parts list nepe'-leHb aanacHblX parti dl ricambio separada varaosaluetteloa
yaCTeM
Not delivered as spare He nOCTaBJ1eHa BM9CTe c Non fornito come parte di No se entrega como Ei toimiteta varaosana
•
part aanaCHblMIiI 4aCTAMIiI ricambio pieza de recambio
20
1 Read this first
Translation list
• rAOUAPI
Vertaallijst
Overscettelseliste
G 0 0 ~
Part no. Aple~6c: QVTaAi\OKTlKOU Onderdeelnr. Reservedelsnummer
Qty LWOi\O Hoeveelheid Antal
Description ne:plypa~T1 Beschrijving Betegnelse
Notes napoTnpf)ae:l<; Opmerkingen Bemaerkninger
Machine type Tun~ I-I'lXQVfU..IQToc; Machinetype Maskinlype
Product no. APl81-16c; npoi6vTOC; Produktnr. Produktnr.
•
Machine unit nCplvpacpf} Machineblokbenaming Maskinbetegnelse
description auyKpon'U.lQToc; l..l11XoVTic;
Machine·unlt no. APl81JIX: aUyKponilJQTOc; Machineblokbenamning Maskinnr.

-- IJTlXoVlic:
Subassembly nE:plypOq:lTl Subgroepbenamning Undergruppsbetegnelse

description unoauyKpornl..lQToc;
Subassembly no. Aple~6~ Subgroepnr. Undergruppenr.

unoouyKponil..lQToc;
See page BM ne: a£i\loo Zieblz. Se side
-
Rg. ref. napanolJmi OE; £lK6VQ Afb. ref. Figurhenvisning
Product name Ov0lJoa(a npotoVTOC; Produktnaam Produktnavn
Exchange necessitates AVTOAAoyri anone;( Vervangning vereist Udskriftning kraever ny

rebalanclng of bowl EnavappU9IJlOTl herbalanceren van de afbalcering a1 kuglen
tooppon(oc: TOO kogel
njl-movou
See. separate spare BMnE £ll)lKn AlOTO Vervangning vereist van Se spaat reselVedelsliste
parts list OVTOAAOKTlKWV de kogel
,
Not delivered as spare l1e:v nopa(5(ocTOl WC; Niel geleverd als Levereres ikke som
part OVTOAAOKTlKO reserveonderdeel reservedel
•
21
5851
2 Machine bottom part
Ref Part No Description -01

Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
563440-
Quantity
Notes
•
1 562272 80 Frame bottom part 1
2 560131 03 Frame support 4
3 70490 Washer 4
4 2210462 32 Screw 4
5 552766 07 Washer 2
6 526350 04 Plug 1
8 563441 01 Bottom bearing holder 1
9 2234121 40 Q-ring 1
10 562503 01 Strainer 1
11 562092 02 Wing insert 1
12 221706 01 Screw 1
13 223412 17 Q-rlng 1
14 562506 01 labyrinth ring holder 1
15 562507 02 Labyrinth ring 1
16 223412 26 0- rin 9 1
17 221716 23 Screw 2
18 563442 80 Driving device vertical 1 See page 24
19 221726 01 Screw 3
20 562389 80 Neck bearing cover 1
20A 221711 18 SCrew 1
21 223412 51 0- rin 9 1
22 566788 02 Seal ring 2
23 565048 04 Deflector ring 1
•
24 223406 24 O-ring 2
25 560202 02 Pipe 1
26 223404 20 0- rin 9 1
27 539418 02 Elbow 1
28 526352 06 Bushing 1
29 564869 02 Operating water cover 1
30 566788 07 Seal ring 1
31 223101 35 Washer 3
32 221045 29 Screw 3
33 566718 B3 Monitoring kit 1
33A 562703 80 Sensor with support 1
33 AA 562702 02 Sensor support 1
33A8 552042 01 Inductive sensor 1
338 552870 41 Tube gland, angle 90° 1
33C 556416 13 Protective tube 1
330 566692 80 Junction box 1
34 223404 22 Q-ring 1
35 221716 23 Screw 1
36 561773 03 Plug 1
37 74667 O-ring 1
38 221716 23 Screw 1
39 562510 02 Front casing 1
40 221716 02 Screw 4
42 223404 05 0- rin 9 1
43 565378 01 Plug 1
44 571743 80 Oil pin 1
45 223412 51 O-ring 1
46 221045 09 Screw 2
47 17812 Screw 2
•
22
2 Machine bottom part
• 26
25
=
'--=--:::;;;;;:e~J-- 31
_~~==1--45
'-1--- 32
(":§I"p:.~')-+---
29
24
23
27----;;:::tJ =»-,-+--- 22
28----.f ,:::::: ~ 20
, . 21
---4:""C:---_ 20A
~'-----19
+----18
-----..- - - 1 7
~=3>'r----14
~~'5----16
)-----15
A
-----11
•
>-----13
1-----8
c~::>'-----9
I 10
5 43
~,J--44
42
36 'n--- 5
6
~~~~~~3~3~AA~. 338
33A8 }
33A 33
;;;
A
35
1
40
• 39
23
5851
2.1 Driving device vertical
ReI Part No Description -80

563442-
Quantity
Notes
•
1 562489 01 Bowl spindle 1
2 548747 11 Single row bait bearing 1
3 565111 80 Top bearing seat 1
3A 222512 39 Rivet 2
4 66366 Retaining ring 1
5 565112 02 Top bearing hOllsing 1
6 562109 06 Helical spring 3
7 562493 01 Composite spring 6
8 562494 01 Plug 6
9 564155 01 Spindle pUlley 1
10 548744 05 Self-align roller bearing 1
11 564765 02 lubrication oil orifice 1 --
12 223406 25 a-ring 1
13 563447 01 Oil pump 1
-
14 565052 02 Fan 1
15 -
562498 01 Air deflector 1
16 221045 02 SCrew 3
17 223406 24 O-ring 2
•
24
2.1 Driving device vertical 2 Machine bottom part
•
~~----17
~ 14
,
~i~ 4
1------1
i
8----2
~§)c_____--3
• ~~~--5
!::-----6
,--,--7
~-8
1-----15
vt----16
'S-~'--9
I
~----10
tiff 11
W ~~
•
25
5851
3 Separator bowl
Ref Part No Description -04

562200-
Quantity
Notes
•
1 562139 80 Bowl body 1 c
1A 562205 01 Guide lug 1
1B 68564 Guide pin 1
2 560636 08 Rectangular ring 1
3 562149 01 Operating slide 1
4 545869 03 Nozzle 0 1,5 mm 1
6 565308 01 Valve plug 3
7 576398 01 Holder 1
8 576173 02 Hexagon head screw 15
8.1 576279 01 Lock washer 9
9 546198 83 ()'ring 1
10 572305 01 Operating water ring 1
11 260104 93 ()'ring 1
12 566543 01 Discharge slide 1
14 562214 01 Nul 1
15 563506 60 Distributor 1 B
16 562194 81 Bowl disc 89
16.1 562194 81 Bowl disc 2
17 563494 02 Top disc 1 B
19 562154 01 Bowl hood 1 C
20 562374 01 Seal ring 1
•
21 548198 84 ().ring 1
22 562353 80 Lock ring 1
23 562215 01 Cap nul 1
24 544311 12 ().ring 1
25 566788 17 Seal ring 1
26 562194 02 Bowl disc 1
~=
B+C
•
26
3 Separator bowl
• ~~~7'------22
~_di\-----19
C_==----'. _J
--~.
20
~----21
!l,,,\------17
26
'"'=>' ' . . - - - - - -
1-------16
16.1
1-------15
• 23
14
12
13
11
1A
1
1B
6~~~=
2
9
~-i .~l------ 3
4
5
-", . 24
7
; t---:==8. 1
8
~;;
~~------ 10
• t;------- 8
25
27
5851
4 Inlet and outlet device
Re' Part No Description -01

563323-
Quantity
Notes
•
1 563324 80 Inlet and outlet pipe complete 1
3 223403 56 Q·ring 2
4 565953 80 Paring tube 1
4A 565953 02 Paring tube 1
4B 566408 04 Plain bearing bushing 2
7 563318 01 Splash sealing 1
8 566284 02 Support ring 1
9 562307 01 Height adjusUng ring 5
10 562309 80 Frame hood 1
lOA 562308 01 Spring holder 1
lOB 561960 02 Support sleeve 1
10C 221711 09 SCrew 1
100 221716 09 Screw 1
11 221036 02 Screw 4
14 568533 80 Arm 1
15 566407 04 Spring 1
16 223406 32 Q-ring 2
17 223406 29 D-rlng 2
18 563458 80 Connecting housing complete 1
18A 221721 13 SCrew 1 . . ..
19 562310 01 Washer 1
20 562343 01 Locking nut 1
24 561389 82 Purifier screw 1
•
25 546095 66 O·rlng 1
26 223101 35 Washer 6
27 221046 31 SCrew 6
28 221711 02 Screw 1
•
28
4 Inlet and outlet device
• @--------
I
~
20
19
,,,
, '<J!J----- 18A
'- --
1~24
10
1]
I-~
I
~I~
~14
28
•
C5.I2;)
~
~ t------9
~
~t---------8
17-====----S"
_ lJ--_~l 4
16---===~=;;j. 3S
iT,-_Y==-3
I
'~ 0"-
~
,;:g,
• 7 r-----1
29
5851
5 Belt driving device
Ref Part No Description -01 -02
j,
574591-
Quantity
Notes
•
50Hz
60Hz j,
1 562522 01 Cover support 1 1
2 221045 02 Screw 4 4
3 223101 49 Washer 4 4
4 574533 60 Centrifugal clutch 1 See page 32
4 574533 61 Centrifugal clutch 1 See page 32
5 2210462 45 Screw 1 1
6 66727 Spring washer 1 1
7 562523 01 Washer 1 1
6 563470 01 Rat belt 1
8 563471 01 Flat belt 1
9 221045 47 Screw 4 4
10 223101 49 Washer 6 6
11 221603 33 Nui 4 4
12 562524 02 Clutch cover 1 1
13 221045 02 SCrew 3 3
14 223101 49 Washer 3 3
•
30
5 Belt driving de VIce
.
• !
/
,I
11 ---,< _~ 4Jl
10--~~~--'>~~
13 '0/---9
14 U'
1~0~'-(~Y .~ -.1;;-// .
• 2
8
3---~'::;o I
---- --_._~---
----- ~..--//
-- -------_------:...----;
12-
•
31
5851
5.1 Centrifugal clutch
Ref Part No Description
50 Hz
-80 -81
,J,
574533-
Quantity
Notes
•
60 Hz ,J,
1 574066 02 Motor belt pulley 1
,
1 574067 02 Motor belt pulley 1
- , -
2 548051 48 Ball bearing 2 2
3 574068 02 Spacing ring 1 1
- ,- -
4 66366 Retaining ring 1 1
5 574064 80 Coupling hub 1
,
- " - -- - - -
5 574065 80 Coupling hub 1
5A 564235 01 Pin 5 3
6 223641 19 Snap ring 1 '1
7 564047 80 Friction block 5 3
8 562521 01 Cover 1 1
9 223641 21 Snap ring 1 1
•
32
5.1 Centrifugal clutch 5 Belt driving device
•
~---6
~ 4
I
1L<;::!::j" 2
["'==-'1----- 3
.•~~.~--- 2
t::1![::
f---1
•
9:L~~5A
I
rrm
rt:J IDIJJ-- 7
@>--a
~~---9
•
33
5851
6 Set of plate
3
Ref Part No
1270019
Description
Set of safety labels

-85
549572-
Quantity
Notes
•
1
3A 1270018 01 Safety label sv 1
3B 1270018 02 Safety label en 1
3e 1270018 03 Safety label de 1
3D 1270018 04 Safety labelfr 1
3E 1270018 05 Safety label as 1
3F 1270018 06 Safety label ru 1
3G 1270018 07 Safety label it 1
3H 1270018 08 Safety label pt 1
31 1270018 09 Safety label pi 1
3J 1270018 10 Safety label el 1
3K 1270018 11 Safety label fi 1
3L 1270018 12 Safety label zh 1
3M 1270018 13 Safety label de 1
3N 1270018 14 Safety label ar 1
30 1270018 15 safety label nl 1 ~
3P 1270018 16 safety label cs 1

30 1270018 17 Safety label ja 1
~
1
3A 1270018 18 safety label ko 1
3S 1270018 19 safety label no 1 ~
6 553171 01 Label 50 Hz 1
6 553272 01 label 60 Hz 1
7 555529 01 Plate with arrow 1
•
8 1270001 Lifting instruction 1
9 554214 02 Cable tie 1
11 66169 Drive screw 4
•
34
6 Set of plate
• 1 2
4 5 6
50 Hz
60 Hz
7 8
•
11
•
35
5851
7 Commissioning kit
Rei Part No Description -04

576452-
Quantity
Notes
•
1 260104 20 O-ring 4 Oil pipe! Connecting housing
2 223404 51 O-ring 2 Water pipeJ Connecting housing
3 223406 29 0-ring 2 Inlet and outlet pipel Connecting housing
4 223406 32 O-ring 2 Inlet and outlet pipel Connecting housing
5 563318 01 Splash seating 1 Inlet and outlet pipe
•
36
7 Commissioning kit
•
37
5851
8 Monitoring kit
Rei Part No Description -04

566727-
Quantity
Notes
•
1 570142 01 Inductive analogue sensor 1
2 561773 04 Sensor holder 1
4 552870 21 Tube gland, straight 1
6 556416 19 Protective tube 1
•
38
8 Monitoring kit
• tm:>-1---- 1
//
.~~
4
•
39
5851
9 Set of tools
ReI Part No Description -16

561614-
Quantity
Notes
•
1 562237 83 Pin spanner 1 Fan
2 562627 80 Puller 1 Spindle pulleyl Top, neck bearing
2A 561829 03 SCrew 1
3 564781 01 Key 1 Bottom bearing housing
4 561439 02 Drift 1 Bottom bearing
5 574564 80 Tool for coupling 1 Motor! Coupling
5A 574565 01 SCrew 1
5B 574566 01 Nut 1
5C 573558 01 Plug 1
5D 223404 20 O-ring 1
6 565842 80 Lifting tool 1 Distributor! Bowl spindle
7 561584 82 Puller 1 Bowl body
8 562643 02 Spanner for nut 1 NuV Discharge slide
9 260154 02 Lifting eye bolt 2
10 561607 82 Puller 1 Discharge slide! Bowl body
lOA 221040 43 SCrew 1
11 221711 03 SCrew 6 Lock ring! Bowl body
12 563431 01 Mounting tool 1 Coupling bearing
13 572425 81 Compressing tool 1 Disc stack
13A 572425 80 Compressing ~~I - 1
13B 572424 02 Clamp 3
13C 572163 01 SCrew 3
13D 2210462 63 SCrew 3
•
13E 572162 01 SCrew 3
14 563084 80 Puller 2 Neck bearing cover
14A 221040 05 Screw 1
14B 221035 46 Screw 1
15 39034 Hook spanner 1 NuV Inlet and outlet pipe
16 565677 01 Pin 1 Distributor
17 66415 Hexagon socket ~ead key 1 Lock ring! Bowl body
111 566443 01 Sleeve 1 Neck bearing
19 566617 01 Chisel 1 Seal ring
•
40
9 Set of tools
• 1
(u
Q
2
fl
~~~
A 3 ._,
""~= ~
9
......
»-------*'
-r- ,-----.--
4 5 A 6 ,~,
, I
U
B "-J
~.
CO~
~~.
Jl()~-,
7 8 9
©
10 11 12
• A
Cl
13 14 15
~ §)
16 17 18
19
•
41
5851
10 Inspection kit
Ref
1
Part No
560638 08
Description
Rectangular ring
-01
1
563878-
Quantity
Notes
Bowl body! Operating slide

•
2 560638 08 Rectangular ring 1 Operating slide! Holder
3 565308 01 Valve plug 3 Operating slide! Bowl body
4 546198 83 0- ri °9 1 Bowl bodyl Operating water ring
5 260104 93 O-ring 1 Bowl bodyl Discharge slide
6 565093 01 Rectangular ring 1 Discharge slidel Bowl body
8 562374 01 Seal ring 1 Bowl hood! Discharge slide
9 546198 84 0- ri °9 1 Bowl hood! Bowl body
10 223403 56 0·ri°9 2 Paring tube/Inlet and outlet pipe
11 223406 32 O-ring 2 Inlet and outlet pipel Connecting housing
12 223406 29 0- ri °9 2 Inlet and outlet pipe! Connecting housing
13 546095 66 0-ring 1 Frame hood! Frame bottom part
14 552766 07 Washer 2 Frame bottom parV Plug
15 537086 06 lubricating paste 1
16 539474 03 Silicone grease 1
17 223404 05 O-ring 1 Oil pin! Plug
18 221711 03 SCrew 6 Lock ring! Bowl body
19 .
66415 Hexagon· socket head key 1 Lock ring! Bowl body
20- 566408 04 Plain bearing- bushing 2 pining tube
21 566788 17 Seal ring 1 Operating wa!er ring
22 544311 12 0-ring 1 Holderl Bowl body
23 563318 01 Splash sealing 1 Inlet and outlet pipe
24 260104 20 0-ring 4 Oil pipe! Connecting housing
•
25 223404 51 a-ring 2 Water pipe! Connecting housing
26 576279 01 Lock washer 9 Bowl bodyl Holder
27 576173 02 Hexagon head scr~w 15 Bowl bodyl Holder operating water ring
99 572377 Exploded view . 1
•
42
• • •
I
r;;,._~
24
11 0 •...
/
I
25
4 17
j 20
E 10
'y)-- ·14
~2::::~I:=:::::::::-"'" )--- ~2
I
23
26 27
5851
11 Overhaul kit
Ref Part No Description
50 Hz
-01 -02
t
563879-
Quantity
Notes
•
60 Hz t
1 563878 01 Inspection kit 1 1 See page 42
2 2234121 40 O-ring 1 1 Strainerl Bottom bearing housing
3 223412 17 Q-ring 1 1 Bottom bearing housing! Frame bottom part
4 562507 02 Labyrinth ring 1 1 Labyrinth ring holderl Spindle pulley
5 223412 26 O-ring 1 1 labyrinth ring holderl Frame bottom part
6 223412 51 Q-ring - 1 1 Neck bearing cover! Frame bottom part
7 566788 02 Seal ring 2 2 Neck bearing cover! Deflector ring
8 223406 24 Q-ring 2 2 Deflector ring! Bowl spindle
9 223404 20 Q-ring 1 1 Pipe! Operating water cover
10 223404 22 O-rlng 1 1 - Frame bottom parU Sensor support
11 74067 O-ring 1 1 Plug! Frame bottom part
12 548747 11 Single row ball bearing 1 1 Bowl spindle! Top bearing seat
13 66366 Retaining ring 1 1 Top bearing seat! Ball bearing
14 562109 06 Helical spring 3 3 Top bearing seat! Top bearing housing
15 562493 01 Composite spring 6 6 Top bearing seat! Plug
16 548744 05 Self-align roller bearing 1 1 Bowl spindle! Bottom bearing housing
17 223406 25 Q.ring - 1 1 lubrication oil orificel oil pump
18 545869 03 Nozzle 0 1,5 mm 1 1 9perating slide
20 566407 04 Spring 1 1 Arm
22 548051 4B Ball bearing 2 2 Coupling hub! Motor belt pulley
23 66366 Retaining ring 1 1 Motor belt pUlleyl Ball bearing
•
24 223641 19 Snap ring 1 1 Coupling hub! Ball bearing
25 564047 80 Friction btock 5 3 Coupling hub! Motor belt pulley
26 223641 21 Snap ring 1 1 Coupling hub! Cover
27 66727 Spring washer 1 1 Motor shafV SCrew
28 563470 01 Rat belt 1 Motor belt pulley! Spindle pulley
28 563471 01 Rat belt 1 Motor belt pulleyl Spindle pulley
29 566788 07 Seal ring 1 1 Operating water cover! Bowl spindle
30 544465 10 Locking liquid 1 1 Bottom bearing holder
31 223406 24 O·ring 2 2 Bowl spindle! Fan
32 223412 51 O-ring 1 1 Operating water cover! Frame bottom part
99 572410 Exploded view 1 1
•
44
• • •
.~20
1-----
1
L~
Br- 12
R-+~P 14
I0 15
~~
~ I
CD
18
28 --- ~-------,
~~
........
~C~
27
5851
12 Lifting tool
Ref
2
Part No Description
563653 01 Lug
-80
4
Subassembty description
563667-
Quantity
Notes
•
3 221040 31 Screw 4
4 35120 Nut 4
5 260236 03 Shackle 2
•
46
12 L I"ft"mg tool
• 3
2
•
47
5851
13 Support kit
Rei
1
Part No
526350 04
Description -01
563880-
Quantity
Notes
•
Plug 2 Frame bottom part
2 221716 23 Screw 2 Labyrinth ring holder
3 221726 01 Screw 3 Top bearing housing! Frame bottom
4 221711 18 Screw 1 Neck bearing cover
5 565048 04 Deflector ring 1 Bowl spindle
6 223101 35 Washer 3 Screwl Operating water cover
7 221045 29 SCrew 3 Operating water cover
8 562703 80 Sensor with support 1 Frame. b~ttom part
8A 562702 02 Sensor support 1
8B 552042 01 Inductive sensor 1
9 221716 23 SCrew 1 Frame bottom parVSensor support
10 221716 23 Screw 1 Frame bottom parV Plug
13 221045 02 SCrew 3 Top bearing housing/Air deflector
15 562353 80 Lock ring 1 Bowl bodyl Bowl hood
16 562215 01 Cap nut 1 Bowl spindlel Bowlbod)r
21 562307 01 Height adjusting ring 3 Frame hood! Support ring
22 562308 01 Spring holder 1 Frame hood
23 221036 02 SCrew 4 Frame hood! Support ring
24 568533 80 Arm 1 Frame hood! Paring tube
25 562310 01 Washer - 1 Inlet pipe IConnecting hou~_i~g
26 562343 01 locking nut 1 Inlet pipel Connecting housing
27 223101 35 Washer 6 Frame hood! Frame bottom part
28 -221046 31 Screw 6 Frame hood! Frame bottom pari
•
30 221045 47 Screw 4 Motor IFrame bottom part
31 223101 49 Washer 8 Motorl Frame bottom part
32 221803 33 Nut 4 Motorl Frame bottom part
33 565378 01 Plug 1 Frame bottom part
34 1- 571743 80 Oil pin 1 Frame bottom parV Plug
35 564765 02 'Lubrication oil orifice 1 Oil pump
36 221711 13 Screw 1 Arm /Paring tube
37 562643 02 Spanner for nut 1 NuV Discharge slide
99 572701 Exploded view 1
•
48
• • •
f;2=6 7
" 5 '·: - ~ 15
fd
~
~-:~
';~:C7=>' 4 e~
6~
26
25
-:J::Lv--3 ~1-13 @r-37

tj
etl-35 --""'--16
", 33
34
1
--j
5851
14 Cover interlocking kit
Ref
1
Part No Description
552870 21 Tube gland, straight

-04
SUbassembly description
570819-
Quantity
Notes
•
2
3
566054 01 Limit switch
556416 26 Protective tube il I I I I I I
•
50
14 Cover interlocking kit
11+----3
•
51
5851
15 Hydraulic tool kit
ReI
1
Part No Description
574618 80 Hydraulic components

-03
574986-
Quantity
Notes
See page 54
•
2
3
574626 81 Hydraulic tool
574589 82 Hydraulic tool iI I I I I I I
See page 56 For coupling
See page 58 For bowl hood
•
52
• • •
El 28
1A
~
1Il
2C
2D I
6>
I
- -I =
iBll---
e
I
3G
3F
3D
'IT
C§:i
2E
I ~
---L-fJ I
((W
1
3E
2
1----2A
3
-1----18
<1-- 2F
3A
~I-----::J
1 - - - 2G
(Jl
w
5851
15.1 Hydraulic components
ReI
1
Part No Description
574618 01 Pump with hose

-80
574618-
Quantity
Notes
•
2 574618 02 Hydraulic cylinder :1 1 1 1 1 1 1
•
54
15.1 Hydraulic components 15 Hydraulic tool kit
•
1
•
=
1-----2
•
55
5851
15.2 Hydraulic tool for coupling
Rei
1
Part No
571624 01
Description
Stud bolt
-81
1
574626-
Quantity
Notes
•
2 574627 02 Sleeve 1
3 571626 01 Holder 1
4 221803 35 Nul 1
5 574954 01 Sleeve 1
6 571620 01 Plate 1
7 571622 01 SCrew 3
•
56
15.2 Hydraulic tool for coupling 15 Hydraulic tool kit
• E]1-----2
~e----3
EIJI-----4
LT--5
• 1------1
=
= 6
~
~
~
,
~
I-
7
\,:=
•
57
5851
15.3 Hydraulic tool for bowl hood
Ref
1
Part No
574588 03
Description
Stud bolt
-82
1
574589-
Quantity
Notes
•
2 221803 34 Nut 1
3 574954 02 Sleeve 1
4 573498 06 Holder 1
5 574588 04 Stud bolt 2
6 223101 49 Washer 2
7 221803 33 Nut 2
•
58
15.3 Hydraulic tool for bowl hood 15 Hydraulic tool kit
•
(fil (fil 7
GP G0 6
L.J ' -I
I I I 4
I
- r-,-~
CLlJ)
1-----5
•
1
n
--'
EO T 2
•
59
16 Cross reference list
• Part No
17812
35120
39034
Page
22
46
40
34
ReI.
47
4
15
Part No
22172601
22172601
22180333
Page
48
22
58
Ref.
19
3
7
Part No
223641 21
223641 21
260104 20
Page
32
44
36
Ref.
9
26
1
66169 11 22180333 30 11 26010420 42 24
66366 24 4 22180333 48 32 260104 93 42 5
66366 32 4 221803 34 58 2 26010493 26 11
66366 44 13 22180335 56 4 260154 02 40 9
66366 44 23 222512 39 24 3A 26023603 46 5
66415 40 17 223101 35 48 6 52635004 48 1
66415 42 19 223101 35 28 26 52635004 22 6
66727 30 6 223101 35 48 27 526352 06 22 28
66727 44 27 223101 35 22 31 537086 06 42 15
66564 26 18 223101 49 30 3 53941802 22 27
70490 22 3 223101 49 58 6 53947403 42 16
74067 44 11 223101 49 30 10 544311 12 42 22
- .
74067 22 37 223101 49 30 14 544311 12 26 24
22103546 40 148 223101 49 48 31 54446510 44 30
22103602 28 11 22340356 28 3 54586903 26 4
22103602 48 23 22340356 42 10 54586903 44 18
22104005 40 14 A 223404 05 42 17 54609566 42 13
" - ".
221040 31 46 3 223404 05 22 42 54609566 28 25
• 22104043
22104502
22104502
221045 02
22104502
22104509
40
30
30
48
24
22
10 A
46
2
13
13
16
.
223404 20
223404 20
223404 20
223404 22
223404 22
223404 51
40
44
22
44
22
36
50
9
26
10
34
2
-
546198 83
546198 83
546198 84
546198 84
548051 48
548051 48
42
26
42
26
32
44
4
9
9
21
2
22
22104529 48 7 223404 51 42 25 548744 05 24 10
22104529 22 32 22340624 44 8 548744 05 44 16
22104547 30 9 223406 24 24 17 54874711 24 2
22104547 48 30 223406 24 22 24 548747 11 44 12
22104631 28 27 22340624 44 31 55204201 48 88
221046 31 48 28 22340625 24 12 552042 01 22 33 AB
22170601 22 12 22340625 44 17 552766 07 22 5
221711 02 28 28 223406 29 36 3 552766 07 42 14
- .
22171103 40 11 22340629 42 12 55287021 50 1
221711 03 42 18 223406 29 28 17 55287021 38 4
221711 09 28 10 C 22340632 36 4 55287041 22 338
221711 13 48 36 22340632 42 11 553171 01 34 6
221711 18 48 4 22340632 28 16 55~272 01 34 6
221711 18 22 20 A 22341217 44 3 55421402 34 9
22171602 22 40 22341217 22 13 555529 01 34 7
22171609 28 100 22341226 44 5 55641613 22 33 C
22171623 48 2 22341226 22 16 55641619 38 6
221716 23 48 9 22341251 44 6 55641626 50 3
•
- . -
22171623 48 10 22341251 22 21 560131 03 22 2
22171623 22 17 22341251 44 32 560202 02 22 25
22171623 22 35 22341251 22 45 56063808 42 1
22171623 22 38 223641 19 32 6 56063808 26 2
221721 13 28 18 A 223641 19 44 24 560638
_. 08 42 2
- -- -
61
5851
Part No
56063808
561389 82
561439 02
561584 82
Page
26
28
40
40
Ref.
5
24
4
7
Part No
562523 01
56252402
56262780
56264302
Page
30
30
40
40
Ref.
7
12
2
8
Part No
566054 01
566284 02
56640704
56640704
Page
50
28
28
44
Ref.
2
8
15
20
•
56160782 40 10 56264302 48 37 56640804 28 4 B
56177303 22 36 56270202 48 8A 56640804 42 20
56177304 38 2 56270202 22 33 AA 56644301 40 18
56182903 40 2A 56270380 48 8 566543 01 26 12
56196002 28 10 B 56270380 22 33A 566617 01 40 19
56209202 22 11 563084 80 40 14 56669280 22 330
562109 06 24 6 56331801 38 5 56671883 22 33
56210906 44 14 56331801 28 7 566788 02 44 7
56213980 26 1 56331801 42 23 566788 02 22 22
56214901 26 3 56332480 28 1 566788 07 44 29
562154 01 26 19 563431 01 40 12 566788 07 22 30
- -- - -
562194 02 26 26 563441 01 22 8 566788 17 42 21
562194 81 26 16 56344280 22 18 566788 17 26 25
562194 81 26 16_1 56344701 24 13 568533 80 28 14
56220501 26 1A 563458 80 28 18 56853380 48 24
562214 01 26 14 56347001 30 8 57014201 38 1
-- - - - -
56221501 48 16 56347001 44 28 57162001 56 6
•
562215 01 26 23 563471 01 30 8 571622 01 56 7
56223783 40 1 563471 01 44 28 57162401 56 1
562272 80 22 1 563494 02 26 17 57162601 56 3
562307 01 28 9 563506 80 26 15 57174380 48 34
562307 01 48 21 56365301 46 2 57174380 22 44
562308 01 28 10 A 56367801 44 1 57216201 40 13 E
562308 01 48 22 56404780 32 7 57216301 40 13 C .
56230980 28 10 56404780 44 25 57230501 26 10
56231001 28 19 56415501 24 9 572377 42 99
-
56231001 48 25 564235 01 32 5A 572410 44 99
56234301 28 20 56476502 24 11 57242402 40 13 B
56234301 48 26 56476502 48 35 57242580 40 13 A
56235380 48 15 564781 01 40 3 57242581 40 13
56235380 26 22 56488902 22 29 572701 48 99
56237401 42 8 56504804 48 5 57349806 58 4
56237401 26 20 56504804 22 23 57355801 40 5C
56238980 22 20 56505202 24 14 574064 80 32 5
56248901 24 1 56509301 42 6 57406580 32 5
56249301 24 7 56509301 26 13 57406602 32 1
56249301 44 15 565111 80 24 3 57406702 32 1
562494 01 24 8 565112 02 24 5 574068 02 32 3
56249801 24 15 565308 01 42 3 57453380 30 4
56250301 22 10 565308 01 26 6 57453381 30 4
562506 01 22 14 565378 01 48 33 574564 80 40 5
•
-- -
56250702 44 4 56537801 22 43 57456501 40 5A
56250702 22 15 565677 01 40 16 574566 01 40 5B
56251002 22 39 56584280 40 6 574588 03 58 1
562521 01 32 8 56595302 28 4A 574588 04 58 5
56252201 30 1 56595380 28 4 57458982 52 3
62
16 Cross reference list
• Part No
57461801
57461802
57461880
574626 81
Page
54
54
52
52
Ref.
2
1
574627 02 56 2
574954 01 56 5
574954 02 58 3
57617302 26 8
57617302 42 27
57627901 42 26
57627901 26 8.1
57639801 26 7
1270001 34 8
127001801 34 3A
127001802 34 3B
127001803 34 3C
127001804 34 3D
127001805 34 3E
127001806 34 3F
127001807 34 3G
127001808 34 3H
•
127001809 34 31
127001810 34 3J
1270018 11 34 3K
1270018 12 34 3 l
1270018 13 34 3M
1270018 14 34 3N
1270018 15 34 30
1270018 16 34 3P
1270018 17 34 3Q
1270018 18 34 3R
1270018 19 34 38
1270019 34 3
221046232 22 4
221046245 30 5
221046263 40 13 D
223412140 44 2
223412140 22 9
•
63
SA 851 Separation System
Spare Parts Catalogue
• Product No.
Book No.
Separator Part No.
569590-02
579587.02 Rev. 1
881204-03-02
Spare Parts Catalogue Catalogo parti di ricambio

Reservdelskatalog Catalogo de pecas
sobressalentes
Ersatzteilkatalog
Catalogue de pieces de Varaosaluettelo
rechange KOTOAOyOO
OVTOAAOKTlKWV
Catalogue de piezas de
recambio Reserveonderdelen-
catalogus
• KaTaJlOr 3anaCHblX
'-IaCTell1 Reservedelskatalog
,
•
Alia Laval reserves the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
Alia Laval company.
Published by: Alia Laval Tumba AB
Marine & Diesel EqUipment
SE - 14780 Tumba
Sweden
•
© Copyright Alfa Laval Tumba AB March 2006.
Contents
• 2 Ancillary Equipment
2.1
2.2
Valve block water..
Spare parts kit,
.
.
12
12
valve block water... . 14

2.3 Valve block air . 16
2.4 Spare parts kit, valve block air. 18
2.5 Valve block oil 20
2.6 Water transducer . 22
2.7 Spare parts kit, pneumatic 3·way
valve......... ... ~
2.8 Connection kit, oiL........... .... 26
2.9 Sludge outlet kit................. 28
2.10 BuUer1ly valve kit 30
2.11 Spare parts, EPC 50 Control Unit32
2.12 EPC 50 Control unit 34
2.13 Starters 34
2.14 Separator starter kits,
basic and 4A - 32A 35
2.15 Separator starter kits, 32A - 63A36
• 3
2.16 Pump starter kits, 0.4A - 16.0A. 36
2.17 ESD.relay kit
2.18 Motor trip contact kit
Index .
37
37
... 40
• 579587-02
1 Read this first
G Check the machine unit number on the name-plate before using this catalogue
B
•
Kontrollera maskinenhetens nummer pa maskinskylten innan du anvander katalogen
~ Das Typenschild - ein Hinweis zur korrekten Ersatzteilnummer
o La plaque de la machine, un guide pour trouver le numero de piece de rechange correct
B La placa-marca de la maquina - guia del numero correcto del repuesto
G <Dl1pMeHHaR Ta611114Ka MaWI1Hbl - YKa3aTellb npaBI111HOrO HOMepa 3anacHoi'; 4aCTI1
o La targhetta della macchina - guida al corretto numero dei ricambi
o A placa do fabricante da maquina - um guia do numero correto das partes sobressalentes
o Konekilpi - opastin oikeaan varaosanumeroon
o H mvaKLoa HIe; ~l1xavrie; EiVaL 0 oOl1yoe; TOU awaTOu aVTaAAaKTlKOU
o
•
Het gegevensplaatje - een wegwijzer naar het juiste onderdeelnummer
~ Typeskiltet - en guide til det rette reservedelsnummer
5
Safeguard your commitment to quality by always using genuine Alfa
Laval spare parts.
Remember, Alfa Laval cannot accept responsibility for the failure of a

•
separator equipped with non-original spare parts. We guarantee the
quality and reliability of our products.
Folj dill kvalitetstiinkande genom all endast anviinda Alfa Laval

originalreservdelar.
Kom ihag all Alfa Laval inte tar nagot ansvar for fel pa en separator,
som innehaller icke-originaldelar. Vi garanterar kvaliteten och
driftsiikerheten endast hos vara egna produkter.
Aus ROcksicht auf Ihr Bestreben um beste Qualitiit sollten Sie nur Alfa
Laval Originalersatzteile benutzen.
Vergessen Sie nicht, Alfa Laval kann keine Verantwortung fOr das
•
Versagen eines Separators Obernehmen, der nicht mit
Originalersalzteilen versehen ist. Wir garantieren Qualitiit und
Zuverliissigkeit unserer Produkte.
Preservez la qualite de vos equipments en n'employant que des

pieces de rechange Alfa Lava!.
N'oubliez pas q'Alfa Laval decline toute responsabilite en cas de
panne d'un separateur non equipe de pieces de rechange d'origine.
Nous garantissons la qualite et la fiabilite de nos produits.
Mantenga su compromiso con la calidad, al usar siempre piezas de

repuesto Alfa Laval autenticas.
Recuerde que Alia Laval no acepta responsabilidad por el fallo de una

separadora equipada con piezas de repuesto no originales.
Garantizamos la calidad y fiabilidad de nuestros productos.
•
6
• rapaHH1pyC1Te HaAe)KHOCTb Ka'1eCTBa BCerAa YlCnOnb3YR
n0AnYlHHble 3anaCHble '1aCTYI qlY1pMbl Alia Lava!.
3anOMHYlTe. '1TO Alia Laval He HeceT OTBeTCTBeHHOCTYI 3a

nOBpe)KAeHYle cenapaTopa, OCHaL11eHHOrO HenOAnYlHHblMYI
3an'1aCTaMYI. Mbl rapaHTYlpyeM Ka'1eCTbO YI HaAe)KHOCTb HaWYlX
Yl3AenYlC1.
Salvaguardate la vostra garanzia di qualita lacendo sempre uso di

parti di ricambio Alia Laval autentiche.
Tenete presente che la Alia Laval non pub accettare responsabilita

per avaria ad un separatore attrezzato con parti di ricambio non
originali. Noi garantiamo la qualita I'affidabilita dei nostri prodotti.
Proteja 0 seu cometimento a qualidade usando sempre pel(as

sobressalentes genuinas Alia Lava!.
•
Nao esquel(a que Alia Laval nao aceita responsabilidade por falha de
uma separadora equipada com pel(as sobressalentes nao genuinas.
Nos garantimos a qualidade e a conlianl(a dos nossos produtos.
Varmistakaa vastuunne laadusta kayttamalla aina alkuperaisia Alia

Laval varaosia.
Muistakaa. Alia Laval ei voi hyvaksya vastuuta ei-alkuperasilla

varaosilla varustetun separaattorin vaurioista. Me takaamme
tuotteidemme laadun ja kaytl6varmuuden.
E~aa<paAlon: ulVllAJi nOLOTIlTa XPllm~onOLwvTa~ ~ovo vvJima

aVTaAAaKnKG TIl~ AlIa Lava!.
"Exc:n; unolVllV on 11 AlIa Laval1ic:v aVaAa~J3GvC:l Ka~~lG c:u8Uvri Vla

J3AGJ3c:~ J30uTupO~llxavJi~, OTIlV ono[a txouv c:<pap~oaTC:[ ~Ji yvJima
aVTaAAaKnKG. Evvuo~aaTC: nOloTIlTa KQl KaAn AC:lTouPv[a ~ovo
VLQ Ta 1ilKG ~a~ npo"lovTa.
•
7
Streel naar een zo hoog mogelijke kwaliteit en gebruik uitsluitend
originele AlIa Laval reserveonderdelen. Streel naar een zo hoog
mogelijke kwaliteit en gebruik uitsluitend originele AlIa Laval
reserveonderdelen.
•
Vergeet niet dat AlIa Laval niet verantwoordelijk is voor een delecte
separator die niet-originele onderdelen bevat. Wij garanderen de
kwaliteit en betrouwbaarheid van onze eigen produkten.
Hold Dem til den kvalitet, De har valgt at satse pa, ved allid at
anvende regte AlIa Laval reservedele.
Husk, at AlIa Laval ikke kan patage sig noget ansvar lor lejl pa en
separator, som indeholder uoriginale dele. Vi kan kun garantere
kvalitet og driftsikkerhed pa yore egne produkter.
•
8
Translation list
• Oversiittningslista
Uberzetsungsliste
Liste de traduction
Lista de traducciones
EJ G G CB B
Part no. ReseNdelsnummer Teil-Nr. Numero de piece Pleza No.
aty Antal Anzahl Quantite Cantidad
Description Benamning Bezeichnung Denomination Descripcj6n
Notes Anmarkningar Anmerkungen Remarques Notas
Machine type Maskintyp Maschinentyp Type de machine Tipo de maquina
Product no. Produktnr Produktnummer Numero de produit Numero de producto
• Machine unit
description
Machine unit no.

Maskinblocksbenamning
Maskinblocksnr
Bezeichnung des
Maschinenblocks
Maschinenblock Nr.
Denomination de partis
de machine
Partie de machine n Q
Descripci6n de secci6n
de la maquina
No. de secci6n de
maquina
Subassembly Undergruppsbenamning Bezeichung der Dlmomination de Descripci6n de

description Untergruppe sous-ensemble subconjunto
Subassembly no. Undergruppsnr Untergruppe Nr. NO de sous-ensemble Numero de subconjunto
See page Se sidan Siehe Seite Voir page Vease la pagina
Fig. ref. Figurhanvisning Bildhinweise ReI. de fig. Referencia de figura
Product name Produktnamn Produktname Nom du produit Nombre del producto
Exchange necessitates Utbyte nodvandiggor Austasch eriordert Le remplacement El racmbio requiere el

rebalancing of bowl ombalansering av kulan Wiederauswuchtung der necessitele reequilibrado del rotor
Trammel reequilibrage du bol
See separate spare Se separat Siehe separate Voir liste separee des Vease la Iista de piezas
parts list reservdelslista Ersatzteilliste pieces de rechange separada
Not delivered as spare Levereras ej som Nicht als Ersatzteil Non fivre comme piece No se entrega como
•
part reservdel geliefert de rechange pieza de recambio
9
Translation list
CnOBapb nepeBAa
lista traduzioni
lista para tradu~ao
Kaannosluttelo
•
G G 0 0 CD
Part no. AeTallb N2 Nr.parte. Numero de peca Varaosanumero
Dty Kon-eo Quantita Quantidade Lukumaa.ra
Description HaHMeHoB8Hllle Descrizione Descricao Nirnitys
Notes nplIIMe~aHlIIR Note Notas Huomautuksia
Machine type MawIIIH8 THna Tipo macchina Tipo de maquina Konetyyppi
Product no. ApTHK)111 N2 Nr.produtlo No. do produto TuoUeen no
Machine unit
description
Machine unit no.

HalllMeHoeaHllle 6noKa
M8W\IlHbI
5noK M8WIIIHbI N5!

Nr. unita macchina
Descrizione sottogruppo
Descricao da unidade da
maquina
Numero de unidade da
maquina
Koneenosan nimitys
Koneenosan no
•
Subassembly HaHMeHoB8Hllle rpynnbl Descrizione unita Descriao do subconjunto Alaryhman nimitys
description macchina
Subassembly no. rpynna N2 Nr. sottogruppo. Numero de subconjunto Alaryhman no
See page CM. CTpaHHLlY Vedi pagina Vease la pagina Ks siVu
Fig. reI. CCblflKa Ha 3CKH3 Ril. fig. Referencia de figura Kuvaviite
Product name HaHMeHoBaHHe Nome prodotto Nombre del producto Tuotteen nimi
apTHKYfla
Exchange necessitates 3aMeHa Tpe6yeT La sostituzione comporta El racmbio requlere el Vaihdettaessa kuula
rebalanclng of bowl 6anaHCHpoBKH6apa6aHa la iequilibratura del reequilibrado del rotor tasapainoitetlava
tamburo uudelleen
See separate spare CM. OTAeflbHblM Vedi Iista separata delle Vease la lista de piezas Katso erillista
parts list nepeyeHb 3anaCHblX parti di ricambio separada varaosaluetteloa
yaCTeM
•
Not delivered as spare He nOCT8BfleHa BMecTe c Non fornito come parte di No se entrega como Ei toimiteta varaosana
part 3anaCHblMM 'iaCTAMM ricambio pleza de recambio
10
Translation list
• rAQHAPI
Vertaallijst
Oversrettelseliste
G 0 0 ~
Part no. AptBIJO<:; OVTaAAOKTlKOU Onderdeelnr. Reservedelsnummer
Qty EUvOAO Hoeveelheid Antal
Description nE:plypa<pi) Beschrijving Betegnelse
Notes napOT'lprJOE:lC; Opmerkingen Bemaerkninger
Machine type Tunoc; IJnxavt'U.lQTOC: Machinetype Maskintype
Product no. APlBj.lO<:; npoi6vTCx; Produktnr. Produktnr.
•
Machine unit nEplypa<pr; Machineblokbenaming Maskinbetegnelse
description aUyKpon'U..IQTo<; IJllXovri<:
Machine unit no. APlBIJOc; auyKponillQTOC; Machineblokbenamning Maskinnr.

~Dxavti<;
Subassembly nEplypOtpr; SUbgroepbenamning Undergruppsbetegnelse

description unoauYKpo~lJaTOC:
Subassembly no. APlBj.loC; Subgroepnr. Undergruppenr.

unocruyKpo~lJaTOC:
See page BMm: oE:r..(6a Zie blz. Se side
Fig. ref. napanolJm; at: (;lKOVQ Afb. ref. Rgumenvisning
Product name Ov0l-l0a(o npo"lovTOC; Produktnaam Produktnavn
Exchange necessitates AVTOA).,Ovn onOlT£l Vervangning vereist Udskriftning kraever ny

rebalancing of bowl £navappU6I-1laT) herbaJanceren van de afbalcering at kuglen
looppon{ac; TOO kogel
TUl-lnavou
see separate spare BMne: £liSlKr1 AlaTa Vervangning vereist van se spaat reservedelsliste
parts list aVTaAAaKTlKWV de kogel
Not delivered as spare !J.r;v napai5li5£TOl ~ Niet geleverd als Levereres ikke som
•
part aVTaA).,aKTlKO reserveonderdeel reservedel
11
2 ANCILLARY EOUIPMENT SA 851 SEPARATION SYSTEM SPARE PARTS CATALOGUE
2 Ancillary Equipment
2.1 Valve block water

•
567940
Re' Part No Description -03 Notes
Quantity
1 176592701 Valve block, water 1
2 176603706 Flow valve, 5.5 Vmin 1 SV10
5 56971201 Rectangular connector 3
6 176707181 Non return valve kit 1
6A 176616202 Non return valve 1
6B 176019105 Washer 1
7 176615701 Quick coupling 1
8 176593602 Flexible connection 1
12 579587-02
•
SA 851 SEPARATION SYSTEM SPARE PARTS CATALOGUE 2 ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT
• 579587-02 13
2 ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT SA 851 SEPARATION SYSTEM SPARE PARTS CATALOGUE
2.2 Spare parts kit, valve block water
Ref
1
Part No
176599301
Description
Retaining clip
1765993
·83
SUbassembly description
Quantity
Notes
•
2 176599302 Spring
3 176599303 Core
4 176599304 Spring washer
5 176599305 O-ring
6 176599306 Piston
7 176599307 Valve
8 176599308 Non·return vatve
9 176599309 O-ring
10 176599310 O-rlng
11 176599311 Coil
12 176600407 Washer adhesive tape
13 176600408 Indicator
14 176599313 Drain valve
15 176599316 Strainer
14 579587-02
•
"
-11
li
rk---'""" ,-+,JJ
lillirnl
• 579587-02 15
2.3 Valve block air
Ret Part No Description

568048
-02
Quantity
Notes
•
1 176592801 Valve block 1
4 56971203 Rectangular connection 3
16 579587-02
•
III
\ i-----......,
-----~
• 579587-02 17
2.4 Spare parts kit, valve block air
ReI Part No Description

1766004
-82
Quantity
Notes
•
1 176600401 Retaining clip 1
2 176600402 Spring 1
3 176600403 O-ring 1
4 176600404 O-ring 1
5 176600405 Screw 1
6 176600406 Coil 1
7 176600407 Washer adhesive tape 1
8 176600408 Indicator 1
9 176600409 Manometer 1
18 579587-02
•
• 579587-02 19
2 ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT SA 851 SEPARATIQN SYSTEM SPARE PARTS CATALOGUE
2.5 Valve block oil
~--~----~~---------------r---7M~a-c~hi~ne-un~i1~n-u-m~b-e-r-o-r
---.-------------,.
567854.02 GO/MDO/lF 30-40
567854-04 LO/lF 60-180/HFO
Re' Part No Description -02 -04 Notes
Quantity
1 176609001 Valve block 1 1
2 176476087 Water transducer 1 1 See page 22
3 176644402 Valve 1 1
4 56971201 Rectangular connector 2 2
6 176610202 Non·return valve 2 2
7 176473306 Pneumatic 3-way vatv 1 1 See page 24
8 176462101 Shut-off valve 1 1
9 176401101 Silencer 1 1
10 176349201 Elbow 1 1
11 176378003 Nipple 2 2
12 176508209 Nipple 2 2
13 176390303 Needle valve 2 2
14 176589701 Pressure transmitter 2 2
15 176591101 Elbow 2 2
16 54305405 Pressure gauge 2 2
17 176443980 Temperature sensor 1 1
17A 176439101 Temperature sensor 1 1 2xPt-l00
178 176181480 Spring pocket 1 1
19 Connection kit, oil 1 1 See page 26
21 176681101 Throttle washer 1
22 176590802 Gasket 8 8
•
23 5350047202 Cable 19 1 1
24 176593401 Flexible connection 1 1
25 221046210 SCrew 8 8
26 70490 Washer 40 40
28 22180334 Nut 16 16
29 221046228 SCrew 8 8
30 176183403 eu-washer 1 1
31 176183406 Washer 2 2
32 56971201 Rectangular connector 1 1
33 176589701 Pressure transmitter 1 1
34 176390303 Needle valve 1 1
35 176183406 Washer 1 1
36 176508209 Nipple 1 1
37 176183403 eu-washer 1 1
38 5355171602 Washer 4 4
39 5355171602 Washer 2 2
20 579587-02
•
• 579587-02 21
2.6 Water transducer

1764760
-87
Quantity
Notes
•
1 176475885 Valve body 1
2 176476901 Distance rod 2
3 176476880 Electrode 1
4 176476701 Insulator 1
176521682 Spare parts kit including: 1
5 22340470 O-ring 1
6 26010419 O-ring 1
7 176513001 Gasket 1
8 176476103 Cover 1
9 176476601 Bushing 1
10 26750 Spring washer 2
11 22104008 Screw 4
14 22103010 SCrew 4
16 176476202 Junction box 1
18 3183045474 Circuit board 1
19 22112106 Screw 1
23 490167322 Spacing sleeve 1
24 22170113 SCrew 1
25 490122209 Connector 1
27 492636801 Product label 1
22 579587-02
•
i
T,o\L\ __
@
•
", ,\
• 579587-02 23
2.7 Spare parts kit, pneumatic 3-way valve
Ref
1
Part No
176473486
Description
Spare parts kit including: 1

Quantity
Notes
•
1A 176473413 Diaphragm 1
18 176473411 Stuffing box kit 1
1C 176473416 Stem/disc kit 1
24 579587·02
•
• 579587-02 25
2.8 Connection kit, oil
Re' Part No Description

Quantity
Notes
•
1 176608301 Connecting plate 1
2 176624801 Connecting plate, valve b 1
6 176639601 Support washer 2
7 176635603 Support 2
8 176635601 Support 2
9 22364131 Snap ring 2
10 22364117 Snap ring 2
11 22364103 Retaining ring 2
12 26010420 O-ring 4
13 176148216 O-ring 2
14 22340451 O-ring 3
15 22104005 Screw 2
16 22104509 SCrew 1
17 41456 Washer 2
18 22310149 Washer 1
26 579587-02
•
• \
\
• 579587-02 27
2.9 Sludge outlet kit

Quantity
Notes
•
1 176643880 Sludge outlet DIN 1
1 176643881 Sludge outlel JIS 1
lA 176609601 Plug 1
2 56133903 Gasket 1
3 22310149 Washer 4
4 22104545 Screw 4
28 579587-02
•
• 579587-02 29
2.1 0 Butterfly valve kit
Ref Part No
176600701
Description
Butterily valve 1
Quantity
Notes
•
56830403 Sludge valve interlock 1 Mounted in Control Unit
1 176616101 Seat 1
2 176616105 Limit switch 1
30 579587-02
•
• 579587-02 31
2.11 Spare parts, EPC 50 Control Unit
Rei Part No Description

Quantity
Notes
•
5 3163045511 EPC 50 Vibration Board
6
7
3183045492
3183045841
EPC 50 Heater Board
EPC 50 I/O Expansion Board iI I I I I I I
568452
Rei Part No Description -01 Notes
Quantity
1 3183062451 Epc 50 OP front module
2 3183045486 Epc 50 I/O board
3 3163063461 Cable
4 3183062411 Epc 50 transformer
9 5350046201 Push button
10 5350020103 Switch
11 5350020110 Sealing
12 5350020111 Led bulb, white, 24 V AC
15 5350048901 Switch body
16 5350046902 Switch actuator
17 5350048903 Legend plate
18 5350045102 Pilot lamp
•
21 3163063731 Fuse kit
32 579587-02
•
SA 851 SEPARATION SYSTEM SPARE PARTS CATALOGUE 2 ANCILLARY EOUIPMENT
• 579587-02 33
2.12 EPC SO Control unit
Re' Part No Description

568303
·01 -02
Quantity
Notes
•
56830401 Control unit ape
3183064091
176719980
Epc 50 remind
8-pole connector iI :I I I I I I Mounted on separator
2.13 Starters

Re' Part No Description Notes

Quantity
568022 01 Basic kit for starter 1 See page 35
568022 10 Sep. starter, 2.5-4A 1 See page 35
568022 11 Sep. starter, 4-6.3A 1 See page 35
568022 12 Sep. starter, 6.3-1 OA 1 See page 35
568022 13 Sep. starter, 1D-16A 1 See page 35
568022 14 Sep. starter, 16-20A 1 See page 35
568022 15 Sep. starter. 2Q-25A 1 See page 35
•
568022 32 Sep. start., 69OV,6.3-1OV 1 See page 36
568022 33 Sep. start., 69Ov,1Q-16A 1 See page 36
568022 34 Sep. start., 69OV,16-20A 1 See page 36
568022 36 Sep. start., 69Ov.25-32A 1 See page 36
568022 20 Pump starter, O,4-0.63A 1 See page 36
568022 21 Pump starter, a.53-1A 1 See page 36
568022 22 Pump starter, 1-1.6A 1 See page 36
568022 23 Pump starter, 1.6-2.5A 1 See page 36
568022 24 Pump starter, 2.5-4A 1 See page 36
568022 25 Pump starter, 4-6.3A 1 See page 36
568022 26 Pump starter, B.3-l0A 1 See page 36
568022 27 Pump starter, 10-l6A 1 See page 36
568022 30 Pump starter, 690V, 6.3-l0A 1 See page 36
34 579587-02
•
SA 851 SEPARATION SYSTEM SPARE PARTS CATALOGUE 2 ANCILLARY EOUIPMENT
2.14 Separator starter kits, basic and 4A - 32A
• Ret Part No Description
Wall mounting kit

568022
-01 ·10 ·11 .12 ·13 .14 ·15 ·16 Notes

Quantity
2 568026 02 1
3 1764728 01 Label 1
4 1761990 02 Product label 1
6 53500447 01 Diagram pocket 1
8 53500453 01 Ground connection 1 for door
F8 53500167 02 Fuse 1
K2 53500460 02 Contactor 1 1 1
K2 53500460 04 Contactor 1 1
1 .
K2 53500460 05 Contactor 1
K2 53500460 08 Contactor
K2.1 53500461 01 Aux. contact block 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
K2.2 53500461 02 Aux. contact block. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
P2 53500006 01 Ammeter 1 1
P2 53500006 02 Ammeter 1 1
P2 53500006 03 Ammeter 1
P2 53500006 04 Ammeter 1
P2 53500006 06 Ammeter, SO/SA 1
01 1764712 05 Switch 1
02 53500098 28 Circuit breaker 1
•
T8 568027 01 Transformer 1
TA2 53500503 01 Current transformer 1
TA2.1 53500503 03 Mounting kit 1 forTA2
Xl 53500402 11 Terminal 1
XF8 53500402 18 Fuse terminal 1
• 579587-02 35
2.15 Separator starter kits, 32A - 63A

568022
-171-18 -32 -33 -34 -35 -36-37 Notes

Quantity
•
K2 53500460 04 Contactor 1
K2 53500460 05 Contactor 1
K2 53500460 08 Contactor 1 1 1
K2 53500460 09 Contactor 1 1
K2.1 53500461 01 Aux. contact block 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
K2.2 53500461 02 Aux. contact block 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
P2 53500006 01 Ammeter 1 1
P2 53500006 03 Ammeter 1
P2 53500006 04 Ammeter 1
P2 53500006 06 Ammeter, SO/SA 1 1 1
P2 53500006 07 Ammeter, 7S/SA 1
TA2 53500503 01 Current transformer 1 1 1
TA2 53500503 02 Current transformer 1
TA2.1 53500503 03 Mounting kit 1 1 1 .1 forTA2
2.16 Pump starter kits, 0.4A - 16.0A

568022
-20 ·21 ·22 ·23 ·24 ·25 ·26 ·27 -30 Notes
Quantity
•
K2 53500460 02 Contactor 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
K2 53500460 04 Contactor 1 1
K2.1 53500461 01 Aux. contact block 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
K2.2 53500461 02 Aux. contact block 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
03 53500098 30 Circuit breaker 1 1
36 579587-02
•
2.17 ESD-relay kit
• ReI Part No Description ·53

568022
Quantity
Notes
~I I
K112 5350002809 Relay
K112.1 5350002808 Relay socket I I I I
2.18 Motor trip contact kit

568022
ReI Part No Description -51 Notes
Quantity
Q2.1 5350009838 Trip contact block
Q3.1 5350009838 Trip contact block ;I I I I I I
• 579587-02 37
~~
IQ]~
'---~"l r--,
L.._..J L _ _'
G
--'I
Et"
.:,CJ
r::l. 'I
GB!I[jiQslnnnl
;I'K)~ KI12XT
G
•
.- TB
L.:::o........L ," ,LjUUU'8
/\ L::J . ,"
L-.,
11A'1
- ,
I [ ,
I
8B~m •
I
X'['\4 ;
i
I I
;.; 1
i i
IQ]
~.
L - ~I
~I
~'l XC ~
+1
.R sJJ
38 579587-02
•
SA 851 SEPARATION SYSTEM SPARE PARTS CATALOGUE 3 INDEX
5350009831 36 568022 15 34
5350009832 35 568022 16 34
•
53500098 32 36 568022 17 34
5350009833 35 568022 18 34
5350009833 36 568022 20 34
53500098 36 35 568022 21 34
5350009837 36 56802222 34
5350009838 37 56802223 34
5350009838 37 56802224 34
5350016702 35 56802225 34
53500201 03 32 568022 26 34
53500201 10 32 56802227 34
53500201 11 32 56802230 34
53500402 11 35 56802232 34
53500402 18 35 56802233 34
5350044701 35 568022 34 34
53500451 02 32 56802235 34
5350045301 35 56802236 34
5350046002 35 56802237 34
5350046002 36 56802602 35
5350046004 35 56802701 35
5350046004 36 568304 01 34
5350046004 36 568304 03 30
5350046005 35 56971201 12
5350046005 36 56971201 20
•
5350046008 35 56971201 20
5350046008 36 56971203 16
5350046009 36 70490 20
53500461 01 35 31830 45492 32
53500461 01 36 31830 4551 1 32
53500461 01 36 31830 4584 1 32
53500461 02 35
53500461 02 36
53500461 02 36
53500462 01 32
53500472 02 20
5350048901 32
5350048902 32
5350048903 32
5350050301 35
5350050301 36
5350050302 36
5350050303 35
5350050303 36
5355171602 20
5355171602 20
543054 05 20
56133903 28
568022 01 34
•
568022 10 34
568022 11 34
568022 12 34
568022 13 34
568022 14 34
579587-02 41

Alfa Laval Sa 851

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Alfa Laval Sa 851

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

E

SCALE DWGNO. REV. NO ,

SA851 System Description

Alarms and Fault Finding

Only foreseeable conditions have been taken Into

Spare Parts Catalogue

Any comments regarding possible errors and omissions or

Copies of this publication can be ordered from your local

Published by: Alfa Laval Tumba AB

© Copyright Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2004.

Your Name: Company:

System Manual information:

Solutions beyond technology 1810652-02 V2

Any comments regarding possible errors and omissions or

Copies of this publication can be ordered from your local

• Important - read this!

The centrifugal separator includes parts

1.1 Key Factors for Safe

strength, etc. that could lead to serious

The following is compulsory for safe

1.2 Warning Sign

• Below are definitions ofthe warning signs used.

indicates an imminently hazardous

Warning - serious injury or death Example:

Caution - minor or moderate injury Example:

This type of safety sign or instruction indicates

'CAUTION' used without the safety alert Bum hazard

1.3 Summary of Safety

Be especially observant during start-up. If there

Breakdown hazard 50 Hz?

If power cable polarity has been reversed, the

Never attempt to clean the bowl by manual discharge

Any comments regarding possible errors and omissions or

Copies of this pUblication can be ordered from your local

1.1 Oil Flow Settling tank Change·over Backpressure

• feed pump, operating at a constant flow.

During separator start and stop procedures,

1.2 System Layout

Solenoid valve block, water Sludge outlet

Distributes separator opening!

Clean oil outlet

1.3 System Components

~------------------,. Control unit

Sludge and water are discharged at preset time

• Excessive water can also be drained from the

The cleaned oil leaving the separator is tested

The signal from the water transducer is

reference value. A significant deviation from

2.2 Process Cycle Start

First the oil pump, separator, and heater are

1 The change-over valve directs the oil to the

pressure and signals the control unit.

5 The change-over valve opens so that oil is

The control unit calculates and stores the

The cleaning process is now running.

• oil is pumped from the separator.

1 The change-over valve changes to oil

2 Using the flow rate calculated in paragraph 2

3 After the calculated time for displacement

2.4 Increased Water

1 The water drain valve (V5) opens for a

2 The water drain valve closes again, and the

3 If there is still an increase in water content.

• 4 If the water content has decreased, the